MotoSim VRC 5.0 Manual

MotoSim EG-VRC Ver 5.
00
OPERATION MANUAL
FOR WINDOWS
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read this manual thoroughly, and retain for
future reference.
MOTOMAN INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOSIM EG-VRC Ver 5.00 OPERATIONS INSTRUCTIONS
NX100 INSTRUCTIONS
NX 100 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (for each purpose)
NX 100 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DX100 OR DX200 INSTRUCTIONS
DX100 OR DX200 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (for each purpose)
DX100 OR DX200 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FS100 OR FS100L INSTRUCTIONS
FS100 OR FS100L OPERATOR’S MANUAL (for each purpose)
FS100 OR FS100L MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The operator’s manual above corresponds to specific usage. Be sure to use the appropriate manual.
Part Number: 156225-1CD

Revision: 0
1/532
156225-1CD
MotoSim EG-VRC
Ver 5.00
MANDATORY
• This manual explains teaching, playback, editing operations of jobs and files, operation
management of MotoSim EG-VRC. Read this manual carefully and be sure to understand its
contents before operation.
• General items related to safety are listed in instruction manuals supplied with the manipulator. To
ensure correct and safe operation, carefully read the instructions on safety before reading this
manual.
CAUTION
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with the protective covers or shields removed for clarity.
Be sure all covers and shields are replaced before operating this product.
• The drawings and photos in this manual are representative examples and differences may exist
between them and the delivered product.
• YASKAWA may modify this model without notice when necessary due to product improvements,
modifications, or changes in specifications. If such modification is made, the manual number will
also be revised.
• If your copy of the manual is damaged or lost, contact a YASKAWA representative to order a new
copy. The representatives are listed on the back cover. Be sure to tell the representative the
manual number listed on the front cover.
• YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from unauthorized modification of its products.
Unauthorized modification voids your product’s warranty.
• Software described in this manual is supplied against licensee only, with permission to use or
copy under the conditions stated in the license. No part of this manual may be copied or
reproduced in any form without written consent of YASKAWA.
This instruction manual is applicable to both FS100 (a controller for small-sized

NOTE manipulators) and THE FS100L (a controller for large and medium-sized manipulators).
The description of “FS100” refers to both ”FS100” and “FS100L” in this manual unless
otherwise specified.
ii
156225-1CD 2/532
156225-1CD
MotoSim EG-VRC
Ver 5.00
Notes for Safe Operation

Before using this product, read this manual and all the other related documents carefully to ensure
knowledge about the product and safety, including all the cautions.
In this manual, the Notes for Safe Operation are classified as “WARNING”, “CAUTION”,
“MANDATORY”, or ”PROHIBITED”.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

WARNING could result in death or serious injury to personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

CAUTION could result in minor or moderate injury to personnel and
damage to equipment. It may also be used to alert against
unsafe practices.
Always be sure to follow explicitly the items listed under this

MANDATORY heading.
PROHIBITED Must never be performed.
Even items described as “CAUTION” may result in a serious accident in some situations. At any rate,
be sure to follow these important items.
NOTE To ensure safe and efficient operation at all times, be sure to follow all instructions, even if
not designated as “CAUTION” and “WARNING”.
Notation for Menus and Buttons

Descriptions of the programming pendant, buttons, and displays are shown as follows:
Item Manual Designation
Menu The menus displayed on screen are denoted with { }.

ex. {TOOL}.
Button The buttons, check boxes, radio buttons displayed on

screen are denoted with [ ].
ex. [Close]; [Sync] check box; [Fast] radio button.
iii
156225-1CD 3/532
156225-1CD
MotoSim EG-VRC
Ver 5.00
Description of the Operation Procedure

In the explanation of the operation procedure, the expression "Select • • • " means the following
operations:
• To move the cursor to the object item and left-click on it with the mouse.
• To pick out the object item by the tab key and press the Enter key.
(In case of selecting a menu, use arrow keys instead of the tab key to pick out the object item, then
press the Enter key.)
Registered Trademark
In this manual, names of companies, corporations, or products are trademarks, registered trademarks,
or bland names for each company or corporation. The indications of (R) and TM are omitted.
iv
156225-1CD 4/532
Table of Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview of MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 Difference of Operation from Ver 4.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Notice and Restriction about MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Optional Functionof controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.2 Using data saved from a real controller with MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.3 Using MotoSim EG-VRC data on a real controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.4 Function depending on the system version of controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.5 Restriction of Function of Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.6 Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.7 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.8 Supported robot model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3 Environment Required for MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4 Hardware Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5 Installing MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6 Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.7 Folder Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
2 MotoSim EG-VRC Quick Tour

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Cell Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Creation of Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.3.1 Creating a Workpiece and a Workpiece Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.3.2 Editing Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.3.3 Adding a Tool Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.4 Setting of Target Points (AXIS6 Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.5 Teaching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.5.1 Creating a New Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.5.2 Teaching the Standby Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.5.3 Determining the Welding Approach Posture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.5.4 Teaching the Welding Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2.5.5 Teaching the Welding End Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.5.6 Teaching the Torch Retraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.5.7 Returning to the Standby Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.5.8 Verifying Each Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.5.9 Editing a JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.6 Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
156225-1CD 5/532
3 Offline Teaching Procedure
3.1 Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
4 Creating and Editing a Cell

4.1 Creating a New Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1 Template Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Opening a Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3 Storing a Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.3.1 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.3.2 Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.4 Exiting a Cell and MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.5 Designating Relative Path in the Cell File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.6 Exporting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.6.1 Playback animation file export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.6.2 Exported HTML file display operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
5 Displays
5.1 MotoSim EG-VRC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Virtual Pendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.1 DX200 Virtual Pendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.2 DX100 Virtual Pendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.2.3 FS100 Virtual Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.2.4 NX100 Virtual Pendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.2.5 Input with keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
6 Display Operation
6.1 Viewpoint Operation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 Viewpoint Operation with the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 Preset Viewpoint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Light Manager Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3 Displaying Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4 Pick Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
vi
156225-1CD 6/532
6.5 Markup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.5.1 Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.5.2 Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.5.3 Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.5.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.6 Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.7 Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.7.1 X-Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.7.2 Y-Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.7.3 Z-Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.8 Measure Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.9 Measure Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.10 Measure Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.12 Other Display Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.12.1 Changing Frame Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.12.2 Copying the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.12.3 Dividing a Cell Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.12.4 Printing the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
7 Controller and Robot Settings

7.1 Adding a New Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Create a New VRC Controller (no file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 Create VRC Controller (using CMOS.BIN file.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200, DX100, NX100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.1.4 Initializing the Controller (FS100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.1.5 Defining the Robot Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.2 Copying a Controller from another Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3 Deleting a Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.4 Select Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.5 Controller Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.5.1 Tool Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.5.2 User Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.5.3 Reboot Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.5.4 Refresh Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.5.5 Servo Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.5.6 Cube Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.6 Robot Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.6.1 Robot Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.6.2 Reach View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.6.3 Robot Calibration Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
vii
156225-1CD 7/532
7.7 Peripheral Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.7.1 Adding a Conveyor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.7.2 Adding a Press. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.7.3 Adding a Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.7.4 Modifying the Soft Limit of a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.7.5 Moving a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.7.6 Programming a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.7.7 Other Operations with devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.7.8 Conveyor Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.7.9 Conveyor Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.8 Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.9 Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.9.1 Trace Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.9.2 Trace Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.9.3 Trace Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.11 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function . . . . . . 7-53
7.11.1 Displaying Robot Range Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.11.2 Editing the Safety Function Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.11.3 Displaying the Tool Interference Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.11.4 Displaying the Robot Approximate Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
8 Tool Functions
8.1 Position Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Work Frame Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.1.2 Fix TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.1.3 Robot Position Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2 I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.2.1 Dedicated and General I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.2.2 Expanded Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.2.3 Analog I/O (EW Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.2.4 Inputs and Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.3 I/O Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8.3.1 I/O Event Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8.3.2 I/O Event Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8.4 I/O connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.4.1 Management of I/O connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.4.2 I/O Connection setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.5 Variable Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.6 Lap Time Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8.7 Stage Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8.8 Pulse Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
viii
156225-1CD 8/532
8.9 Teaching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.9.1 OLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.9.2 Operation Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.10 Collision Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
8.10.1 Collision Detection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
8.10.2 Collision Model Group Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8.10.3 Collision Definition Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8.11 Sensing Option Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
8.12 Spray Model for Paint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
8.13 Speed Graph Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.13.1 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.13.2 Trace Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.13.3 Graph Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
8.13.4 Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
8.13.5 Graph Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
8.14 Running an External Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.15 Job Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
9 Model Editings
9.1 Cad Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1 Outline of the Cad Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2 Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.3 Opacity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.4 Teacher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.5 Mouse-Driven Model Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2 Creating a New Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3 Editing a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3.1 Displaying the File Data Editing Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3.2 Registering a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.3.3 Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4 Editing a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.5 Positioning a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.6 Editing Multiple Models (Model List). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.7 Searching a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.8 Saving and Reading a Model Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.9 Changing and Moving the Parent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.9.1 Changing the Parent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.9.2 Moving the Parent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.10 Changing a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.11 Reading a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
ix
156225-1CD 9/532
9.12 Model Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.12.1 Model Script Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.12.2 Model Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.12.3 Display of script input assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.13 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
9.14 Changing the Coordinate Origin of CAD Data 
<CADPack Option> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.15 CAD Data Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
10 Configuration Settings
10.1 Graphical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.1 Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Smooth Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.4 Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.5 Frame & AXIS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.6 Level of Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2 Markup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.3 Robot Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.4 Language and Unit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.5 Performance Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.6 CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option> . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.6.1 CAD Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.6.2 IGES/SAT Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.7 Show Teach Point <CadPack Option> . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
11 Applied Operation
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1.1 Teaching Operation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.1.2 Position Designation in Free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.1.3 Position Designation in Vertex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.1.4 Position Designation in Center Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.1.5 Position Designation in Edge Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.1.6 Designation with Orientation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.1.7 Pick Object Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.1.8 Changing of Operation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11.1.9 Move to External Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.1.10 Synchronous Base Axis Move to Target Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
11.1.11 Position Designation with move slave function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
156225-1CD 10/532
11.2 Trace Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.2.1 Changing Trace Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.2.2 Changing Trace Parent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
11.3 Collision Detection Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.4 Adding I/O Board Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
11.4.1 Adding I/O Board Module (DX200, DX100, NX100). . . . . . . . . . 11-36
11.4.2 Adding I/O Board Module (FS100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
11.5 Option Function Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
11.6 Dual-Arm robot Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
11.6.1 Dual-Arm robot Setting (DX100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
11.6.2 Dual-Arm robot Setting (FS100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
11.6.3 Dual-Arm robot Setting (NX100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
11.7 External Axes Setting (Motor Gun). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
11.7.1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
11.7.2 Model setup and motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
11.8 Setting of spot welding simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60
11.8.1 Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60
11.8.2 Setting of welded condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61
11.8.3 Setting of welding machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64
11.8.4 Making and control group setting of job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64
11.8.5 Setting of simulation of electric gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64
11.9 Setting of Conveyor Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65
11.9.1 Overview Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65
11.9.2 System Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-66
11.9.3 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72
11.9.4 Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73
11.10 High-Speed Picking Simulation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-74
11.10.1 Overview Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-74
11.10.2 Advanced Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-81
11.10.3 Specifications of template cell "MPP3_PICKING" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-87
11.11 Converting a MotoSim EG cell to MotoSim EG-VRC . . . 11-89
11.12 Spot High Speed Spec Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-92
11.13 Setting of Paint workpiece supplying system 
"MOTOFEEDER". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-95
11.13.1 Controller Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-96
11.13.2 MOTOFEEDER model setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-99
11.13.3 Relocation of robot and MOTOFEEDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-100
11.13.4 Master job Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-100
11.13.5 Paint job creating and registering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-101
11.13.6 Playback the paint job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-102
xi
156225-1CD 11/532
12 Options
12.1 Motor Load Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Life Estimate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
A
A.1 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.2 Reading the CAD Data with MotoSim EG-VRC. . . . . . . . . . A-12
A.3 Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.3.1 Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.3.2 Save controller data created with MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.3.3 Load controller data to MotoSim EG-VRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.4 Standard function about DX200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.5 Standard function about DX100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A.6 List of Function depending on the system version 
of controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A.7 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values 
Supported by MotoSim EG-VRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
1.8 Frequently-Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
B Revision History
xii
156225-1CD 12/532
1.1 Overview of MotoSim EG-VRC
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview of MotoSim EG-VRC
MotoSim EG-VRC is a software which has been developed as an offline teaching system for
YASKAWA industrial robot MOTOMAN series.
MotoSim EG-VRC reduces teaching time requiring an actual robot, supports improvement of
productivity and insures operator’s safety by enabling robot teaching on a personal computer.
MotoSim EG-VRC is an application software for MS-Windows having excellent operability and
many advantages such as running multiple applications at once.
1.1.1 Difference of Operation from Ver 4.10

The appearance of MotoSim EG-VRC Ver 5.00 differs greatly from Ver 4.10 or before.
Therefore, the difference in the operation method of a main screen is summarized so that the
user before Ver 4.10 could get used early.
• Runs two or more MotoSim EG-VRC. However, the number of the cells which can be
used by MotoSim EG-VRC is one.
• "Docking Window"
• "Quick Access Toolbar"
• "Comparison Table with the New Menu from the Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar"
1-1
156225-1CD 13/532
1.2 Notice and Restriction about MotoSim EG-VRC
1.2.1 Optional Functionof controller

Below is a list of the available optional functions on MotoSim EG-VRC. For any other optional
function not listed below, please consult your Yaskawa representative.
Function Name DX200 DX100 FS100 NX100
Relative Job    
TCP    
Macro Instruction    
I/F Panel    
External Reference Point    
Parallel Start Instruction    
Coordinated Instruction    
Extended Control Group    
Station Angle Display    ―
Softlimits Customization   ― ―
Tool No. Switching    

SI Unit Indication    ―
Display IO Name in Job   *1 ―
Variable Allocation    ―
Functional safety *2 ― ― ―
*1 Standard function for FS100.

*2 Please refer to Section 1.2.5 "Restriction of Function of Controller".
Please refer to section

Section A.4 "Standard function about DX200"
Section A.5 "Standard function about DX100"
for the list of available standard function.
1-2
156225-1CD 14/532
1.2.2 Using data saved from a real controller with 

MotoSim EG-VRC
To use the data saved from a real controller, depending on the environment, there are
circumstance where the "CMOS.BIN' from the real controller can be used.
However, in some cases there may be problem cause by "CMOS.BIN" version incompatibility.
In such cases, please use the individual data file save from the real controller for the jobs,
condition files, parameters, etc. to reconstruct the system environment.
NOTE In regard to the FS100 controller, the "CMOS.BIN" file saved from a real controller can not
be used with MotoSim EG-VRC to create the environment.
1.2.3 Using MotoSim EG-VRC data on a real controller

Some data created with MotoSim EG-VRC can be use on the real controller, and some data
cannot be use.
Job
Condition files
Usable data
General data
All the name data
Parameters
Unusable data
CIO Program
• The "CMOS.BIN" file cannot be saved from MotoSim EG-VRC.

Therefore, the "CMOS.BIN" cannot be used with a real controller.
NOTE • Option function selected by MotoSim EG-VRC can not be executed on the real robot.
• Parameter file or CIO program file of MotoSim EG-VRC can not be executed on the real
robot. YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from using these files.
1.2.4 Function depending on the system version of 

controller
Some functions of MotoSim EG-VRC can not use depending on the system version of
controller. Please refer to Section A.6 "List of Function depending on the system version of
controller".
1.2.5 Restriction of Function of Controller

• MotoSim EG-VRC can not be connected to the real robot or pendant.
• MotoSim EG-VRC can not simulate the job in real time.
• MotoSim EG-VRC can not simulate CIO in real time.
• The function needed the special hardware (sensor, COMARC etc.) is disable.
• VPP is not supported the Enable Switch.
1-3
156225-1CD 15/532
• MotoSim EG-VRC is supported the standard controller version only.

• The simulated coasting range is different from the real robot, when the emergency stop is
done.
• Functional Safety is not supported.
• Some INFORM connecting to the external device is not supported. ARCON/ARCOF
SVSPOT SVSPOTMOV are supported.
• In regard to the NX100 controller, SVSPOT and SVSPOTMOV are not supported.
• Data transmission is not supported.
• Remote mode is not supported.
• Collision Detection is not supported.
• The standard CIO ladder is supported only. Modified CIO ladder is out of guaranteed
operating range. So, lamps at the top of VPP (ex. servo lamp) may not work correctly, or
IO Connect/IO Monitor/IO Event may not work correctly.
• Loading batch CMOS file "CMOSxx.HEX" saved from memory expanded system is
supported only.
• Saving batch CMOS file "CMOSxx.HEX" and all CMOS area file "ALCMSxx.HEX" is not
supported.
• In regard to the FS100 controller series, Loading/Saving/Verifying/Deleting the batch files
and the all CMOS area file is not supported.
The appropriate files are "JOBxx.HEX", "CMOSxx.HEX", and "ALCMSxx.HEX".
• Ladder editor, PP application for arc welding, and MOTOPAL are not supported.
• MotoPlus function, MotomanSync function, and the applications used these functions are
not supported.
• PP customize function is not supported.
• The simulation of spot gun change system is not supported.
• "PP display scroll function DX200 by touching operation" of DX200 controller is not
available.
• Function of MotoSim EG-VRC for Function Safety is available only when the controller is
DX200 and Function safety option is available.
• Function safety in which a simulation is possible on MotoSim EG-VRC is as follows.
Robot Range Limit
Axis Range Limit
Speed Limit
Tool Angle Monitor
Following function safety can not be simulated on MotoSim EG-VRC.
Axis Speed Monitor
Tool Change Monitor
Safety Signal
• When the edited files are loaded to DX200, it is necessary to put it in "SAFETY MODE",
and to disable "SAVE DATA CRC CHECK FUNC.(FSU)". After loading, please make sure
to enable "SAVE DATA CRC CHECK FUNC.(FSU)".
Make sure to check the settings of the DX200.
1-4
156225-1CD 16/532
1.2.6 Accuracy
• Positional Accuracy
When the job made in MotoSim EG-VRC is executed on the real robot, teaching points
may be misaligned by the strain and placement error of work, and the deflection of robot.
So, check the teaching points by NEXT/BACK, and modify them.
• Trajectory Accuracy
The simulated trajectory range is different from the real robot. When the job made in
MotoSim EG-VRC is executed on the real robot, check the teaching points by NEXT/
BACK, and do test running. After sufficient operation check, execute playback.
• Cycle time Accuracy
The simulated cycle time is different from the real robot. If robot job contain the position
level "PL=0" in move command, the resulting cycle time simulation may not provide
sufficient accuracy compared to the actual robot.
• Robot model Accuracy
Robot model is only external form, bolt hole and anchor bolt may be left out. Movable
parts other than robot (ex. cable) can not be simulated.
1.2.7 Hardware Requirements

When simulate follow situation, PC with high-end CPU or graphic board may need.
• Multiple controllers are used. (4 or more)
• High-capacity CAD data is used.
• Collision check is used.
1.2.8 Supported robot model

The robot models supported by MotoSim EG-VRC are those displayed on the virtual pendant
for the controller version selected at the time of creation. Please refer to Section A.7 "List of
Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG-VRC" for the list of
available model.
However, for similar robot model that only have differences in the details of their shape, it
maybe possible to do simulation using the standard robot model (model ending with A0*).
1-5
156225-1CD 17/532
1.3 Environment Required for MotoSim EG-VRC
1.3 Environment Required for MotoSim EG-VRC
To run MotoSim EG-VRC, the following hardware and software are required:
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack3 (32bit)

OS Windows 7 (32bit / 64bit)
JAPANESE and ENGLISH Windows version are supported only. *1
CPU Intel® Core™ 2 Duo or more multi-core processor.
Memory 2 GB or more
Hardware Disk 1 GB or more
Supported by MS-Windows
Monitor
(256 colors or more)
Used under single user environment.

Hardware Key For details, refer to Section 1.4 "Hardware Key" in the following 
section.
Other Graphic Board for 3D.
*1 MS-Windows XP, MS-Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation,

USA.
• MotoSim EG-VRC may not execute correctly, because of PC model, Graphic Board,
NOTE other connected peripherals, and installed software, etc.
• When .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is not installed to a personal computer, it is 
automatically installed by installation of MotoSim EG-VRC.
1-6
156225-1CD 18/532
1.4 Hardware Key
1.4 Hardware Key
A hardware key is supplied with MotoSim EG-VRC and must be attached to your computer's USB port.
Otherwise, MotoSim EG-VRC will not function properly. If multiple USB keys are in use, a USB hub can
be used to expand the number of available USB ports. if you have difficulties using multiple USB
hardware keys, contact Yaskawa Motoman customer service at (937)847-3200.
1.5 Installing MotoSim EG-VRC
1. It is strongly recommended that you exit all applications before running the setup
program..
• Be sure to login in administrator mode when installing the MotoSim EG-VRC in Windows
NOTE XP/7, or else the system related DLL files in Windows might not be updated.
• When .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is not installed in the personal computer, .NET
Framework 3.5 SP1 is automatically installed by installation of MotoSim?EG-VRC.
2. When the install CD is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the 

[MotoSim EG-VRC - InstallShield Wizard] window appears automatically.
If you are using Windows 7, the [User Account Control] dialog appears, so click [OK] in
the dialog.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. When the setup is completed, MotoSim EG-VRC is registered under the 
{MotoSim EG-VRC} folder that appears by clicking the [Start] button in the task bar and
selecting {Program} and then {Motoman}.
5. Connect the hardware key to the printer port or USB port. 
For details, refer to Section 1.4 "Hardware Key".
1-7
156225-1CD 19/532
1.6 Definition of Terms
1.6 Definition of Terms
A file in which MotoSim EG-VRC simulation environmental data

are recorded.
Cell (*.vcl) Folder information to store the operation contents, model file
information such as robots, workpieces or tools, data of
operational environment layout, etc. is recorded.
A file in which geometric data of robots, workpieces or tools are

Model file (*.mdl)
recorded.
Each model requires a coordinate that refers to something in the

layout. Model to which the coordinate of a model refers to is
called "parent model".
The most basic reference model in the MotoSim EG-VRC is
"world". Normally, world becomes parent for workpiece models
Parent model or robot models.
However, since tool models or positioners move along with
external axis or robot axes, they refer to different parent models
than fixed model. Since tool models must move with the robot,
the robot model flange is normally set as the parent model of the
tool model.
1-8
156225-1CD 20/532
1.7 Folder Configuration

 Folder Configuration of Windows 7
¥
Users
Public
Documents
MOTOMAN
MotoSimEG-VRC
CELLS Simulation environment used for the cell

“TEST” is constructed in this directory.
TEST
Stores model files of floor, tool,
workpiece, etc.
MODELS
Stores the controller related
data files.
DX100
Stores the robot data: robot
RB1 model files, etc.

Stores the controller files

STORAGE CARD accessible by the VPP
SAVE/LOAD function.
TEST.VCL Cell file
EXAMPLE Stores sample cell files
TEMPLATE Stores template cell files created by the

template function of MotoSim EG-VRC.
CELLS
Program Files
MOTOMAN Stores the VRC (Virtual Robot Controller)

application files and default data of each
MotoSimEG-VRC controller.
CONTROLLER Stores the files about devices.
DEVICE Stores the help files.
DOC Stores standard models such as controller,

tools, welder, etc.
MODELS
Stores files related to robot models by
ROBOTS controller type.
Files required to run MotoSimEG-VRC such as

executable, initialization files, etc.
The above diagram is based on the assumption that the cell "TEST" is the file in which the
simulation environmental data is stored, and that there is one controller named "NX100" with 2
robots defined under the folders “RB1” and “RB2”.
The model files other than the robot model files are stored in the folder "TEST\MODELS".
1-9
156225-1CD 21/532
 Folder Configuration of Windows XP

¥
Program Files
MOTOMAN
MotoSimEG-VRC
CELLS Simulation environment used for the cell

“TEST” is constructed in this directory.
TEST
Stores model files of floor, tool,
workpiece, etc.
MODELS
Stores the controller related
data files.
DX100
model files, etc.
RB1
Stores the controller files

STORAGE CARD accessible by the VPP
SAVE/LOAD function.
TEST.VCL Cell file
CONTROLLER Stores the VRC (Virtual Robot Controller)

application files and default data of each
controller.
DEVICE Stores the files about devices.
DOC Stores the help files.
EXAMPLE Stores sample cell files
MODELS Stores standard models such as controller,

tools, welder, etc.
ROBOTS Stores files related to robot models by

controller type.
TEMPLATE Stores template cell files created by the

template function of MotoSim EG-VRC.
CELLS
Files required to run MotoSimEG-VRC such as

executable, initialization files, etc.
The above diagram is based on the assumption that the cell "TEST" is the file in which the
simulation environmental data is stored, and that there is one controller named "NX100" with 2
robots defined under the folders “RB1” and “RB2”.
The model files other than the robot model files are stored in the folder "TEST\MODELS".
1-10
156225-1CD 22/532
2.1 Overview
2 MotoSim EG-VRC Quick Tour
This chapter describes the basic operation of MotoSim EG-VRC by giving practical examples
to first time users of this system.
Read this chapter thoroughly in order to quickly take advantage of the excellent operability
and various functions of MotoSim EG-VRC.
2.1 Overview
This chapter describes the procedures from cell construction to job creation. An arc welding
application is used as an example to illustrate the creation of workpieces for fillet-welding and
a welding torch for tool, and then to teach a welding path.
The following sections aim to create a robot, a workpiece and a stand like the ones prepared
in "Arc_samp_NX" sample cell shown in the figure below.
2-1
156225-1CD 23/532
2.2 Cell Construction
1. Click on [START] in the task bar menu, then click {PROGRAM} - {Motoman} -
{MotoSim EG-VRC} - {MotoSim EG-VRC} to run MotoSim EG-VRC. 
2. When the main window appears, Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and
select the [New] - [New] menu.
Select here
3. When the New Cel dialog box appears, enter any cell name: a folder where cells,
parameter data, model data, job data, etc. are stored can also be set. (The new folder
name is the same as the cell name.) In this example, the "TestCell" cell is created in
the "CELLS" folder in the "Cells" folder. 
Enter "CelTest" in the File name edit box and click the [OK] button.
2-2
156225-1CD 24/532
4. The new cell with only a floor model appears.

Register a controller in the cell by selecting the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group,
click the [New] button.
Select here
5. The “Create Controller with” will display.

Select “No CMOS.BIN file” and press the [OK] button.
6. Select the controller system version, then press the [OK] button.
2-3
156225-1CD 25/532
7. Controller Initialization.
The virtual controller will boot with the selected sytem version. This may take a few
moments. Once the boot up is completed, the virtual pendant will display in
maintenance mode along with the “Controller Maintenance Mode Instructions” guide. 
When adding a controller with “No CMOS.BIN”, the controller needs to be initialized.
Follow the steps displayed by the intstruction guide dialog to initialize the controller. 
When asked for the “Control Group”, select the robot “HP6-A0*” for the R1 group
(press the spacebar to display the list of available robots.) 
When all the initialization steps are completed, press the [Complet] button of the
instruction guide dialog to reboot the controller in normal operation mode.
8. Once the virtual controller has rebooted, the virtual programming pendant will display
in normal mode. 
In the “Robot Settings” dialog that will also appear, enter a name for the robot (for this
example, the default name “NX100-RB1” is used.) Select the model file corresponding
to the robot type (for the HP6-A0* select the “HP6-a00.mdl” file).
Press the [OK] button.
2-4
156225-1CD 26/532
9. When the controller registration has been completed normally, the robot model
appears in the cell screen as shown in the figure below. 

However, as shown in the following figure, the robot may be displayed as if it is sank in
the floor. This is because the offset value of the robot operational origin and the floor
center coordinate has been set to 0 (initial value). In this case, correct the robot
position by following steps 10 and 11. 
2-5
156225-1CD 27/532
10. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, display the Cad
Tree selection box.
Select “NX100-RB1” and click on [Pos] button.
2-6
156225-1CD 28/532
11. In the Position dialog box below, the robot model can be moved to any arbitrary place. 
In the case of NX100-RB1, the height from the floor to the robot operational origin is
450 mm, enter "450" for "Z" and click the [OK] button.
The height from the floor to the robot operational origin (here the height is 450 mm) can be
obtained by measuring the distance between the floor and the robot bottom by clicking the
on the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the [Distance] button. Refer to
Section 5.1 "MotoSim EG-VRC Display" for the details of measuring tools, and Section A.7
NOTE "List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG-VRC" for each
robot offset values.
Distance between the

robot frame and the floor.
When initialized the robot controller, MotoSim EG-VRC set the absolute data
NOTE automatically. So absolute setting is not needed in MotoSim EG-VRC.
Refer to " 7.1.4 Initializing the Controller (FS100) " for details.
2-7
156225-1CD 29/532
2.3 Creation of Models
This section explains how to create workpiece models and tool models using the CAD
functions.
2.3.1 Creating a Workpiece and a Workpiece Stand

Follow the flowchart below to create a workpiece and its stand.
Start
Create workpiece stand model

file in Cad Tree.
Add BOX model in file data

editing dialog box.
Set model size and position

in BOX Edit dialog box.
Create workpiece model file

in Cad Tree.
Add parts in the file data

editing dialog box.
Set sizes and positions of

parts in BOX Edit dialog box.
End
2-8
156225-1CD 30/532
1. The dimensions of the workpiece model and workpiece stand model are shown in the
following figure:
600
600
400
Workpiece Stand Model
500
25
200
200
30
Units: mm
Workpiece Model
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [CadTree] 
dialog appears.
2-9
156225-1CD 31/532
3. When the Cad Tree appears, select "world" from the model tree; select {New Model} in
the right-click menu, or click the [Add] button.
Click the [Add] button
NOTE To create a new model in the model selection screen, verify that the cursor is pointed to
"world" so that it will be the parent model.
4. Enter "STAND" (a word for “stand” in Japanese) in the Add Model Dialog box and click
the [OK] button. 
A confirmation dialog box appears, to create the new model: click on [OK].
2-10
156225-1CD 32/532
5. The "STAND" model appears in the Cad Tree: point the cursor to "STAND" and double-
click it.
The “STAND” model is

added here.
6. The model editing dialog box appears: select “BOX” from the "Add Parts" combo box,
and click [Add].
The “STAND” model is

added here.
7. The BOX Edit dialog box appears: input the dimensions of the workpiece stand.
When a part is added with the [Add] button, the parts editing dialog box appears
NOTE automatically. However, to reedit a part that has already been added, use the [Edit] button
to display the part editing dialog box after selecting the subject part name.
2-11
156225-1CD 33/532
Select 400 for width, 600 for depth and 400 for height by using the spin button at the side
of the edit box or by entering the values directly. The incremental values of the spin box can
be changed from 0.1 to 100 in the incremental value list box. Select desired colors, and check
if the stand is displayed properly. 
When satisfied, click the [OK] button to return to the file data editing box. Click the [Close]
button in the file data editing dialog box to complete the creation of workpiece stand model.
8. The workpiece stand model is located at the center of the floor under the current
conditions: therefore, click the [Pos] button in the Cad Tree to display the position
dialog box, and input 800 for X, 0 for Y and 200 for Z to modify the model location.
2-12
156225-1CD 34/532
9. To create a workpiece, set "STAND" as the parent model by pointing the cursor to
"STAND" in the Cad Tree. Create a new model named "WORK" as shown in the
figures below.
10. Display the BOX Edit dialog box by selecting "BOX" from the "Add Parts" combo box in
the model editing dialog box, then click [Add].
2-13
156225-1CD 35/532
11. Set the workpiece size and position as shown in the table below in the BOX Edit dialog
box: this model will be the bottom part of the fillet-welding workpiece.
Width (W) 200 Depth (D) 500 Height (H) 30
X (mm) 0 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 0
Rx (degree) 0 Ry (degree) 0 Rz (degree) 0
12. The model is currently displayed in the center of STAND model: to modify its position,
first close the BOX Edit dialog box by clicking [OK] and the file data editing dialog box
by clicking [Close]; after closing those dialog boxes, click the [Pos] button in Cad Tree
to display the Position dialog box, and enter 0 for X, 0 for Y, and 215 for Z to display
WORK model on top of STAND model.
Place the “WORK”

model on top of the
“STAND” model
13. Create the upper part of the workpiece: the upper workpiece is composed of a second
BOX part. Double-click "WORK" in Cad Tree to call up the file data editing dialog box,
and add another BOX model (note that this operation should not be done by clicking
the [Add] button in the Cad Tree).
2-14
156225-1CD 36/532
14. Set the workpiece size and position as shown in the table below in the BOX Edit dialog
box.
X (mm) 0 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 115
15. Check if the workpiece model has been created according to the dimensions specified
in the step 1. 
If the model has different dimensions or to change the color of the model, proceed to
the step 16 and 17 to make modifications.
16. Display the BOX Edit dialog box by pointing the cursor to BOX model to be edited
among the models added to the Cad Tree, then double-click it.
17. Reedit the workpiece size, etc. in the BOX Edit dialog box. To modify the color of the
model, click on the [Color...] button.
2-15
156225-1CD 37/532
2.3.2 Editing Tool Data

This section explains on how to edit the tool data. The tool to be created is a torch for arc-
welding. The tool dimensions are: 0 mm for X, 0 mm for Y, and 395 mm for Z.
1. On the Virtual Programming Pendant, select from the main menu {ROBOT} - {TOOL}.
2. The TOOL settings appear. Move the cursor with the arrow keys to the Z field. Press
the [Spacebar] to select the Z field for edition and enter the value “395”. Press [Enter]
to register the entered value. Repeat the same procedure for the Ry field and enter a
value of -35. (In this example, the tool end curves by “Ry = -35” relative to the flange
axis.
2-16
156225-1CD 38/532
2.3.3 Adding a Tool Model

There are two ways to add a tool model:
(1) Create a tool model with the CAD function of MotoSim EG-VRC.
(2) Read a tool model in the HSF format (*.hsf).
First, method (1) is used to explain the creation of a tool model with the MotoSim EG-VRC
CAD function.
In method (2), an HSF format model is used; this is explained in "Reading the HSF Format
Model" later on.
 Creating and Adding a Tool Model with the CAD Function
Follow the flowchart below to create a tool model.
Part A
Start
Create a tool model file in

Cad Tree. Part B
Add parts in the file data

editing dialog box.
Set parts size and layout in

BOX Edit dialog box. Part C
Click on [Close] button in

the file data editing dialog
box after verification.
Part D
End
2-17
156225-1CD 39/532
1. Display the Cad Tree to create a new model names "TOOL". In this case, point the
cursor to "NX100-RB1_flange" and create a new model so that the parent model of the
tool model is the flange of the robot. 

Select the
NX100-RB1_flange
model and click [Add]

If the parent model is not set correctly, change the parent model by selecting 
{Model Attribute} - {Set Parent } as shown in the following figure.
Select the parent

model in this
dialog box.
2-18
156225-1CD 40/532
2. The dimensions of the tool model are shown in the following figure:
150 70
70
X Y
80
Z Z
20
170
145
35°
30
Units: mm
Y
3. Double-click "TOOL" in the Cad Tree to display the file data editing dialog box, and add
parts in the file data editing dialog box. 
The tool model is composed of two BOX models and two CYLINDER models. Assume
these four parts as parts A, B, C and D, respectively: edit parts A and B in the BOX edit
dialog box and parts C and D in the CYLINDER Edit dialog box. 
The following tables show the size and layout of each parts A, B, C and D.
• Part A (BOX)
X (mm) 0 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 40
• Part B (BOX)
X (mm) 40 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 90
2-19
156225-1CD 41/532
• Part C (CYLINDER)
Lower Dia. 30 Height (mm) 170 Division 16 Upper Dia. 30
X (mm) 80 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 100
• Part D (CYLINDER)
Lower Dia. 30 Height (mm) 145 Division 16 Upper Dia. 30
X (mm) 80 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 270
Rx (degree) 0 Ry (degree) -35 Rz (degree) 0
4. When the parts are all added, check the tool model on the screen, then click on the
[Close] button to exit the file data editing dialog box.
5. Verify that the size and layout of the tool model, STAND model and WORK model are
properly set, and click the [Close] button in the Cad Tree to complete creation of the
models.
2-20
156225-1CD 42/532
 Reading the HSF Format Model

This section describes how to add a tool model which is provided as an HSF format (*.hsf).
If the tool model has been already added in the previous section "Creating and Adding a Tool
Model with the CAD Function", select "TOOL" from the Cad Tree and select "Hide" to hide it.
1. Select "NX100-RB1_tcp" in Cad Tree and click [Add] to display the Add Model Dialog
dialog box, then enter "TOOL2" in the Name edit box.
2-21
156225-1CD 43/532
2. Click the [...] button of the file name and select "Torch.hsf" file in the folder
"Models\Torch"; click the [OK] button.
Select the “Torch” folder
Select the “Torch.hsf” file
Select the file type
The HSF model files can be added by drag and drop from the Explorer. (Refer to Section
NOTE 9.11 "Reading a Model" for details.) In this case, answer "Yes" when prompt "Select the
parent model? and then select "NX100-RB1_tcp" as the parent.
2-22
156225-1CD 44/532
2.4 Setting of Target Points (AXIS6 Model)
This section explains on how to add an AXIS6 model before starting to teach. This procedure
is not necessarily required, however, it makes future teaching easier.
AXIS6 is a model composed of only X, Y, and Z-axis frames. Set AXIS6 as target points for
the following two steps which will be teach later.
• Step 3: welding start position
• Step 4: welding end position
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button to display OLP
dialog box as shown below. Select the [Teacher] radio button in the “Operation Obj”
section, check the [OLP Pick] check box.
Check the “Pick

Enable” box
Select “Teacher”
2-23
156225-1CD 45/532
2. Set the Teacher to the welding start position of Step 3: click the welding start position
with [Enable] checked.
Click here.
3. Set the Teacher to optimum angle for the tool welding position: in the following
example, welding is performed at an angle of 45° to the welding position. Press the
[Display Position] button from the OLP panel and set Rx, Ry and Rz as shown below.
4. Double-click the "WORK" model in the Cad Tree and add AXIS6 in the file editing
dialog box.
5. Click on [Add] and verify that the number “1” has been added to the Index list box.
Then, check the [Pose] check box in the Teacher group and click the [Goto] button.
With this operation, the teacher frame color in the cell window changes, which means
that AXIS6 has been set to the teacher coordinate and orientation and now overlaps it.
2-24
156225-1CD 46/532
6. Set AXIS6 to the welding end point by performing steps 1 and 2 again, however, since
the welding end point is to be set this time, be sure to click the part shown below in the
OLP function. (Since the teacher angle has already been modified in the 3rd step, the
angle modification is not necessary here.)
Click here.
7. Add frame number 2 by clicking the [Insert] button in Frame Edit dialog box for AXIS6
which has been previously set; verify that the [Pose] check box is checked and click on
[Goto].
8. When AXIS6 is set, click on [OK] to complete the setting.
2-25
156225-1CD 47/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5 Teaching
Follow the flowchart below to create an actual job for arc-welding.
Start
Select a job.
Step1: Set in the standby

position.
Step2: Determine the welding

approach posture.
Step 3: Move to welding start

position.
Step 4: Determine welding

end position.
Step 5: Move to the position

where the robot does
not interfere with
workpiece.
Step 6: Return to the standby

position.
Verify each step.
End
2-26
156225-1CD 48/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5.1 Creating a New Job

Create a new job before teaching:
1. On the virtual pendant main menu, select {JOB} - {CREATE NEW JOB}
2. With the cursor in the “JOB NAME” field, press the [Spacebar] to select the “JOB
NAME” field and display the alphanumeric input window. Enter a name for the job. 
For this example, enter "GUIDE" in the “Result” field and then press [ENTER]. To enter
a name for the job, the keyboard is also available. For details, please refer to the "
5.2.5 Input with keyboard ".
3. Click the [EXECUTE] button or press [ENTER], to create the new job.
2-27
156225-1CD 49/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5.2 Teaching the Standby Position

1. Press the [SERVO ON] button. Once the servo power is activated, move the robot to
its standby position by using the Virtual Pendant axis keys. 
To display or hide the pendant keypad, press the [/] key or click on the icon.
2-28
156225-1CD 50/532
2.5 Teaching
2. In the input line, select the motion type using the [MOTION TYPE] key of the pendant
keypad. 
For this example, select joint motion (MOVJ)
3. Set the motion speed:

• Press [Select] to the focus in the input line.
• Move the cursor to the speed value with the cursor key.
• Select the speed value by using the [SHIFT] and the up and down arrow of the cur-
sor key.
For this example, set the motion:
• Type: Joint Motion (MOVJ)
• Speed: 100%
4. Press [Enter] to register the motion instruction to the robot current position.
2.5.3 Determining the Welding Approach Posture

Use the virtual pendant to posture the robot so that it can perform welding.
Press [Enter] to register this step (Step 2).
2-29
156225-1CD 51/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5.4 Teaching the Welding Start Position

1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button to display the OLP
dialog box.
2. Select the [OLP Pick] check box and [Vertex] check box in the “Pick type” section, and
click an arbitrary point; the TCP moves to overlap the vertex near the clicked point. 
To make the most of the AXIS6 which has been set to the welding start point in the
previous section, the OLP settings should be made as follows:
• OLP Active: Checked
• Move Mode: Position, Orientation
• Pick Mode: Vertex
• Pick Object: Frames
• Operation Object: Robot Name (NX100-RB1)
3. Click on AXIS6 displayed on the screen with the mouse as shown in the figure below:
the tool angle is adjusted to the angle of the AXIS6. 
If the tool collides with the workpiece due to an improper tool angle, avoid the collision
by manually repositioning the robot with the programming pendant dialog box.
Click around here.
4. With the virtual pendant, set the motion:

• Speed: 25%
5. Press [Enter] to register this step (Step 3).
2-30
156225-1CD 52/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5.5 Teaching the Welding End Position

1. Enable the OLP function and click on AXIS6 which has been set to the welding end
point to move the tool to the welding end point.
Click around here.
2. With the virtual pendant, set the motion:

• Type: Linear Motion (MOVL)
• Speed: 558 cm/min
2-31
156225-1CD 53/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5.6 Teaching the Torch Retraction

1. Use the virtual pendant axis keys to move the robot away from the weld.
2. Set the motion:

• Speed: 50%
2-32
156225-1CD 54/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5.7 Returning to the Standby Position

1. On the virtual pendant, move the cursor in the job to the first step. 
Press and hold the [FWD] key on the virtual pendant keypad to move the robot to this
position.
(Use the [FAST] and [SLOW] keys to adjust the speed for manual operation.)
When the robot reaches the position for step 1, the robot will stop and the job cursor
will stop blinking.
2. Set the motion:

• Speed: 100%
3. Move the job cursor back to Step 5 (before the END command).
2-33
156225-1CD 55/532
2.5 Teaching
2.5.8 Verifying Each Step

On the virtual pendant, move the cursor in the job to the first step. 
Press and hold the [FWD] key on the virtual pendant keypad to move the robot to this position.
When the robot reaches the position, the robot will stop and the job cursor will stop blinking.
Release the [FWD] key, then press it again to move to the next step of the job. Repeat until
the end of the job is reached.
2.5.9 Editing a JOB

A JOB can be edited with the following procedure.
 Modifying Steps Position

1) Move the cursor to the step to be modify.
2) Move the robot to the desired position using the virtual pendant or MotoSim EG-
VRC functions (OLP, Position panel...)
3) Press the [MODIFY] key of the pendant keypad and the [ENTER] key.
 Adding Steps
1) Move the cursor to the step preceding the insertion point.
2) Move the robot to the desired position using the virtual pendant or MotoSim EG-
VRC functions (OLP, Position panel...)
3) Set the motion type and motion speed.
4) Press the [ADD] key of the pendant keypad and then the [ENTER] key
 Deleting Steps or Instructions

1) Move the cursor to the instruction to delete.
2) If the instruction is a motion instruction (step), move the robot to the step position
by pressing and holding the [FWD] key until the robot stops moving and the
cursor stops blinking.
3) Press the [DELETE] key of the pendant keypad and then the [ENTER] key.
2-34
156225-1CD 56/532
2.6 Playback
2.6 Playback
1. On the virtual pendant, move the job cursor to the top of the job.
2. In MotoSim EG-VRC, click the job execution button [Start] to perform playback and
check the movement.
3. When the playback is completed, the play time can be displayed by clicking [Trace] to
show the Trace Manager dialog.
• To modify the job after playback the virtual pendant next to be change back to teach
NOTE mode by pressing the [TEACH] button.
• During the execution of job, please do not sleep or hibernate the PC.
The display of cell window may not recover.
2-35
156225-1CD 57/532
3.1 Operation Flow
3 Offline Teaching Procedure
This chapter describes the procedure for offline teaching and examination of robot application
with MotoSim EG-VRC, and other related software.
3.1 Operation Flow
The following flowchart shows the general flow of the offline teaching using MotoSim EG.
Start
Construct MotoSim EG-VRC operational

Work cell construction
environment (cell) on the computer.
Registration of controller and Register created controller and layout the robots
arrangement of robots in the cell.
Create models to represent the workpiece, tool,

Creation of work model and etc. using MotoSim EG-VRC. Set target points
teaching target points
to simplify teaching.
Model arrangement Layout the model on the cell.
Teaching of robot motion

Perform teaching and playback by using
MotoSim EG-VRC to examine the motion.
Review of robot motion, time and
interference
Saving of jobs, parameters and From the virtual pendant menu, select {FD/CF} -
tool data. {SAVE} ans save the job and data.
Correct the layout error between MotoSim EG-

Correction
(work calibration)
VRC and the actual manipulator.
Send/receive job and data to the actual

JOB data transfer to the controller using CompactFlash or transmission
actual controller
software.
Verification/correction of the motion Reduce the error between MotoSim EG-VRC

using the actual robot.
data and actual robot using calibration software,
and verify and correct the motion.
End
Solid lines indicate operation by MotoSim EG-VRC and dotted lines indicate operations by
other software.
3-1
156225-1CD 58/532
4.1 Creating a New Cell
4 Creating and Editing a Cell
This chapter explains on how to create and edit a cell. Before starting to program robot
motion with MotoSim EG-VRC, first create a cell and then register the controllers with the type
and number of the robots to be used.
For controller and robot registration, refer to Section 7.1 "Adding a New Controller".
Procedure
1. Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [New] - [New] menu.
2. Enter a file name in the File name edit box, and click on [Open] to create a basic cell.
Enter a file name here.
4.1.1 Template Function

If the template cells are registered, the new cell is created from the template, so creation time
is shortened. And the template cells can be renamed and deleted.
 Registration of Template
The cell are currently open is registered as the template. When many cells with same robot
configuration are created, creating the cell can be easily through the use of the template.
Procedure
1. Open the cell to register as template.
2. Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [New] - [Template] menu.
4-2
156225-1CD 59/532
3. Select the [Template] radio button, and click the [Add] button.
4. Set the name of template, and click the [OK] button.
4-3
156225-1CD 60/532
5. The registered template is displayed in the template list.
 Rename the Template

The registered template is renamed.
Procedure
2. Select the name of template to rename in the template list.
3. Select the [Template] radio button, and click the [Rename] button.
4-4
156225-1CD 61/532
4. Set the new name of template, and click the [OK] button.
5. The renamed template is displayed in the template list.
 Delete the template

The registered template is deleted.
Procedure
4-5
156225-1CD 62/532
2. Select the name of template to delete in the template list.
3. Select the [Template] radio button, and click the [Delete] button.
4. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
4-6
156225-1CD 63/532
5. The deleted template disappears in the template list.
 Create the new cell from the template

The new cell is created from the registered template.
Procedure
2. Select the name of template to delete in the template list.
3. Select the [Create cell from template] radio button, and set the name of new cell.
4. Click the [Create cell] button.
4-7
156225-1CD 64/532
5. The new cell is created. If the [Open the created cell] is checked, the new cell is
opened.
4-8
156225-1CD 65/532
4.2 Opening a Cell
4.2 Opening a Cell
Procedure
1. Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Open] - [Open] menu.
When the sample cell is opened, click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select
the [Open] - [Open Sample Cell] menu.
2. Select a cell file, and click on [Open]: the cell appears.
When opening a cell with LINE data (wire frame), it is recommended to use LINE data in
NOTE the HMF format: opening a cell with LINE data in other format may take some time.
If the LINE data is in the format other than HMF, convert the LINE data with “MDL2HMF.EXE”
(located in a folder where MotoSim EG has been installed).
4-9
156225-1CD 66/532
4.2 Opening a Cell
If there is a model in the RWX format in the cell, the following dialog box appears.
Click on [OK] to open the cell: the cell opens after the model in RWX format is automatically
converted to HMF format.
• When the model is converted, a cell with corresponding HMF format will automatically be
NOTE created as well: the RWX format cell will be saved under the name "*.vcl.BCL".
• If the cell created upon the model conversion is not saved, the model will be converted
again the next time the cell is open.
4-10
156225-1CD 67/532
4.3 Storing a Cell
4.3 Storing a Cell
A cell file can be stored either under it current name “Save” or under a new name “Save As”.
Newer cell files containing HSF files may not display properly on older MotoSim EG-VRC
NOTE versions. If a cell file need to be used with an older MotoSim EG-VRC version, it is
recommended to save it in the corresponding version with the "Save As" dialog box.
4.3.1 Save
To store a file under its current name, click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select
the [Save] menu.
If the cell file was loaded from an older MotoSim EG-VRC version, the following message will
display to confirm if the cell should be saved in the cell original format or in the MotoSim EG-
VRC current version.
Click [Yes] to save the file in MotoSim EG-VRC current version. Click [No] to save the file in
its original version. Click [Cancel] to abort saving the cell file.
4-11
156225-1CD 68/532
4.4 Exiting a Cell and MotoSim EG-VRC
4.3.2 Save As
To store a file under a new name, click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the
[Save As] menu. Then store the file with the desired cell name. By changing the "Save as
type" selection, the cell file may also be saved in a previous MotoSim EG-VRC format.
4.4 Exiting a Cell and MotoSim EG-VRC
To exit MotoSim EG-VRC, click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Exit]
menu.
They can also be terminated by clicking button in the control menu box on each window.
4.5 Designating Relative Path in the Cell File
When clicking the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and the [Relative Path] menu item as a
check mark in front. the path informations stored in the cell file are relative to the cell file folder.
If unchecked, the full path starting from the driver root is stored in the cell file. The check mark
can be toggled by selecting [Relative Path] . A cell saved with relative path is easier to
transfer to another computer. To store the file (refer to Section 4.3 "Storing a Cell").
4-12
156225-1CD 69/532
4.6 Exporting a File
This section explains how to output the current display of the models in the cell window to an
HTML files. The output file is in 3 dimensions and enables changing viewpoint, zoom, etc.
Procedure
1. Determine the display state of the models on the cell window.
2. Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Export] menu. Select the
export file format in the "Save as type" box and save the file with the desired file name.
• When exporting to HTML format, a HTML file and a HSF file are saved. Both files are
required to display the HTML data properly.
• When exporting HSF file format, only the HSF file is saved. A separate application
supporting HSF format display will be required to view the HSF file by itself.
NOTE • When storing the cell as an HTML file, be sure that the folder name consists of one-byte
characters only; a file with two-byte characters may not be successfully opened.
• To view the cell saved in HTML file, use a personal computer which has access to the
Internet. When viewing the HTML files of the simulation, an Internet connection is
required to install the necessary ActiveX controls. Allow any ActiveX controls blocked by
Windows security settings.
4-13
156225-1CD 70/532
4.6.1 Playback animation file export

Job playback animation of the cell display can be exported to HTML file format.
• When the job is executed, click the button.

NOTE (If the click the [PLAY] button on the virtual pendant, the animation file is not included.)
• The color change of models occurring during playback (such as collision check) will not
be included in the animation file.
Procedure
1. Set the display status of the models in the cell.
2. Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Options] menu. Under the
"Robot Options" tab, in the "Animation Playback" section, check the "Export HSF file"
box.
3. Select the job for which you want to create an animation. Playback the entire job.
4. Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Export] menu. In the "Save
as type" box select "HTML Page (*.html). Save the file under the desired file name.
(This will also save an HSF file.)
4.6.2 Exported HTML file display operations

Once the exported HTML file is open, the view can be manipulated with the mouse.
• The view can be change by clicking, holding and dragging with the left mouse button. To
set camera manipulation mode, right mouse click on the view and select one of the
following mode: Orbit (Rotate), Pan (Shift), Zoom (Zoom), Zoom to Window (Zoom to
Extents). For detail on the camera mode, please refer to Section 5.1 "MotoSim EG-VRC
Display".
• In the case of HTML animation file, to playback the animation right mouse click and select
{Animation} - {Play}. The playback can be paused/resumed by right clicking and selecting
{Animation} - {Pause}. The animation can be reset to the beginning by right clicking and
selecting {Animation} - {Rewind}.
4-14
156225-1CD 71/532
5.1 MotoSim EG-VRC Display
5 Displays
MotoSim EG-VRC has various displays. The main MotoSim EG-VRC display shows the cell
layout and the robot motion in a 3D environment. Also, for every VRC controller in the cell
there is a Virtual Pendant that allows to operate the VRC controller in the same manner than
the real controller.
For improvement of operability, the basic operations of MotoSim EG-VRC are common with
those of other Windows applications.
The following figure shows the MotoSim EG-VRC main window.
The appearance of MotoSim EG-VRC Ver 5.00 differs greatly from Ver 4.10 or
NOTE before. For more detail, please refer to the Section 1.1.1 "Difference of Operation
from Ver 4.10".
MotoSim EG-VRC button
Quick Access Toolbar

Title bar
Tab
Ribbon
Group
Docking Window Cell window
5-1
156225-1CD 72/532
5.1.1 Ribbon
The ribbon is a command bar that organizes the features of an application into a series of tabs
at the top of the main window. The ribbon replaces the traditional menu bar and toolbars.
 MotoSim EG-VRC button
Creates a new cell.

For details, refer to Section 4.1 "Creating a New Cell" .
Create the new cell form the template.

For details, refer to Section 4.1.1 "Template Function"
Reads an existing cell.

For details, refer to Section 4.2 "Opening a Cell".
5-2
156225-1CD 73/532
Reads an existing sample cell.

For details, refer to Section 4.2 "Opening a Cell".
Saves the edited cell information of a cell file.

For details, refer to Section 4.3.1 "Save".
Save the active cell file with a new name.

For details, refer to Section 4.3.2 "Save As".
The display state of the model currently displayed on the cell

is outputted to an HTML file as it is.
For details, refer to Section 4.6 "Exporting a File".
Description of the path information on a cell is carried out to a

relative path.
For details, refer to Section 4.5 "Designating Relative Path in
the Cell File".
The help of MotoSim EG-VRC is displayed.
The help of a MotoSim EG-VRC CAM function is displayed.
Displays the Option dialog box.

For details, refer to Chapter 10 "Configuration Settings".
To close the active cell.

For details, refer to Section 4.4 "Exiting a Cell and MotoSim
EG-VRC".
5-3
156225-1CD 74/532
 Home
Edit
Undoes the last operation.

Click the down arrows beside the icon to display the last 9 operations.
Selecting an operation from the list will undo this operation and all the
operations performed after.
Redoes the last undone operation.

Click the down arrows beside the icon to display the last 9 undone operations.
Selecting an operation from the list will redo this operation and all the undone
operations performed before.
• Undo and Redo function supports the robot position change, model edition, Cad Tree
operations and camera viewpoint operations. Any operation generated by the virtual
pendant or the playback of a JOB is not supported by the Undo and Redo function.
NOTE • Undo and Redo function may generate temporary files (mseg????.tmp) located in the
Temp folder under the MotoSimEG installation folder. Deleting these files while
MotoSimEG-VRC is running may prevent undoing some operations. Normal termination
of the MotoSimEG-VRC application will automatically remove all temporary files in this
folder.
Teaching
Displays the Position Panel.

Position Panel displays the robot position, pulse data, etc.
For details, refer to Section 8.1 "Position Panel".
Displays OLP dialog box and enables OLP function. Moves the end of the
robot tool or a model to a target point with one-click operation.
For details, refer to Section 8.9 "Teaching".
Displays the Job Browser.

For details, refer to Section 8.15 "Job Browser".
5-4
156225-1CD 75/532
For detail on the CAM function please refer to CAM help (click and
select [CAM Help] menu).
• This function is available MotoSim EG-VRC ver4.00 or later.

• To use this function (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-VRC-
NOTE CadPack is required. (The MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is
separate product from MotoSim EG-VRC.)
• For Laser-welding use and Laser-cutting use, the additional
options sold separately are needed.
View
Displays the View Manager panel, which offers a wider selection of

standard view and allows to save and load up to 10 user defined
views.
For details, refer to Section 6.1.2 "Preset Viewpoint Operation".
Displays all the models in the cell to fit in the view.
Change the viewpoint to display the default isometric view.
Changes the viewpoint to display the default top view.
Change the viewpoint to display the default side view.
Changes the viewpoint to display the default front view.
Model
Selects a model: click any point of the desired model for selection.
Displays the model “Cad Tree” (tree structure organization of the models),
indicating models display status and relationship. Can be used to add and
edit models.
For details, refer to Section 9.1.1 "Outline of the Cad Tree".
5-5
156225-1CD 76/532
Pick
The Pick Mode sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked
area.
For details, refer to "Pick Mode Setting".
Pick object set filters on the type of objects that can be selected by the mouse
pick.
For details, refer to "Pick Object Setting".
Screen
Toggles display of the AXIS6 in frame indicators in the view.
Displays cross-section X/Y/Z.

For details, refer to Section 6.7 "Cutting Planes".
Creates a memo (text).

For details, refer to Section 6.6 "Memo".
Creates a dimension line.

For details, refer to Section 6.10 "Measure Line".
Draws a free-form line/circle/rectangle or adds a note (text).

For details, refer to Section 6.5 "Markup".
5-6
156225-1CD 77/532
The display mode can be change.

For details, refer to Section 6.11 "Changing the Rendering Mode".
Changes the frame line to display the width.

For details, refer to Section 6.12.1 "Changing Frame Width".
Displays the Light Manager panel, which allows to add or remove

lights, and to modify each light's properties.
For details, refer to Section 6.2 "Light Manager Operation".
Shadows can be displayed for the models on the screen.

For details, refer to Section 6.3 "Displaying Shadows".
Mesurement
Measures the distance between two clicked points.

For details, refer to Section 6.8 "Measure Distance".
Measures the angle between three clicked points.

For details, refer to Section 6.9 "Measure Angle".
Tools
Copy the static image of the cell window.

For details, refer to Section 6.12.2 "Copying the Image".
Drawing performance is measured.
External software is executed.

For details, refer to Section 8.14 "Running an External Software".
Settings
The re-drawing interval at the playback is set every second (s).

For details, refer to Section 7.5.4 "Refresh Interval".
Sets the language.

For details, refer to Section 10.4 "Language and Unit Settings".
5-7
156225-1CD 78/532
For details, refer to Section 8.9.2 "Operation Handle".
Operation Handle NOTE This function is available with the following robots only.
FS100 BMDA003-A00
Display/Hide the Operation handle.
When operate the Operation handle, the selected robot (R1 or R2)
only moves.
When operate the Operation handle, the selected robot and

another robot move to keep their TCP the same relative position.
Select the coordinate of the Operation handle.

The following coordinates are available.
Display the control group of the current job.
Display/Hide the tool names at the tip of tool (TCP).
 Controller
Setup
Create a new controller and define a system in MotoSim EG-VRC.

For details, refer to Section 7.1 "Adding a New Controller".
A controller already define in a MotoSimEG-VRC cell can be copied over to

another cell.
For details, refer to Section 7.2 "Copying a Controller from another Cell".
To delete the controller and its associated robots from a cell.

For details, refer to Section 7.3 "Deleting a Controller".
5-8
156225-1CD 79/532
Boot
Reboot the controller to update parameter changes.

For details, refer to Section 7.5.3 "Reboot Controller".
The controller is rebooted in the maintenance mode.

For details, refer to Section 7.10 "VRC Maintenance Mode".
VPP
Displays the Virtual Pendant.

Virtual Pendant can be operated same as Teaching Pendant of each
controller.
For details, refer to Section 5.2 "Virtual Pendant".
Open the Storage Card folder
File Settings
Modify the tool data file.

For details, refer to Section 7.5.1 "Tool Editor".
Modify the user frame data.

For details, refer to Section 7.5.2 "User Frame".
Modify robot callbration data file.

For details, refer to Section 7.6.3 "Robot Calibration Setting".
Set the welding machine for spot welding.

For details, refer to Section 11.8.3 "Setting of welding machine".
Display/delete the cube interference area.

For details, refer to Section 7.5.6 "Cube Interference Area".
5-9
156225-1CD 80/532
Display and modify the safety function.

For details, refer to Section 7.11 "Displaying model / Editing
Data of Safety Function".
Robot
Set the robot model.

For details, refer to Section 7.6.1 "Robot Property".
Draw TCP Reach View.

For details, refer to Section 7.6.2 "Reach View".
External Device
Creates a new external device.

For details, refer to Section 7.7 "Peripheral Equipment".
Set the soft limit.

For details, refer to Section 7.7.4 "Modifying the Soft Limit of
a Device".
Displays the Job Panel.

For details, refer to Section 7.7.6 "Programming a Device".
Edit conveyor specification.

For details, refer to "Conveyor Setting".
Set the conveyor condition file.

For details, refer to Section 7.7.9 "Conveyor
Synchronization".
Display conveyor operation panel.

For details, refer to Section 7.7.8 "Conveyor Operation
Panel".
5-10
156225-1CD 81/532
 Simulation
Playback
Moves the cursor in the job to the first step on the virtual pendant, and
sets the robot position to the position of starting the job.
This function can not use depending on the system

NOTE version of controller. Please refer to Section A.6 "List of
Function depending on the system version of controller".
Executes the job currently selected of all the controllers in the cell.
Use the virtual pendant to change the selected job.
During the execution of job, please do not sleep or

NOTE hibernate the PC.
The display of cell window may not recover..
Interrupts the job under execution.
Enables a job to skip backward step by step.
Enables a job to skip forward step by step.
Display the Stage master.

For details, refer to Section 8.7 "Stage Master".
To playback without considering the lag of servo.
Display the Cycle time.

For details, refer to Section 7.8 "Cycle Time".
Monitor
Display the Variable Monitor.

For details, refer to Section 8.5 "Variable Monitor".
5-11
156225-1CD 82/532
Displays a window which enables monitoring of the [Virtual I/O] signals.

The I/O signals are link to the job I/O instructions execution.
For details, refer to Section 8.2 "I/O Monitor".
Display the Speed Graph.

For details, refer to Section 8.13 "Speed Graph Function".
Display the Pulse Record.

For details, refer to Section 8.8 "Pulse Recorder".
Display the Lap Time Panel.

For details, refer to Section 8.6 "Lap Time Panel".
Display the Trace Manager.

For details, refer to Section 7.9 "Trace".
Collision
Display the Collision Detection.

For details, refer to Section 8.10 "Collision Detection".
I/O Settings
Display the I/O Events.

For details, refer to Section 8.3 "I/O Events".
Display the I/O commection.

For details, refer to Section 8.4 "I/O connection".
Model Simulation
Display the Model Script Editor.

For details, refer to Section 9.12 "Model Script".
5-12
156225-1CD 83/532
Settings
Display the Sensing Option Setting.

For details, refer to Section 8.11 "Sensing Option Setting".
Display the Paint Panel.

For details, refer to Section 8.12 "Spray Model for Paint".
 Option Function
Estimate
Displays the Motor Load Estimate.

For details, refer to Section 12.1 "Motor Load Estimate".
Displays the Life Estimate.

For details, refer to Section 12.2 "Life Estimate".
5-13
156225-1CD 84/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
5.2 Virtual Pendant
When a Virtual Robot Controller (VRC) is registered in a cell, the associated Virtual Pendant is
displayed. The Virtual Pendant can be use to operate the VRC controller is the same manner
as with the programming pendant of each controller. The Virtual Pendant is composed of two
separed windows: the pendant screen and the prendant keypad. The display of the pendant
keypad can be toggled from the pendant screen by pressing the [/] key or by clicking on the
icon.
• For operation on the Virtual Pendant, please refer to each controller “Operator Manual”.
• When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously, the keys are shown with a “+” sign
between them, such as [SHIFT]+[COORD]. Press and hold the first key and then press
NOTE the 2nd key.
• Multiple axis keys cannot be used simultaneously.
• When resizing the pendant screen, if necessary, the display font size can be adjusted by
selecting {DISPLAY SETUP} - {CHANGE FONT} from the Virtual Pendant main menu.
5.2.1 DX200 Virtual Pendant
Pendant
Screen
Pendant
Keypad
5-14
156225-1CD 85/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
 Virtual Pendant Button
Keyboard
Button Description
Equivalent
Selects TEACH Mode

Home The axis operation and edition from the programming
pendant are enabled.
Selects PLAY Mode

Teach
The playback of taught job is enabled.
Starts the manipulator motion in

playback operation.
The lamp on this button is lit during the playback
Delete operation.
The lamp turns OFF when the playback operation is
stopped by alarm occurrence, HOLD signal, or mode
change.
Holds the manipulator motion.

When lamp is turned OFF, the manipulator stays
End stopped until a START command is input.
The start and axis operations are disabled while the
lamp is lit.
Turns ON the servo power.

Press this button to enable the servo power to be
Page Up turned ON.
The SERVO ON lamp is lit while the servo power is
ON.
Turns OFF the servo power.

When the servo power is turned OFF, the SERVO ON
LED on the programing pendant will extinguish.
An emergency stop message is displayed on the
screen.
Activates the job synchronization mode.

When the SYNC button is blue, the robot position is
instantly change to match the selected step of the
displayed job.
Open the Storage Card folder

When this button is clicked, the storage card folder of
this controller is opened.
Displays the Virtual Pendant keypad

/ When the button is down, the Virtual Pendant keypad
is displayed.
5-15
156225-1CD 86/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
NOTE When resizing the pendant screen to a smaller size, the displayed text maybe shorten to
fit in the smaller size buttons.
 Virtual Pendant Keypad
Keyboard
Keypad key Description
Equivalent
Works as described below.

[SELECT] • Selects menu items in the main menu area and the pull-down
Space menu area.
SELECT
• Makes the selected item ready to be set in the general-purpose
display area.
• Displays multiple messages in the message area.
Moves the Cursor in the direction of the arrow.
• The size of the Cursor and the range/place where the Cursor
can move will vary depending on the window.
• If the UP Cursor button is pressed when the Cursor is on the
first line, the Cursor will move to the last line of the job. Con-
versely, if the Cursor is on the last line of the job and the DOWN
Cursor Cursor button is pressed, the Cursor will jump to the first line of
↑
←→ the job.
↓
SHIFT key SHIFT + UP 
Scrolls the screen upward.
SHIFT key SHIFT + DOWN 
Scrolls the screen downward.
SHIFT key SHIFT + RIGHT 
Scrolls the screen to the right.
SHIFT key SHIFT + LEFT 
Scrolls the screen to the left.
Displays the main menu.

If this button is pressed while the main menu is displayed, the main menu
[MAIN MENU] disappears.
MAIN F1 MAIN
MENU MAIN MENU key MENU + UP 
Increases the brightness of the screen.
MAIN
MAIN MENU key MENU + DOWN 
Decreases the brightness of the screen.
[SIMPLE MENU] Displays the simple menu.

If this button is pressed while the simple menu is displayed, the simple
ENTRY
F2 menu disappears.
SIMPLE
MENU
5-16
156225-1CD 87/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Enables the servo power supply to be turned ON.

Press this button to enable the servo power supply to be turned ON if the
servo power supply is shut OFF by the emergency stop or overrun
[SERVO ON signal.
READY] When this button is pressed:
Page • In the play mode, the servo power supply is turned ON if the
SERVO Down
ON safeguarding is securely closed.
READY
• In the teach mode, the SERVO ON lamp flashes and the servo
power supply is turned ON when the Enable switch is ON.
• The SERVO ON lamp is lit while the servo power is ON.
Displays the menu to assist the operation for the currently
displayed window.
INTER
Pressing this button with SHIFT key SHIFT or INTERLOCK key LOCK
displays the help guidance for the operation.
[ASSIST]
• SHIFT key SHIFT
+ ASSIST key ASSIST
!? 
ASSIST F3
!? The function list of key combinations with SHIFT key SHIFT
appears.

INTER
ASSIST
• INTERLOCK key LOCK
+ ASSIST key !?
INTER
The function list of key combinations with INTERLOCK key LOCK
appears.
Cancels the current status.
• Deletes the sub menu in the main menu area and the pull-down
[CANCEL] menu area.
Esc • Cancels the input data or the input status in the general-purpose
CANCEL
display area.
• Cancels the multiple views in the message area.
• Cancels the occurred error.
Works for the multi mode.
[MULTI] If this button is pressed when the multi mode is ON, the active window
switches.
MULTI
LAYOUT F5 MULTI
SHIFT key SHIFT + MULTI Key LAYOUT 

Switches between the multi-window display and the single-window
display when the multi mode is ON.
5-17
156225-1CD 88/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Select the operation coordinate system when the manipulator is

operated manually.
• Five coordinate systems (joint, cartesian, cylindrical, tool and
user) can be used. Each time this key is pressed, the coordi-
[COORD] nate system is switched in the following order: "JOINT""WLD/
TOOL SEL CYL""TOOL""USER"
COORD K
• The selected coordinate system is displayed on the status dis-
play area.
TOOL SEL
SHIFT key SHIFT + COORD Key COORD

The coordinate number can be changed when the "TOOL" or "USER"
coordinate system is selected.
Displays the content related to the current line.
• To display the content of a CALL job or condition file, move the
Cursor to the next line and press DIRECT OPEN key DIRECT
OPEN . The
[DIRECT OPEN]
file will be displayed for the selected line. Display content will
DIRECT
L vary depending on the type of instruction used in the job.
OPEN
Example:
For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will be displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file will be displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition will be displayed.
• The lamp on this button is lit while the direct open is ON. Press
this button while the lamp is lit to return to the previous window.
[PAGE] Displays the next page.

The page can be switched only when the lamp on this button is lit.
GO BACK
PAGE
F4 GO BACK
SHIFT key SHIFT + PAGE key PAGE 

Switches to the previous page.
Moves the Cursor in the following order : “Menu Area”“General-

Purpose Display Area”“Message Area”“Main Menu Area”. If no
item is displayed, the Cursor does not move.
[AREA] SHIFT key SHIFT + AREA key AREA 

The language can be switched when the bilingual function is valid.
TAB (Bilingual function is optional.)
AREA
AREA key AREA + DOWN 
Moves the Cursor from the general-purpose display area to the
operation button when the operation button is displayed.
AREA key AREA + UP 
Moves the Cursor to the general-purpose display area when the Cursor
is on the operation button.
[SHIFT] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing this key together.
TOOL SEL
Can be used with ASSIST key ASSIST

!? , COORD key COORD , AREA key AREA ,
SHIFT
Shift [MOTION TYPE], [ROBOT], [EX. AXIS], Cursor key or Numeric key to
access alternate functions.
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate SHIFt functions.
5-18
156225-1CD 89/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
[INTERLOCK] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing together.

MULTI

!? , MULTI key LAYOUT , [TEST START],
INTER Ctrl
LOCK [FWD], or Numeric key (Numeric key customize function), [ROBOT].
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate NTERLOCK
functions.
[INFORM LIST] Displays instruction lists of commands available for job editing.
INFORM O
LIST
Enables the robot axis operation.
[ROBOT] is active for the system where multiple manipulators are

[ROBOT] controlled by one DX200 or the system with external axes.
I
ROBOT SHIFT key SHIFT + [ROBOT]
The robot under axis operation can be switched to a robot axis which is
not registered to the currently selected job.
INTER
INTERLOCK key LOCK + [ROBOT]
Switchs the application when several applications are set to a robot.
Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis) operation.

[EX.AXIS]
[EX.AXIS] is active for the system with external axes.
F11
EX.AXIS
SHIFTkey SHIFT
+ [EX. AXIS]
The external axis under axis operation can be switched to an external
axis which is not registered to the currently selected job.
Selects the interpolation type for playback operation.

The selected interpolation type is shown in the status display area on the
screen.
• Each time this key is pressed, the interpolation type changes in

the following order: 
[MOTION TYPE]
"MOVJ"" MOVL""MOVC"
MOTION F7
TYPE
SHIFT key + [MOTION TYPE]
SHIFT
The interpolation mode changes in the following order:

"STANDARD"" EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT"*" CONVEYOR"*
Interpolation type can be changed in any mode.
*: These modes are purchased options.
5-19
156225-1CD 90/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a continuous

INTER
motion when [TEST START] and INTERLOCK key LOCK are
simultaneously pressed.
[TEST START] The manipulator can be moved to check the path of taught steps.
Operation stops immediately when this key is released.
TEST N • The manipulator operates according to the currently selected
START
operation cycle: "AUTO", "1CYCLE" or "STEP".
• The manipulator operates at the taught speed. However, if the
taught speed exceeds the maximum teaching speed, the opera-
tion proceeds at the maximum teaching speed.
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps while this key is
pressed.
• Only move instructions are executed (one instruction at a time,
[FWD] no welding instructions).
FWD F12 INTER

INTERLOCK key LOCK + [FWD]
All instructions are executed.
[0] + [FWD]
Moves to the reference point of the cursor line.
The manipulator operates at the selected manual speed. Make sure that
the selected manual speed is the desired one before starting operation.
[BWD] Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in the reverse
direction while this key is pressed.
BWD M • Only move instructions are executed (no weld commands).
[DELETE] Deletes the registered instruction.

• Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
DELETE F9 lamp is lit.
[INSERT] Inserts a new instruction.

• Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
INSERT F8 lamp is lit.
[MODIFY] Modifies the taught position data or instruction.

• Modification completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
MODIFY F6 lamp is lit.
Registers instructions, data, current position of the manipulator,

[ENTER]
etc.
ENTER Enter • When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or data displayed in
the input buffer line moves to the Cursor position to complete a
registration, insertion, or modification.
5-20
156225-1CD 91/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Sets the speed for manual operation. This speed is also valid for
MANUAL SPEED operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
keys • There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast, and inching).
The speed changes as described below. The selected speed is
D displayed on the status area.
FAST
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
MANUAL SPEED C order: 
SLOW "INCH"" SLOW""MED""FST".
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
order: 
"FST""MED""SLOW""INCH"
[HIGH SPEED] Makes the manipulator move at high speed while this button and
one of the axis keys are pressed simultaneously during manual
operation. No need to change the setting of speed.
FAST E • The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in advance.
MANUAL SPEED
Moves specified axes on manipulator.

• The manipulator axes only move while the key is pressed.
• Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by pressing two
Axis Key
or more keys at the same time.
X- X+ X- X+
QW RT
S- S+ R- R+
AS FG
Y- Y+ Y- Y+ The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate system at the
L- L+ B- B+ ZX VB
selected manual speed. Make sure that the selected coordinate system
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+ and the manual speed are the desired ones before starting the axis
E- E+ 8- 8+
YU HJ operation.
It is possible to allocate any external axes to [E-] + [E+], [8-] + [8+] keys
to operate them.
Numeric Key Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt appears on the
input line.
7SYNCRO 8 9 • “.” is the decimal point. “-” is a minus sign or hyphen.
SINGLE
4SMOV 5 6
0-9 The Numeric keys are also used as function keys. Refer to the
- explanation of each function for details.
1 2 3
TOOL ON TOOL ON
.
JOB
0 TOOL OF TOOL OF
JOB
5-21
156225-1CD 92/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
 Keyboard Layout
The Virtual Pendant keypad key all have a corresponding key on the computer keyboard.
When the Virtual Pendant Screen has the input focus, the those keyboard key can be pressed
instead of clicking the keys on the pendant keypad.
ESC F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12
MAIN SIMPLE MOTION ＡＰＰＬＩＣ
CANCEL ASSIST PAGE MULTI MODIFY INSERT DELETE EX.AXIS FWD
MENU MENU TYPE ＡＴＩＯＮ
Page
` 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Backspace Insert Home
Up
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - Backspace Teach Play
TAB Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ] ¥ Delete End Page

Down
X- X+ HIGH X- X+ INFORM Servo On
AREA E- E+ ROBOT AUX Start Hold
S- S+ SPEED R- R+ LIST Ready
CapsLock A S D F G H J K L ; ‘ Enter
Y- Y+ Y- Y+ DIRECT
FAST 8- 8+ COORD ENTER
L- L+ B- B+ OPEN
Shift Z X C V B N M , . / Shift ↑
Z- Z+ Z- Z+ TEST Keypad
SHIFT SLOW BWD . SHIFT ↑
U- U+ T- T+ START Display
Ctrl Win Alt Space Alt Ctrl ← ↓ →
INTERLOCK SELECT INTERLOCK ← ↓ →
5-22
156225-1CD 93/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
5.2.2 DX100 Virtual Pendant
Pendant
Screen
Pendant
Keypad

The pendant buttons are the same as those for DX100 virtual pendant.
For details, please refer to the "Virtual Pendant Button" of the Section 5.2.1 "DX200 Virtual
Pendant" .
5-23
156225-1CD 94/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent

Space menu area.
display area.
Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.

• The size of the cursor and the range/place where the cursor can
move will vary depending on the window.
• If the UP cursor button is pressed when the cursor is on the first
line, the cursor will move to the last line of the job. Conversely,
Cursor ↑ if the cursor is on the last line of the job and the DOWN cursor
←→ button is pressed, the cursor will jump to the first line of the job.
↓ [SHIFT] + UP
[SHIFT] + DOWN
[SHIFT] + RIGHT
[SHIFT] + LEFT

If this button is pressed while the main menu is displayed, the
[MAIN MENU] main menu disappears.
F1
[MAIN MENU] + UP
[MAIN MENU] + DOWN

F2 If this button is pressed while the simple menu is displayed, the
simple menu disappears.
Enables the servo power supply to be turned

ON.
[SERVO ON Press this button to enable the servo power supply to be turned
READY] ON if the servo power supply is shut OFF by the emergency stop
Page or overrun signal. When this button is pressed:
Down • In the play mode, the servo power supply is turned ON if the
safeguarding is securely closed.
5-24
156225-1CD 95/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Displays the menu to assist the operation for

the currently displayed window.
[ASSIST] Pressing this button with [SHIFT] or [INTERLOCK] displays the
help guidance for the operation.
F3 • [SHIFT] + [ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with [SHIFT] appears.
• [INTERLOCK] + [ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with [INTERLOCK]
appears.

[CANCEL]
menu area.
display area.

[MULTI] If this button is pressed when the multi mode is ON, the active
window switches.
F5
[SHIFT] + [MULTI]
Switches between the multi-window display and the single-
window display when the multi mode is ON.
Select the operation coordinate system when the

manipulator is operated manually.
user) can be used. Each time this key is pressed, the
[COORD] coordinate system is switched in the following order:
"JOINT""WLD/CYL""TOOL""USER"
K
• The selected coordinate system is displayed on the status
display area.
[SHIFT] + [COORD]
The coordinate number can be changed when the "TOOL" or
"USER" coordinate system is selected.
5-25
156225-1CD 96/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent

cursor to the next line and press [DIRECT OPEN]. The file will
be displayed for the selected line. Display content will vary
depending on the type of instruction used in the job.
[DIRECT OPEN]
Example:
L For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will be
displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file will be
displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition will be
displayed.

F4
[SHIFT] + [PAGE]
Moves the cursor in the following order : "Menu

Area""General-Purpose Display Area""Message
Area""Main Menu Area". If no item is displayed,
the cursor does not move.
[AREA] [SHIFT] + [AREA]

The language can be switched when the bilingual function is
TAB
valid. (Bilingual function is optional.)
[AREA] + DOWN
Moves the cursor from the general-purpose display area to the
[AREA] + UP
Moves the cursor to the general-purpose display area when the
cursor is on the operation button.
Changes the functions of other keys by pressing
[SHIFT] together.
Can be used with [MAIN MENU], [ASSIST], [COORD], [AREA],
Shift
[MOTION TYPE], cursor key or Numeric key to access alternate
functions. Refer to the description of each key for the alternate
[SHIFT] functions.

[INTERLOCK]
together.
Can be used with [ASSIST], [MULTI], [TEST START], [FWD], or
Ctrl
Numeric key (Numeric key customize function).
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate
[INTERLOCK] functions.
[INFORM LIST]
Displays instruction lists of commands available for
O
job editing.
5-26
156225-1CD 97/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
[ROBOT] Enables the robot axis operation.

I
controlled by one DX100 or the system with external axes.
[EX.AXIS] Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis)

operation.
F11
Selects the interpolation type for playback

operation.
The selected interpolation type is shown in the status display area
on the screen.

[MOTION TYPE] the following order:
"MOVJ"" MOVL""MOVC""MOVS"
F7
[SHIFT] + [MOTION TYPE]
"STANDARD"" EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT"*"
CONVEYOR"*
Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a

continuous motion when [TEST START] and
[INTERLOCK] are simultaneously pressed.
N • The manipulator operates according to the currently selected
operation cycle: "AUTO," "1CYCLE," or "STEP."
taught speed exceeds the maximum teaching speed, the
operation proceeds at the maximum teaching speed.
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps

while this key is pressed.
no welding instructions).
[FWD]
F12 [INTERLOCK] + [FWD]

[REFP] + [FWD]
The manipulator operates at the selected manual speed. Make
sure that the selected manual speed is the desired one before
starting operation.
5-27
156225-1CD 98/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in

[BWD] the reverse direction while this key is pressed.
• Only move instructions are executed (no weld commands).
M
starting operation.
[DELETE]
Deletes the registered instruction.
F9 • Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
lamp is lit.
[INSERT]
Inserts a new instruction.
F8 • Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
lamp is lit.
[MODIFY]
Modifies the taught position data or instruction.
F6 • Modification completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
lamp is lit.
Registers instructions, data, current position of the

[ENTER]
manipulator, etc.
Enter • When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or data displayed in
the input buffer line moves to the cursor position to complete a
Sets the speed for manual operation. This speed is

also valid for operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
MANUAL SPEED • There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast, and inching).
keys The speed changes as described below. The selected speed is
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in the
C following order:
"INCH"" SLOW""MED""FST"
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes in the
following order:
"FST"" MED""SLOW""INCH"
Makes the manipulator move at high speed while
[HIGH SPEED] this button and one of the axis keys are pressed
E simultaneously during manual operation. No need to
change the setting of speed.
• The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in advance.
5-28
156225-1CD 99/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent

Axis Key • Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by pressing two
QW RT
AS FG or more keys at the same time.
ZX VB
The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate system at
YU HJ the selected manual speed. Make sure that the selected
coordinate system and the manual speed are the desired ones
before starting the axis operation.
Numeric Key Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt
0-9 appears on the input line.
- • "." is the decimal point. "-" is a minus sign or hyphen. The
. Numeric keys are also used as function keys. Refer to the
explanation of each function for details.
 Keyboard Layout
Page
Up

Down
Y- Y+ Y- Y+ DIRECT
L- L+ B- B+ OPEN
5-29
156225-1CD 100/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
5.2.3 FS100 Virtual Pendant
Pendant
Screen
Pendant
Keypad

Pendant" .
5-30
156225-1CD 101/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent

Space menu area.
SELECT
display area.
Moves the Cursor in the direction of the arrow.
• The size of the Cursor and the range/place where the Cursor
can move will vary depending on the window.
• If the UP Cursor button is pressed when the Cursor is on the
first line, the Cursor will move to the last line of the job. Con-
versely, if the Cursor is on the last line of the job and the DOWN
Cursor Cursor button is pressed, the Cursor will jump to the first line of
↑
←→ the job.
↓
SHIFT key SHIFT + UP 
SHIFT key SHIFT + DOWN 
SHIFT key SHIFT + RIGHT 
SHIFT key SHIFT + LEFT 

If this button is pressed while the main menu is displayed, the main menu
[MAIN MENU] disappears.
MAIN F1 MAIN
MENU MAIN MENU key MENU + UP 
MAIN
MAIN MENU key MENU + DOWN 

If this button is pressed while the simple menu is displayed, the simple
ENTRY
F2 menu disappears.
SIMPLE
MENU
Enables the servo power supply to be turned ON.

Press this button to enable the servo power supply to be turned ON if the
servo power supply is shut OFF by the emergency stop or overrun
[SERVO ON signal.
READY] When this button is pressed:
Page • In the play mode, the servo power supply is turned ON if the
SERVO Down
ON safeguarding is securely closed.
READY
5-31
156225-1CD 102/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Displays the menu to assist the operation for the currently

displayed window.
INTER
Pressing this button with SHIFT key SHIFT or INTERLOCK key LOCK
displays the help guidance for the operation.
[ASSIST]
• SHIFT key SHIFT
+ ASSIST key ASSIST
!? 
ASSIST F3
!? The function list of key combinations with SHIFT key SHIFT
appears.

INTER
ASSIST
• INTERLOCK key LOCK
+ ASSIST key !?
INTER
The function list of key combinations with INTERLOCK key LOCK
appears.
[CANCEL] menu area.
CANCEL
display area.
[MULTI] If this button is pressed when the multi mode is ON, the active window
switches.
MULTI
LAYOUT F5 MULTI
SHIFT key SHIFT + MULTI Key LAYOUT 

Switches between the multi-window display and the single-window
display when the multi mode is ON.
Select the operation coordinate system when the manipulator is

operated manually.
user) can be used. Each time this key is pressed, the coordi-
[COORD] nate system is switched in the following order: "JOINT""WLD/
TOOL SEL CYL""TOOL""USER"
COORD K
• The selected coordinate system is displayed on the status dis-
play area.
TOOL SEL
SHIFT key SHIFT + COORD Key COORD

The coordinate number can be changed when the "TOOL" or "USER"
coordinate system is selected.
5-32
156225-1CD 103/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Cursor to the next line and press DIRECT OPEN key DIRECT
OPEN . The
[DIRECT OPEN]
file will be displayed for the selected line. Display content will
DIRECT
L vary depending on the type of instruction used in the job.
OPEN
Example:
For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will be displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file will be displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition will be displayed.

GO BACK
PAGE
F4 GO BACK
SHIFT key SHIFT + PAGE key PAGE 

Moves the Cursor in the following order : “Menu Area”“General-

Purpose Display Area”“Message Area”“Main Menu Area”. If no
item is displayed, the Cursor does not move.
[AREA] SHIFT key SHIFT + AREA key AREA 

The language can be switched when the bilingual function is valid.
TAB (Bilingual function is optional.)
AREA
AREA key AREA + DOWN 
Moves the Cursor from the general-purpose display area to the
AREA key AREA + UP 
Moves the Cursor to the general-purpose display area when the Cursor
is on the operation button.
[SHIFT] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing this key together.
TOOL SEL

!? , COORD key COORD , AREA key AREA ,
SHIFT
Shift [MOTION TYPE], [ROBOT], [EX. AXIS], Cursor key or Numeric key to
access alternate functions.
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate SHIFt functions.
[INTERLOCK] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing together.

MULTI

!? , MULTI key LAYOUT , [TEST START],
INTER Ctrl
LOCK [FWD], or Numeric key (Numeric key customize function), [ROBOT].
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate NTERLOCK
functions.
[INFORM LIST] Displays instruction lists of commands available for job editing.
INFORM O
LIST
5-33
156225-1CD 104/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Enables the robot axis operation.

[ROBOT] controlled by one FS100 or the system with external axes.
I
ROBOT SHIFT key SHIFT + [ROBOT]
The robot under axis operation can be switched to a robot axis which is
not registered to the currently selected job.
INTER
INTERLOCK key LOCK + [ROBOT]
Switchs the application when several applications are set to a robot.
Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis) operation.

[EX.AXIS]
F11
EX.AXIS
SHIFTkey SHIFT
+ [EX. AXIS]
The external axis under axis operation can be switched to an external
axis which is not registered to the currently selected job.
Selects the interpolation type for playback operation.

The selected interpolation type is shown in the status display area on the
screen.

the following order: 
[MOTION TYPE]
"MOVJ"" MOVL""MOVC"
MOTION F7
TYPE
SHIFT key SHIFT + [MOTION TYPE]
"STANDARD"" EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT"*" CONVEYOR"*
Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a continuous

INTER
motion when [TEST START] and INTERLOCK key LOCK are
simultaneously pressed.
TEST N • The manipulator operates according to the currently selected
START
operation cycle: "AUTO", "1CYCLE" or "STEP".
taught speed exceeds the maximum teaching speed, the opera-
tion proceeds at the maximum teaching speed.
5-34
156225-1CD 105/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps while this key is
pressed.
[FWD] no welding instructions).
FWD F12 INTER

INTERLOCK key LOCK + [FWD]
[0] + [FWD]
[BWD] Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in the reverse
direction while this key is pressed.
BWD M • Only move instructions are executed (no weld commands).
[DELETE] Deletes the registered instruction.

• Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
DELETE F9 lamp is lit.
[INSERT] Inserts a new instruction.

• Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
INSERT F8 lamp is lit.
[MODIFY] Modifies the taught position data or instruction.

• Modification completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
MODIFY F6 lamp is lit.
Registers instructions, data, current position of the manipulator,

[ENTER]
etc.
ENTER Enter • When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or data displayed in
the input buffer line moves to the Cursor position to complete a
Sets the speed for manual operation. This speed is also valid for
MANUAL SPEED operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
keys • There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast, and inching).
The speed changes as described below. The selected speed is
FAST
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
MANUAL SPEED C order: 
SLOW "INCH"" SLOW""MED""FST".
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
order: 
"FST""MED""SLOW""INCH"
5-35
156225-1CD 106/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
[HIGH SPEED] Makes the manipulator move at high speed while this button and
one of the axis keys are pressed simultaneously during manual
operation. No need to change the setting of speed.
FAST E • The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in advance.
MANUAL SPEED

• Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by pressing two
Axis Key
or more keys at the same time.
X- X+ X- X+
QW RT
S- S+ R- R+
AS FG
Y- Y+ Y- Y+ The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate system at the
L- L+ B- B+ ZX VB
selected manual speed. Make sure that the selected coordinate system
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+ and the manual speed are the desired ones before starting the axis
E- E+ 8- 8+
YU HJ operation.
It is possible to allocate any external axes to [E-] + [E+], [8-] + [8+] keys
to operate them.
Numeric Key Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt appears on the
input line.
7SYNCRO 8 9 • “.” is the decimal point. “-” is a minus sign or hyphen.
SINGLE
4SMOV 5 6
0-9 The Numeric keys are also used as function keys. Refer to the
- explanation of each function for details.
1 2 3
TOOL ON TOOL ON
.
JOB
0 TOOL OF TOOL OF
JOB
5-36
156225-1CD 107/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
 Keyboard Layout
Page
Up

Down
Y- Y+ Y- Y+ DIRECT
L- L+ B- B+ OPEN
5-37
156225-1CD 108/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
5.2.4 NX100 Virtual Pendant
Pendant
Screen
Pendant
Keypad

Pendant" .
5-38
156225-1CD 109/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.

The size of the cursor and the range/place where the cursor can
move will vary depending on the window.
If the UP cursor button is pressed when the cursor is on the first
line, the cursor will move to the last line of the job. Conversely, if
the cursor is on the last line of the job and the DOWN cursor
button is pressed, the cursor will jump to the first line of the job.
Cursor ↑ • [SHIFT] + UP

← Goes back to the previous page.
↓ • [SHIFT] + DOWN

Goes to the next page.
• [SHIFT] + RIGHT
Scrolls the instruction area of the job content or play back
display to the right.
• [SHIFT] + LEFT
Scrolls the instruction area of the job content or playback
display to the left.
[SELECT]
Selects menu items such as main menu, pull-down
Space
menu, etc.

If this button is pressed while the main menu is displayed, the
[MAIN MENU] main menu disappears.
F1
[SHIFT] + [MAIN MENU]
While a window opens, the window is switched in the following
order:
Window  Sub-menu  Main menu
Enables the servo power supply to be turned

ON.
Press this button to enable the servo power supply to be turned
[SERVO ON ON if the servo power supply is shut OFF by the emergency stop
READY] or overrun signal.
Page When this button is pressed:
Down • In the play mode, the servo power supply is turned ON if the
safeguarding is securely closed.
5-39
156225-1CD 110/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Moves the cursor between “Menu Area” and

"General Purpose Display Area."
When [SHIFT] is pressed simultaneously:
• [SHIFT] + [AREA]
[AREA] The language can be switched when the bilingual function is
valid. (Bilingual function is optional.)
Ctrl
• DOWN cursor button + [AREA]
Moves the cursor to the operation button on the screen if
displayed.
• UP cursor button + [AREA]
Moves the cursor to the general-purpose display area when the
cursor is on the operation button.
Displays the next page.

[PAGE]
[SHIFT] + [PAGE]
F4 The previous page is displayed.
The page can be changed when appears in the status area
on the screen.
To display the content of a CALL job or condition file, move the

cursor to the next line and press [DIRECT OPEN]. The file will be
displayed for the selected line. Display content will vary
[DIRECT OPEN] depending on the type of instruction used in the job.
F7
Example:
For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will be
displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file will be
displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition will be
displayed.
Select the operation coordinate system when the

manipulator is operated manually.
Five coordinate systems (joint, cartesian, cylindrical, tool and
user) can be used. Each time this key is pressed, the coordinate
[COORD] system is switched in the following order: "JOINT""WLD/
CYL""TOOL""USER"
F6
The selected coordinate system is displayed on the status display
area.
[SHIFT] + [COORD]
The coordinate number can be changed when the "TOOL" or
"USER" coordinate system is selected.
5-40
156225-1CD 111/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Sets the speed for manual operation.

MANUAL SPEED This speed is also valid for operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
keys There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast, and inching).
D
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in the
following order: "INCH"" SLOW""MED""FST"
C
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes in the
following order: "FST"" MED""SLOW""INCH"
The selected speed is displayed on the status area.
Changes the speed of axis operation when the axis
[HIGH SPEED] button is pressed.
E The speed of the manipulator will change to high regardless of
the programmed speed while this key is pressed.
The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in advance.
Selects the interpolation type for playback

operation.
The selected interpolation type is shown in the status display area
on the screen.
Each time this key is pressed, the interpolation type changes in

[MOTION TYPE] the following order:
"MOVJ"" MOVL""MOVC""MOVS"
P
[SHIFT] + [MOTION TYPE]
"STANDARD"" EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT"*"
CONVEYOR"*
[ROBOT] Enables the robot axis operation.

I
controlled by one NX100 or the system with external axes.
[EX.AXIS] Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis)

operation.
K

The manipulator axes only move while the key is held down.
Axis Key Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by pressing two or
QW RT more keys at the same time.
AS FG
ZX VB The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate system at
the selected manual speed. Make sure that the selected
coordinate system and the manual speed are the desired ones
before starting the axis operation.
5-41
156225-1CD 112/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a

continuous motion when [TEST START] and
[INTERLOCK] are simultaneously pressed.
The manipulator operates according to the currently selected
M
operation cycle: "AUTO," "1CYCLE," or "STEP."
The manipulator operates at the taught speed. However, if the
taught speed exceeds the maximum teaching speed, the
operation proceeds at the maximum teaching speed.
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps
while this key is pressed.
Only move instructions are executed (one instruction at a time, no
welding instructions).
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD]
[FWD] All instructions except move instructions are executed.
U
[SHIFT] + [FWD]
Move instructions are executed in succession.
As for the operation of pressing [REFP] simultaneously, refer to

the “NX100 Operator Manual”.
starting operation.
[BWD]
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in
Y the reverse direction while this key is pressed.
Only move instructions are executed (no weld commands).
[INFORM LIST]
Displays instruction lists of commands available for
O
job editing.
[CANCEL]
Esc Cancels data input and resets errors.
[DELETE]
Deletes registered instructions and data.
H Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp
is lit.
5-42
156225-1CD 113/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
[INSERT]
Inserts new instructions or data.
J Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp
is lit.
[MODIFY]
Modifies taught position data, instructions, and data.
N Modification completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key
lamp is lit.
[ENTER] Registers instructions, data, current position of the

manipulator, etc.
Enter When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or data displayed in
the input buffer line moves to the cursor position to complete a

together.
[SHIFT]
Can be used with [MAIN MENU], [COORD], [MOTION TYPE],
Shift cursor key, Numeric key, page key to access alternate
functions.
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate [SHIFT]
functions.

[INTERLOCK]
together.
Can be used with [TEST START], [FWD], Numeric key (Numeric
F11
key customize function).
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate
[INTERLOCK] functions.
Numeric Key Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt
0-9 appears on the input line.
- “.” is the decimal point. “-” is a minus sign or hyphen.
. The Numeric keys are also used as function keys. Refer to the
explanation of each function for details.
[BACK SPACE] Deletes the last character while typing

Back characters.
space
[Multi] Displays multiple windows.

This function is for future use. (Cannot be used with the
F5 NX100 of the current version.)
[SHORTCUT] Displays the shortcut selection dialog box.

This function is for future use. (Cannot be used with the
F2 NX100 of the current version.)
5-43
156225-1CD 114/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
Keyboard
Equivalent
[ASSIST] Displays the menu to assist the operation for

the currently displayed window.
F3 This function is for future use. (Cannot be used with the
NX100 of the current version.)
 Keyboard Layout

M ain S hort D irect Inter
Cancel M enu C ut
Assist Page Multi Coord O pen lock
P age
` 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Backspace Insert Home Up

P age
TAB Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ] \ Delete End D ow n
X- X+ H igh X- X+ Inform M otion S ervo O n
S- S+ S peed R- R+ Bwd Fwd Robot List Type
Start Hold R eady
CapsLock A S D F G H J K L ; ' Enter
Insert Ex.Axis O NW /O
eld
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ FAST B- B+ Delete FF
Enter
Z- Z+ Z- Z+ T est K eypad
Shift U- U+ SLOW T- T+ Modify S tart
. D isplay
Shift ↑
Area Select ← ↓ →
5.2.5 Input with keyboard

In MotoSim EG-VRC, To enter the string, the keyboard is also available.
Procedure
1. Click the [KB] button in the software keypad.
5-44
156225-1CD 115/532
5.2 Virtual Pendant
2. Enter the string, and click the [OK] button, the inputted string is fixed and the previous
screen appears. Press the [Cancel button, the inputted string is canceled and the
previous screen appears.
• The inputted string is not checked. Please make sure not to use the character which can
NOTE not be inputted by the software keyboard.
• The other operation can not used on the input mode. When use the other operation,
Press the [OK] button or the [Cancel] button to close the input window.
 Input the job name or folder name

If the gray-out characters as bellow are inputted, the characters are deleted from the inputted
string, when the inputted string is fixed (when the previous screen appears)
 Input the label name

If the gray-out characters as bellow are inputted, the characters are deleted from the inputted
string, when the inputted string is fixed (when the previous screen appears).
5-45
156225-1CD 116/532
6.1 Viewpoint Operation Tools
6 Display Operation
The display tool functions help to achieve better visualization enabling text input on the cell
window, sectional display of models, display mode change, etc.

MotoSim EG-VRC can control the display with the viewpoint operation tool as follows:
6.1.1 Viewpoint Operation with the Mouse

Each viewpoint operation mode is assigned to the button of the mouse.
Drag with the mouse to the up to down or side to side, a viewpoint will change by the
viewpoint operation mode currently assigned to the button.
The assignment of the viewpoint operation mode is as follows.
Viewpoint Operation Mode Mouse Operation Viewpoint Movement
Drag the mouse from side to side

Press-and-hold the scroll and up and down to synchronize
Parallel
wheel and drag the viewpoint with the mouse
motion.
For vertical rotation, drag the

Press-and-hold the scroll
mouse up and down; for horizontal
Rotate wheel and the right button,
rotation, drag the mouse from side
and drag
to side.
Zoom in and out the image by

dragging the mouse upward (to
Zoom Rotate the scroll wheel
zoom in) or downward (to zoom
out) over the screen.
Zoom in and out the image by

dragging the mouse upward (to
zoom in) or downward (to zoom
Press-and-hold the right
Zoom And Rotate out) over the screen; rotate the
button and drag
image centering on the Z-axis of
"world" coordinates by dragging
the mouse from side to side.
Click any desirable point so that

the image is displayed with the
Change the viewpoint Press the scroll wheel
clicked point located in the center
of the screen.
6-1
156225-1CD 117/532
 Right Mouse Button Operation

A pop-up menu for viewpoint operation appears by clicking the right mouse button on the cell
window.
6.1.2 Preset Viewpoint Operation

The camera viewpoint can also be changed to a preset viewpoint.
The most communly used viewpoint are available by clicking on the [Home] tab, in the [View]
group .
For detail on the preset viewpoint choices please refer to Section 5.1.1 "Ribbon".
Further preset viewpoint choices are available with the View Manager.
6-2
156225-1CD 118/532
 Viewpoint Operation with the View Manager

The View Manager panel allows to quickly change the view point of the scene by selecting
one of the standard views or user views.
The View Manager panel can be displayed by clicking the [Home] tab, in the [View] group, the
[View Manager] button.
Standard View
buttons
Enables/disables the
zoom to extents function
when a standard view
button is pressed
User Views
listbox
View Manager
Item Description
[Standard View] buttons Changes the viewpoint to display associated the standard view.
[Fit view to extends] button Displays all the models in the cell to fit in the view.
Double clicking one of the views will display the associated user
[User View] listbox defined view.Clicking the selected view name will enable the edition
mode to allow renaming the selected view.
Changes the viewpoint displayed on the screen to the user view

[Load] button
selected in the "User View" listbox.
Saves the current viewpoint displayed on the screen to the user view
[Save] button
selected in the "User View" listbox.
[Close] button Closes the View Manager panel.
6-3
156225-1CD 119/532
NOTE User views definitions are only saved to the file when the cell is saved.
 Using Shortcuts
Each view has an associated shortcut key that can be used to recall one of the defined views
when the input focus is on either the cell display or on the View Manager panel. Pressing one
of the numeric keys (1... 9, 0) will load the corresponding user view; the "0" key is used for the
10th user view. The first letter of the standard view name is used (.e.i. "T" for the Top view, "F"
for the Front view...), the letters are indicated on the buttons of the View Manager panel. The
keys "I", "O", "J" and "K" are used for the four isometric views.
 Smooth Transition
The viewpoint can be changed with or without smooth transition function by setting the display
as follows:
Smooth transition ON (smooth transition checked in the menu):

• The viewpoint changes as the image continuously moves.
• For the duration setting, click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the
[Options] menu.
Smooth transition OFF (smooth transition unchecked in the menu):

• The viewpoint changes instantaneously.
6-4
156225-1CD 120/532
6.2 Light Manager Operation
The Light Manager panel allows to add or remove lights and to modify the settings or each
light. In addition to the default light, up to 4 additional lights can be added.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Light Manager] button, the [Light Manager]
dialog appears.
Light intensity adjustment.
Pressing the [Shift] key

enables or disables the
Pick Light Position with
Mouse function.
Selects the light to be
modified.
Set the properties of the

selected light. Note that only
the color can be changed for
the “Default” light.
Light Manager
Adjusts the intensity of the lights.

Sliding the control toward the left will reduce the general lighting of the
scene.
Intensity
Sliding the control toward the right will increase it.
(The standard intensity is 100)
All the lights are affected by this control.
Selects a light for operations.

Light No. The properties of the currently selected light are displayed in the Light
Property .
6-5
156225-1CD 121/532
Light Manager
Adds a new light.

To complete the operation, click on the main view to position the light.
Add A light object will be displayed to indicate the location of the light. Up
to 4 lights can be added. For more details please refer to the "Adding
and Modifying Lights" and "Light Sources" .
Deletes the currently selected light.

Remove
Note that the "Default" light cannot be deleted.
When checked, clicking on the main view will move the position of the
light to the clicked position. (When unchecked, clicking the main view
Pick Light Position with doesn't change the light position and allows view point change
Mouse operation.)
Pressing the [Shift] key toggles the Pick Light Position with Mouse
check mark.
[On / Off]
[Off] : The selected light is turned off. But, the light is not erased, the
settings remains valid.
[On] : The selected light is turned on.
[Type]
Distant Light : Light rays are all parallel (coming from an infinite dis
tance)
Local Light : Omni directional rays coming from the light source
Light Property
point (light marker).
Spot Light : Cone shaped directional rays coming from the light
source point (light marker).
For more detail, please refer to the "Light Sources" .
[Color]
The color of the light is displayed in the rectangle.
[Change]
Displays the Color Dialog to change the color of the light.
Closes the Light Manager panel.The lights information will be save to

the cell file when the cell is saved.
OK The light markers in the main view will disappear when Light Manager
is closed. To display the light markers again, reopen the Light
Manager panel.
Cancels the light setting modifications and closes the Light Manager
Cancel panel.
The light markers in the main view will be deleted.
• To preserve the light settings for next time the cell is opened, the cell needs to be saved
NOTE after the light settings are changed.
• When exporting files (i.e. html format), changing the light settings don't affect the
resulting exported file.
6-6
156225-1CD 122/532
 Adding and Modifying Lights

Operation Procedure
1. Press the [Add] button. The properties of the newly added light will display in the Light
Property . (At this stage, the light source still isn't created.)
2. Click on the main view to position the light. The light will be created and a light marker will
be displayed to indicate the location of the light.
The light location and type can be confirmed by looking at the light marker in the main
view.
Light Marker
6-7
156225-1CD 123/532
The lighting of the cell will change to reflect the new light influence.
As long as the [Pick Light Position with Mouse] is checked, clicking on the main view will move the
light to the clicked position. Other items can be changed in the Light Property .
Note that a maximum of 4 lights can be added to the cell.
3. To modify existing light, first select the "Light No." and then change the settings in the
"Light Property".
4. Press [OK] or [Cancel] to close the Light Manager panel.

When the Light Manager is closed the light markers in the main view will disappear. To
display the light markers again, reopen the Light Manager panel.
NOTE To preserve the light settings for next time the cell is opened, the cell needs to be saved
after the light settings are changed.
 Deleting Lights
Select the light number. Press the [Remove] button to remove the light.
Note that the "Default" light cannot be deleted.
6-8
156225-1CD 124/532
 Light Sources
Default
Directional light constantly attached to the viewpoint. The initial light color is white.
Result after changing the

light color
The FLOOR model is not affected

by light change and will always
display the same way.
6-9
156225-1CD 125/532
The light reflection and intensity of the whole scene can be modified by adjusting the
"Intensity" value.
Intensity: 100 75 50
Distant Light
Light is emitted from a infinite distance so that all
the rays are parallel.Light type for general use.
The light direction is from the clicked position
toward the viewpoint center.
Distant Light Marker

(Located at the clicked position)
6-10
156225-1CD 126/532
Local Light
Light is emitted in all direction from the light position.
Useful for generating light from a given point.
Local Light Marker

Spot Light
Light is emitted in a specific direction forming a cone from the light position in
a cone shape. Useful to illuminate a specific face of a part.
The light direction is from the clicked position toward the viewpoint center.
For proper illumination of a model or a face, it may be necessary to relocate
the viewpoint center on the intended target before setting the light position.
Viewpoint center can be moved with click on the mouse wheel.
Spot Light Marker

6-11
156225-1CD 127/532
6.3 Displaying Shadows
6.3 Displaying Shadows
Shadows can be displayed for the models on the screen.

Since the shadows are not easily visible when the floor is displayed, use the shadow with the
opacity of floor image decreased (approx. to 0.5 or less), or hide the floor image.
For the detailed setting of shadow, refer to Section 10.1.4 "Shadow".
6-12
156225-1CD 128/532
6.4 Pick Settings
6.4 Pick Settings
The Pick settings influence the selection of objects when picking object in the cell view with
the mouse.
 Pick Mode Setting

The Pick Mode sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked area.
Procedure
On the [Home] tab, in the [Pick] group, click the [Pick Mode] button, and select one of the
following items.
• Free: Selects the point of the model corresponding to the clicked position.
• Vertex: Selects the model vertex nearest to the clicked position.
• Center: Selects the face or edge center nearest to the clicked position. Note that
in order to select the center of the cylindrical model, select the model using
[Vertex] instead of [Center].
• Edge Selects the edge point nearest to the clicked position.
NOTE That these settings are also linked to the same settings available in the OLP dialog.
 Pick Object Setting

Pick object set filters on the type of objects that can be selected by the mouse pick.
6-13
156225-1CD 129/532
6.4 Pick Settings
Procedure
On the [Home] tab, in the [Pick] group, click the [Selectable Object] button, and select one of
the following items.
• Models: Solid models.
• Frames: Model frame or AXIS6 models. (Note: The model frame needs to be visible
to be selected.)
• Lines & Lines such as LINE part, WORK line and wireframe model, and
lnters: intersection lines generated by the intersection of parts or models.
(Note the intersection lines are displayed during the pick operation when
the left mouse button is pressed down. In cells with many detailed models,
the intersection generation may slow down the pick function response. In
such case, you may uncheck this item to improve performance.)
• Points: Points such as TRACE points.
• Floor: FLOOR parts. (Note: FLOOR parts tend to interfere selection depending
on the viewpoint, therefore their selection is managed independently from
other models.)
NOTE That these settings are also linked to the same settings available in the OLP dialog.
6-14
156225-1CD 130/532
6.4 Pick Settings
 Pick method and screen display

When the mouse pointer is over the cell view, press down the left mouse button. The model
considered for selection will display in yellow with a red dot to indicate the specific point
location. The display will update to represent change of selection as the mouse pointer is
moved over different models. The actual selection is made only when the mouse button is
released.
Picked point
6-15
156225-1CD 131/532
6.5 Markup
6.5 Markup
Graphic forms (such as circles, rectangles) and text can be temporarily drawn on the cell
window.
6.5.1 Freehand
This section explains on how to draw a free-form line.
NOTE The line drawn on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
6-16
156225-1CD 132/532
6.5 Markup
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the line will be
deleted when the viewpoint is changed.)
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Make-up] button, and select [Free
Hand].
Position the mouse pointer at a desired point, and drag the mouse freely so that the
mouse pointer on screen draws a line with the mouse movement. 
Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Options] menu to set the
color and thickness of the line. Refer to Section 10.2 "Markup Settings" for details.
6.5.2 Circle
This section explains on how to draw a circle.
NOTE The circle drawn on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
6-17
156225-1CD 133/532
6.5 Markup
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the circle will be
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Make-up] button, and select
[Circle].
Position the mouse pointer at a desired point, and drag the mouse: a circle is drawn
centering around the point where the mouse started dragging. 
color and line thickness of the circle. Refer to Section 10.2 "Markup Settings" for
details.
6.5.3 Rectangle
This section explains on how to draw a rectangle.
NOTE The rectangle drawn on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
6-18
156225-1CD 134/532
6.5 Markup
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the rectangle will
be deleted when the viewpoint is changed.)
[Rectangle].
Position the mouse pointer at a desired point, and drag the mouse: a rectangle is
drawn from the point where the mouse started dragging. 
color and line thickness of the rectangle. Refer to Section 10.2 "Markup Settings" for
details.
6.5.4 Notes
This section explains on how to add a note.
NOTE The note added on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
 Adding a Note
6-19
156225-1CD 135/532
6.5 Markup
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the note will be
[Notes].
Click any point on the window where to add notes; a "Note" indication appears at the
clicked point. Right-click the “Note” to open a pop-up menu, and select {Edit} to enter
texts.
3. Click on [OK] after entering the texts. 

font and color of the text. Refer to Section 10.2 "Markup Settings" for details.
NOTE • The note added on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
• When adding two-byte characters, use a font that properly displays two-byte characters.
 Deleting a Note
Select the note to be deleted, and right-click it. Select {Delete} from the pop-up menu to
delete the text.
 Relocating a Note
Drag a note to a different location with on the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Make-up] button, and selected [Notes].
Note that the arrow remains at the same point.
6-20
156225-1CD 136/532
6.6 Memo
6.6 Memo
This section explains on how to create a memo (text).
Memo
 Creating a Memo
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Memo] button.
Click the desired model and drag the mouse to the desired memo location; a "Memo"
indication with an arrowed line appears at the position where the mouse button is
released after dragging.
Non-displayed model or the point where there is no model cannot be selected as a subject
NOTE for the memo indication whereas any point of the model displayed on the window can be
selected for the memo indication.
2. Right-click “Memo” to open a pop-up menu, and select {Edit} to enter texts.
6-21
156225-1CD 137/532
6.6 Memo
3. Enter texts, and click on [OK]. 

font and color of the texts. Refer to Section 10.2 "Markup Settings" for details.
NOTE When adding two-byte characters, use a font that properly displays two-byte characters.
 Deleting a Memo
Select a memo to be deleted, and right-click it. Select {Delete} from the pop-up menu to
delete the memo with the arrowed line.
 Relocating a Memo
Drag a note to a different location with on the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Make-up] button, and selected [Memo].
6-22
156225-1CD 138/532
6.7 Cutting Planes
6.7 Cutting Planes
This section explains on how to display cross sections that are perpendicular to the X-, Y-, Z-
axes directions in the cell window.
6.7.1 X-Cutting Planes

With this command, the X-cutting plane (a cutting plane which is perpendicular to the X-axis
direction in the window) can be displayed as shown in the following figure:
 Rotated centering on the Z-axis
 Shifted in parallel in the X-axis

direction.
 Rotated centering on the Y-axis
 Displaying the X-Cutting Plane

When the X-cutting plane is not displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [X]
 Deleting the X-Cutting Plane

When the X-cutting plane is displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [X]
6-23
156225-1CD 139/532
6.7 Cutting Planes
 Changing Display of the X-Cutting Plane

Drag the tools  to on the figure above to rotate the X-cutting plane centering on the Y- or
Z-axis, or shift it in a direction parallel to the X-axis.
 Shift the X-cutting planes in a direction parallel to the X-axis.
 Rotate the X-cutting planes centering on the Y-axis.
 Rotate the X-cutting planes centering on the Z-axis.
6.7.2 Y-Cutting Planes

With this command, the Y-cutting plane (a cutting plane which is perpendicular to the Y-axis
 Rotated centering on the Z-axis

 Rotated centering on the X-axis
 Shifted in parallel in the Y-axis
direction.
 Displaying the Y-Cutting Plane

When the Y-cutting plane is not displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [Y]
6-24
156225-1CD 140/532
6.7 Cutting Planes
 Deleting the Y-Cutting Plane

When the Y-cutting plane is displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [Y]
 Changing Display of the Y-Cutting Plane

Drag the tools  to  on the figure above to rotate the Y-cutting plane centering on the X- or
Z-axis, or shift it in a direction parallel to the Y-axis.
 Shift the Y-cutting plane in a direction parallel to the Y-axis.
 Rotate the Y-cutting plane centering on the X-axis.
 Rotate the Y-cutting plane centering on the Z-axis.
6.7.3 Z-Cutting Planes

With this command, the Y-cutting plane (a cutting plane which is perpendicular to the Z-axis
 Shifted in parallel in the Z-axis
direction.
 Rotated centering on the Y-axis
 Rotated centering on the X-axis
 Displaying the Z-Cutting Plane

When the Z-cutting plane is not displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [Z]
6-25
156225-1CD 141/532
6.7 Cutting Planes
 Deleting the Z-Cutting Plane

When the Z-cutting plane is displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [Z]
 Changing the Z-Cutting Plane

Drag the tools  to  on the figure above to rotate the Z-cutting plane centering on the X- or
Y-axis, or shift it in a direction parallel to the Z-axis.
 Shift the Z-cutting plane in a direction parallel to the Z-axis.
 Rotate the Z-cutting plane centering on the X-axis.
 Rotate the Z-cutting plane centering on the Y-axis.
6-26
156225-1CD 142/532
6.8 Measure Distance
6.8 Measure Distance
Click 2 points to measure the distance between them.
st
Coordinate of the 1 point
nd
Coordinate of the 2 point
Difference between
the 2 points
Measure Distance dialog
Copy Copies the measurement result to the clipboard.
Close Closes the Measure Distance dialog.
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the [Distance] button.
2. Click any 2 points on the models with the mouse. (Blue dots on the clicked positions and a
blue line joining the points appears.) The Measure Distance dialog displays with the
measurement results.
NOTE When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current "Pick Mode" and "Pick
Object" settings. Please refer to Section 6.4 "Pick Settings" for details.
6-27
156225-1CD 143/532
6.9 Measure Angle
6.9 Measure Angle
Click 3 points to measure the angle between them.
Coordinates of the 3 points
Angle between the 2 lines

linking the 3 points
Measure Distance dialog
Copy Copies the measurement result to the clipboard.
Close Closes the Measure Angle dialog.
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the [Angle] button.
2. Click with the mouse any 3 points on models. (Blue dots on the clicked positions and blue
lines joining the points will appear.) The Measure Angle dialog will display with the mea-
surement results.
NOTE When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current "Pick Mode" and "Pick
Object" settings. Please refer to Section 6.4 "Pick Settings" for details.
This angle.
6-28
156225-1CD 144/532
6.10 Measure Line
6.10 Measure Line
With this command, a dimension line can be created as shown in the figure below.
 Creating a Dimension Line
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the [Measure Line] button.
2. Click a model and drag; a dimension line with two-headed arrow appears where the
mouse is dragged across, displaying the dimension between the both ends.
• Non-displayed model or the point where there is no model cannot be selected as a

subject for the dimension line indication whereas any point of the model displayed on the
NOTE window can be selected for the dimension indication.
• When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current "Pick Mode" and
"Pick Object" settings. Please refer to Section 6.4 "Pick Settings" for details.
 Deleting a Dimension Line

Select a dimension to be deleted, and right-click it. Select {Delete} from the pop-up menu to
delete the dimension with the dimension line.
 Relocating a Dimension Line

Drag a note to a different location with on the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the
[Measure Line] button.
6-29
156225-1CD 145/532
6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode
6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode
On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Rendering Mode] button, the display mode
can be change..
SUPPLE
• The cell is displayed in "GourandShading" mode when it is opened.
-MENT • For edition, select desired mode from "FlatShading", "GourandShading", or "Wireframe".
Flat Shading
The image displayed in flat shaded rendering mode:
Gourand Shading
The image displayed in Gourand shaded rendering mode:
Wire Frame
The image displayed in wire frame:
6-30
156225-1CD 146/532
6.12 Other Display Operations
6.12.1 Changing Frame Width

Modify the frame line width for better visualization on the display.
Refer to Section 10.1.5 "Frame & AXIS6" to set the frame length.
Procedure
On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Line Size] button,and select the frame
width from {Small}, {Medium}, or {Large}.
6.12.2 Copying the Image

Copy the static image of the cell window: the copied data can be used in other application
software by pasting it.
Procedure
Display the cell to be copied. On the [Home] tab, in the [Tools] group, click the [Copy] button,
or hold down the Ctrl key and press the C key.
6.12.3 Dividing a Cell Window

A cell window can be divided up to four views by dragging a separator of the vertical or
horizontal scroll bar in the cell window. This function provides users with different viewpoint
angles, enabling teaching or playback operations viewed from several directions.
Drag here.
6-31
156225-1CD 147/532
6.12.4 Printing the Image

MotoSim EG-VRC does not have any printing function.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Tools] group, click the [Copy] button, or hard-copy the screen (Alt +
Print Screen), and paste it to another application.
6-32
156225-1CD 148/532
7.1 Adding a New Controller
7 Controller and Robot Settings
MotoSim EG-VRC allows many robot and controller operations, such as adding, deleting, etc.
This chapter describes operation related to setting controllers and robots
A single controller may have one or more control group representing robot, base station or
external stations. Then, there are 2 ways to create the environment. One is to recreate the
system configuration in the MotoSim EG-VRC with the "CMOS.BIN" file saved from a real
controller. The "CMOS.BIN" file contains all the information defining a controller and its robots.
The other is to create the "CMOS.BIN" file in the MotoSim EG-VRC.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [New] button, the new controller can be
created.
There are 2 ways to proceed depending on the presence or absence of the "CMOS.BIN" file.
• If there is not the "CMOS.BIN" file (the "CMOS.BIN" file is created in the MotoSim EG-
VRC), proceed to Section 7.1.1 "Create a New VRC Controller (no file)".
• If there is the "CMOS.BIN" file (the "CMOS.BIN" file is taken from a real controller),
proceed to Section 7.1.2 "Create VRC Controller (using CMOS.BIN file.)".
Note that a controller that has already been created by MotoSim EG-VRC cell can be simply
copied into the cell. To do so, please refer to Section 7.2 "Copying a Controller from another
Cell".
7-1
156225-1CD 149/532
7.1.1 Create a New VRC Controller (no file)

Create a new controller and define a system in MotoSim EG-VRC.
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [New] button. To display the
“Create Controller” dialog. Select “New VRC Controller (no file)” and press the [OK]
button.
2. The "New Controller" dialog box appears. Select the controller type and then the
system version from the list below. If desired you may change the default name for the
controller. Click the "OK" button.
Check the Expanded Memory check

box, construct the controller with the
expanded memory.
Uncheck this check box, construct the
controller with the standard memory.
• When ECD80D-A00 (NX100) is registered, select the following controller certainly. That
robot model is only used with the following controller system version.
NOTE [Controller Type] NX100
[System Version] NS 4.69-A5
• The expanded memory option is not supported for the FS100 controller.
7-2
156225-1CD 150/532
3. The controller will launch with the selected system version and display the Virtual
Pendant in maintenance mode. (This may take a few moments.) At the same time, the
“Controller Maintenance Mode” Instruction Guide will appear.
Since there is no CMOS.BIN file, it is necessary to initialize the controller with the
Virtual Pendant in order to define the system (language, robot, application...). 
To do so:
• Initialize the controller
• Once the controller initialization is completed, click on the “Finish” button of the
Instruction Guide to reboot.
For details how to proceed to set initialize the controller, follow the procedure described
in the “Instruction Guide” or refer to Section 7.1.3 "Initializing the Controller (DX200,
DX100, NX100)" that follow later in this chapter.
4. The Virtual Pendant will close and reboot in normal mode. (This may take a few
moments.) The “Robot Setting” dialog will display. A default robot name and model file
should be pre-entered. If required, enter a name for the robot and select a robot model
file corresponding to the robot type. (In the example below, the robot model is
“VA01400-A00” the corresponding model is “VA01400-A00.mdl”.) Robot models are
found in the “Robot” folder under MotoSimEG-VRC install folder. Click the [OK] button.
7-3
156225-1CD 151/532
5. The robot will display with the selected model file.
When initialized the robot controller, MotoSim EG-VRC set the absolute data
NOTE automatically. So absolute setting is not needed in MotoSim EG-VRC.
Refer to Section 7.1.4 "Initializing the Controller (FS100)" for details.
7.1.2 Create VRC Controller (using CMOS.BIN file.)

Reproduce an existing system composition in MotoSim EG-VRC using the "CMOS.BIN" file
saved from a real system.
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [New] button. To display the
“Create Controller” dialog. Select “VRC Controller (using CMOS.BIN file)” and press
the [OK] button.
7-4
156225-1CD 152/532
2. The “Open” dialog box appears. Select the CMOS.BIN file to be used to create the
controller, and click [Open].
3. The "New Controller" dialog box appears. Select the controller type and then the
system version from the list below that corresponds to the version of system from
which came the "CMOS.BIN" selected in step 2. If desired you may change the default
name for the controller. Click the "OK" button.
When ECD80D-A00 (NX100) is registered, select the following controller certainly.

NOTE That robot model is only used with the following controller system version.
[Controller Type] NX100
4. The controller will launch with the selected system version and display the Virtual
Pendant in maintenance mode. (This may take a few moments.) At the same time, the
“Controller Maintenance Mode” Instruction Guide will appear.
7-5
156225-1CD 153/532
5. From the virtual pendant main menu, select [TOOL] - [Compact Flash] to load the
CMOS.BIN data.
6. Move the cursor to select "LOAD CMOS" and press the [space] key or click [Select].
7-6
156225-1CD 154/532
7. A confirmation dialog box will appear, select [Yes] to start loading the CMOS data. 
This may take a few moments and warning message, indicating not to turn off the
controller, appears at the bottom of the Virtual Pendant. Wait until the message
disappears before proceeding to another operation that may cause the controller to
reboot or close.
8. Once the controller CMOS load is completed, click the [Finish] button from the
[Controller Maintenance Mode Instruction] dialog.
9. The Virtual Pendant will close and reboot in normal mode. (This may take a few
moments.) The “Robot Setting” dialog will display. A default robot name and model file
should be pre-entered. If required, enter a name for the robot and select a robot model
file corresponding to the robot type. (In the example below, the robot model is
“VA01400-A00” the corresponding model is “VA01400-A00.mdl”.) Robot models are
found in the “Robot” folder under MotoSimEG-VRC install folder. Click the [OK] button.
7-7
156225-1CD 155/532
7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200, DX100, NX100)
Using the virtual pendant in maintenance mode, the system of controller (language, robot,
application…) can be set.
Procedure
1. Select {SYSTEM} - {INITIALIZE} from the main menu.
A series of configuration screen will display to configure the controller. Press

NOTE [ENTER] to go to the next screen. Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard or
[CANCEL] on the pendant keypad to go back to the previous screen.
To change a field, move the cursor over that field with the arrow keys and then
select it by pressing the [Space] key on the keyboard or by clicking the [Select]
NOTE button on the pendant keypad. Depending on the field, either select a value from
the list of choices; or enter the required value and press [ENTER] to register the
value.
2. In the “LANGUAGE” screen, select a language for LANGUAGE1 and LANGUAGE2.
The Virtual Pendant interface can change between the set languages by pressing
NOTE the [SHIFT] key on the keyboard and clicking the [AREA] key on the pendant
keypad.
7-8
156225-1CD 156/532
3. In the “CONTROL GROUP” screen, define the control groups by selecting the
manipulator connecter to the each group. “R” groups are for robot, “B” groups are for
robot base station and “S” groups are for external axis devices. When the selection is
complet, press [ENTER] to go to the next screen.
• The robot models supported by MotoSim EG-VRC are those displayed on the virtual
pendant for the controller version selected at the time of creation. Please refer to
Section A.7 "List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG-
VRC" for the list of available model. However, for similar robot model that only have
NOTE differences in the details of their shape, it maybe possible to do simulation using the
standard robot model (model ending with A0*).
• When ECD80D-A00 (NX100) is registered, select the following controller certainly. That
robot model is only used with the following controller system version.
[Controller Type] NX100
4. The “CONNECT” screen doesn’t need any change. Press [ENTER] to go to the next
screen.
7-9
156225-1CD 157/532
5. In the “APPLICATION” screen, select the application that correspond best to what the
robot will be doing.
6. The “OPTION BOARD” screen doesn’t need any change. Press [ENTER] to go to the
next screen.
7. The “I/O MODULE” screen is only for confirmation and I/O modules selection cannot
be changed at this step. Press [ENTER] twice to go to the next screen. To add I/O
modules please refer to Section 11.4 "Adding I/O Board Module".
7-10
156225-1CD 158/532
8. The “CMOS MEMORY” screen cannot be modified. Press [ENTER] to go to the next
screen.
9. The “DATE/TIME SET” screen cannot be modified. Press [ENTER] to go to the next
screen.
10. A confirmation dialog box will appear, select [YES] to start initializing the CMOS data.
Then, the message "Initializing system data. Don't turn the power off." is displayed at
the bottom of the virtual pendant. Don't operate anything while that message is
displayed. If the initialization is finished, the message is changed to "Maintenance
Mode".
7-11
156225-1CD 159/532
7.1.4 Initializing the Controller (FS100)
Using the virtual pendant in maintenance mode, the system of controller (language, robot,
application…) can be set.
Procedure
1. Select {SYSTEM} - {INITIALIZE} from the main menu.
A series of configuration screen will display to configure the controller. Press

NOTE [ENTER] to go to the next screen. Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard or
[CANCEL] on the pendant keypad to go back to the previous screen.
To change a field, move the cursor over that field with the arrow keys and then
select it by pressing the [Space] key on the keyboard or by clicking the [Select]
NOTE button on the pendant keypad. Depending on the field, either select a value from
the list of choices; or enter the required value and press [ENTER] to register the
value.
2. In the "LANGUAGE" screen, select a language for LANGUAGE1 and LANGUAGE2.

When the selection is completed, press [ENTER] to go to the next screen.
The Virtual Pendant interface can change between the set languages by pressing
NOTE the [SHIFT] key on the keyboard and clicking the [AREA] key on the pendant
keypad.
7-12
156225-1CD 160/532
3. In the "CONTROL GROUP" screen, define the control groups by selecting the
manipulator connecter to the each group. "R" groups are for robot, "B" groups are for
robot base station and "S" groups are for external axis devices. When the selection is
completed, press [ENTER] to go to the next screen.
The robot models supported by MotoSim EG-VRC are those displayed on the virtual
pendant for the controller version selected at the time of creation. Please refer to Section
NOTE A.7 "List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG-VRC" for
the list of available model. However, for similar robot model that only have differences in
the details of their shape, it maybe possible to do simulation using the standard robot
model (model ending with A0*).
4. The "CONNECT" screen doesn't need any change. Press [ENTER] to go to the next
screen.
5. The "IO MODULE" screen doesn't need any change. Press [ENTER] to go to the next
screen.
7-13
156225-1CD 161/532
6. The "SENSOR FUNCTION ALLOCATION" screen doesn't need any change. Press
[ENTER] to go to the next screen.
7. The "EXTERNAL IO ALLOCATION(INPUT)" screen doesn't need any change. Press

8. The "EXTERNAL IO ALLOCATION(OUTPUT)" screen doesn't need any change.

Press [ENTER] to go to the next screen.
9. The "CMOS MEMORY" screen doesn't need any change. Press [ENTER] to go to the
next screen.
7-14
156225-1CD 162/532
10. The "DATE/TIME SET" screen doesn't need any change. Press [ENTER] to go to the
next screen.
11. A confirmation dialog box will appear, select [YES] to start initializing the CMOS data.
Then, the message "Initializing system data. Don't turn the power off." is displayed at
the bottom of the virtual pendant. Don't operate anything while that message is
displayed. If the initialization is finished, the message is changed to "Maintenance
Mode"
7.1.5 Defining the Robot Home Position

When initialized the robot controller, MotoSim EG-VRC set the absolute data automatically. So
absolute setting is not needed in MotoSim EG-VRC. (This setting should be needed in real
robot.)
7-15
156225-1CD 163/532
7.2 Copying a Controller from another Cell
A controller already define in a MotoSimEG-VRC cell can be copied over to another cell.
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [Copy] button.
2. The “Open” dialog box appears. Select the VRC.BIN file located in the controller folder
(folder bearing the name of the controller) of a MotoSimEG-VRC cell, and click [Open].
3. The “Add Controller” dialog box appears. Enter a name for the controller. The “File
Name” field already contains the path to the VRC.BIN selected in step 2 above. Click
[OK]. The controller and robot files will be copied over to the current cell folder and the
controller will boot in normal mode. This may take a few moments.
7-16
156225-1CD 164/532
4. When the controller has completed its boot up, the “Robot Setting” dialog will display.
Default robot name and model file should be pre-entered. If required, they may be
modified. Click the [OK] button.
7-17
156225-1CD 165/532
7.3 Deleting a Controller
7.3 Deleting a Controller
To delete the controller and its associated robots from a cell, follow the procedure below.
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [Delete] button.
2. The “Select Controller/Robot” dialog box appears. Select the controller to be deleted,
then click on [OK].
3. The confirmation message below will appear. Select [Yes] to remove the controller
from the cell.
The controller is removed from the cell but its corresponding folder and files are
NOTE not deleted from the cell folder.
A delete controller may be added later on by using the “Copy Controller...” menu.
(For details refer to Section 7.2 "Copying a Controller from another Cell")
7-18
156225-1CD 166/532
7.4 Select Controller
7.4 Select Controller
A cell always have an active controller .

Simply click on the down arrow to display the list of controllers and select the desired
controller. (See figure below)
7-19
156225-1CD 167/532
7.5 Controller Setting
7.5.1 Tool Editor

The Tool Editor is used to select the active tool and to modify the tool data.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Tool Data] button, the [Tool
Editor] dialog appear.
Select the tool number, and then, if required, modify the tool data by using the spin button
at the side of each edit box or entering a value directly. The tool data can also be changed by
checking the [Pick Enable] check box and clicking in the cell window.
• In a cell with multiple controllers, it is necessary to select the controller to edit with the
ribbon before opening the Tool Editor dialog box.
• In order to change the Tool No., the controller must be set to operate with multiple tools.
Use the following parameter to activate the multiple tool function on the controller:
DX200, DX100, FS100
NOTE
S2C431: Tool number change (0: Single tool, 1: Multiple tool)
NX100 S2C333: Tool number change (0: Single tool, 1: Multiple tool)
For more detail please refer to the "Tool Coordinates" of the controller "Operator's
Manual".
• To change the tool selection and tool data using the virtual pendant, please refer to the
"Tool Coordinates" of the controller "Operator's Manual".
Selected controller Robot name
Tool Number
Incremental value of the
7-20
156225-1CD 168/532
Tool Editor Dialog Box
Item Description
[OK] button Closes the dialog box after modifying the tool data.
[Cancel] button Closes the dialog box without modifying the data to the new values.
[Apply] button Modifies the tool data; does not close the dialog box.
Enables mouse picking operation to move the tool center point to the
clicked position.
[Pick Enable] When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current
check box "Pick Mode" and "Pick Object" settings. Please refer to Section "6.4
Pick Settings" for details.
Pressing the [Shift] key enables or disables the [Active] checkbox.
[Exp >>] button Displays tool load information, enabling data setting.
 Setting the Tool Load Information

Tool Editor dialog box extends to show the tool load information as follows when [Exp. >>]
button is selected.
7-21
156225-1CD 169/532
7.5.2 User Frame

The Set User Frame dialog box is used define user coordinate system or delete existing ones.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [User Frame] button, the [Set User
Frame] dialog appear.
• In a cell with multiple controllers, it is necessary to select the controller to edit with the
ribbon before opening the Set User Frame dialog box.

• To change the user coordinate selection and the coordinate system definition using the
NOTE virtual pendant, please refer to the "User Coordinates" of the controller "Operator's
Manual".
• Master tool user coordinate can be edited the values only. New master tool user
coordinate can not be created in this dialog. When select the existing master tool user
coordinate, robot name is gray out.
Selected Controller Robot Name
User Frame Number
Incremental value of the
Set User Frame Dialog Box
Item Description
[Add] button Create a coordinate system for the selected user frame number.
[Delete] button Delete the coordinate system of the selected user frame number.
Enables mouse picking operation to move the user frame to the clicked
position.
[Pick Enable] When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current
check box "Pick Mode" and "Pick Object" settings. Please refer to Section "6.4
Pick Settings" for details.
Pressing the [Shift] key enables or disables the [Active] checkbox.
[OK] button Closes the dialog box after confirming the overwrite of user frame.
7-22
156225-1CD 170/532
Set User Frame Dialog Box
Item Description
[Cancel] button Closes the dialog box without modifying the data to the new values.
Procedure
1. Select the user frame number to be edited with the top left combobox.
2. If the selected UF#2 doesn't already exist, press to the [Add] button.
3. Check the [Active] checkbox, and then left-click with the mouse on the cell window to
move the user frame to the clicked position.
4. If necessary, set the axis values to move the user frame.
5. Press [OK] to save the user frame settings.
7.5.3 Reboot Controller

Some operation perform in the Virtual Pendant such as parameter changes may require to
reboot the controller in order for the change to be affective.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Reboot] button,The controller can be
rebooted.
7.5.4 Refresh Interval

The re-drawing interval at the playback is set every second (s).
During playback, the drawing time interval can be set in the “Refresh Interval” dialog box.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Settings] group, click the [Heart Beat] button,the [Refresh Interval]
dialog appears.
The VRC sends position data to MotoSimEG-VRC for every segment (usually between 10 and
20 milliseconds). For animation purpose, the screen doesn’t need to be refreshed so quickly.
The refresh interval can be adjusted to optimize the playback visualization according to a
specific computer capability.
7-23
156225-1CD 171/532
 Setting of high-speed playback function

When [More >>] button is pushed, the high-speed playback set up information is displayed.
The playback can be done at high speed by setting the high-speed playback function.
• The high-speed playback function is a function sped up by omitting the segment data.
The effect might not become visible according to a set value at drawing intervals and
NOTE computers that use it.
• Please do not use this function when you want to check the movement of every one
segment on the pulse record.
Item Description
[Enable Fast Playback]

The high-speed playback function is made effective.
check box
The section where the high-speed playback function is made effective

is set.
[Subject Pass] All : The function is made effective in all sections.
Welding Pass : The function is made effective while welding
(ARCON-ARCOF section).
The degree at the speed of the high-speed playback function is set by

[Speed]
five stages.
7.5.5 Servo Emulation

To playback without considering the lag of servo, On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback]
group, click the [Servo Emulation] button.
7-24
156225-1CD 172/532
7.5.6 Cube Interference Area

Interference area can be define on the controller to determine if a robot is in a given cube or
prevent the robot to enter the defined area.
 Displaying the Cube Interference Area

On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Cube Interference Area] button
and select [Draw Cube Area Model] , the defined interference cubes display.
 Deleting the Cube Interference Area

On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Cube Interference Area] button
and select [Delete Cube Area Model] , the defined interference cubes display.
This will only delete the models, the cube area definition in the controller will not be affected.
 Setting the Cube Interference Area

The cube interference areas can be defined by using the Virtual Pendant. Please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the controller for the procedure.
If the cube areas are already displayed and the cube definitions are changed, the cube
NOTE model in MotoSimEG-VRC will not automatically be updated.
After modifying the cubes with the Virtual Pendant, the {Cube Area Update & Display}
menu need to be selected in order to update the MotoSimEG-VRC display.
7-25
156225-1CD 173/532
7.6 Robot Settings
7.6 Robot Settings
7.6.1 Robot Property

The “Robot Property” diaog can be used to change the robots name and their model files. On
the [Controller] tab, in the [Robot] group, click the [Model Setting] button, the [Robot Settings]
dialog appears.
Procedure
1. Select a robot from the robot list. Its name and model file will display in the
corresponding field in the section below the robot list.
2. Edit the robot name or select a new model file.
3. If multiple changes are required, repeat the above steps. As new selections are made
the data in the robot list will be updated.
4. When all the changes have been entered, press the “OK” button to apply those
changes and close the “Robot Settings” dialog. Or, press “Cancel” to discard the
changes.
7-26
156225-1CD 174/532
7.6 Robot Settings
7.6.2 Reach View

The motion range of the robot P-point (wrist rotation center) can be displayed in 2D or 3D.
To create or delete Reach View models,
On the [Controller] tab, in the [Robot] group, click the [TCP Reach] button, the [Reach Area]
dialog appears.
Reach Area Dialog Box
Item Description
Specifies display style for range of motion. (For some robot models,
3D display is not available.)
• [2D] radio button: displays range of motion in 2D style.
• [3D] radio button: displays range of motion in 3D style.
“Disp” section
Motion Range can be displayed in both 2D and 3D style
NOTE simultaneously: Select 2D and press the [Create]
button; then select 3D, change color (optional) and press
[Create] again.
“Level” section Selects display level (rough/standard/fine) of range of motion.
[Color] button Displays Color dialog box to specify colors.
[Delete] button Deletes the previously created Reach View models.
Creates a Reach View model of the specified style representing the

[Create] button
range of motion of the cell active robot.
[Close] button Closes Reach Area dialog box.
7-27
156225-1CD 175/532
7.6 Robot Settings
7.6.3 Robot Calibration Setting

The robot calibration data define the relative position between robots and stations of a same
controller. This information is necessary to use the “Coordination Motion” function of the
controller. In order for MotoSimEG-VRC to properly display the coordinated motion between
robots/stations, the controller calibration data and robot/station model layout must correspond
to each other.
To adjust the controller calibration and robot/station model layout to correspond to each other,
display the “Coordinated Motion Calibration” dialog by selecting: on the [Controller] tab, in the
[File Setting] group, click the [Robot Calibration] button.
“Coordinated Motion Calibration” Dialog Box
Item Description
Adjusts the relative position between the robot/station models to

match the calibration data of the controller.
Layout robot models to

match calibration data NOTE The calibration data must be define in the controller
before using this function.
Sets the calibration data of the controller based on the relative

Set calibration data base
position between the robot/station models in the MotoSimEG-VRC
on robot model layout
layout.
[Close] button Closes the “Coordinated Motion Calibration” dialog box.
The “Calibration” menu item is only available for controller with the “Coordinated
NOTE Motion” option activated. In order to activate this function,please refer to the steps to
set {OPTION FUNCTION} for each controller in the Section "11.6 Dual-Arm robot
Setting".
7-28
156225-1CD 176/532
7.7 Peripheral Equipment
Peripheral Equipment or Device are considered as a RCS controllers. Their name appears in
the Controller lists with the other controllers. They can be programmed to move in the same
manner as a robot controller by creating jobs and then playing them back. 
Three types of device are available: conveyor, press and gantry.
7.7.1 Adding a Conveyor

 Adding a Conveyor
Conveyors are device that can be setup with 1 to 3 linear axis (X, Y, Z).
To add a conveyor to the cell. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the
[New] button, and select [Conveyor] the [Conveyor Installation] dialog appears.
Up to 6 conveyors can be added to a cell. The conveyor is registered as a controller with

NOTE the name displayed in the "Name" edit box of the Conveyor Install dialog box. This name
is determine by the selection of the conveyor number and cannot be changed.
The conveyor name is automatically completed

when the conveyor No. is selected.
Conveyor Installation dialog box
Item Description
"No" section Specifies the conveyor number.
"Joint Num" section Specifies the number of axis by selecting one of the radio buttons.
7-29
156225-1CD 177/532
Conveyor Installation dialog box
Item Description
Adds the conveyor to the cell and then displays the “Conveyor Setting”
[OK] button dialog box.
Refer to Section "7.7.1 Adding a Conveyor" for details.
 Conveyor Setting
Specify the dimensions, speed, and operating range of the conveyor to be registered in the
Edit Conveyor Information dialog box.
This dialog is automatically displayed when a new conveyor is installed. It can also be
displayed afterward to modify the conveyer settings by selecting:
On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Setting] button.
Conveyor Setting dialog box
Item Description
"No" section Specifies the conveyor number to set the condition.
7-30
156225-1CD 178/532
Conveyor Setting dialog box
Item Description
Specifies the dimensions of the conveyor to be registered.
"L(mm)" edit box Entire length of the conveyor.
"D(mm)" edit box Width of the conveyor.

"Model info" section
Thickness of the conveyor. (Distance from
"H(mm)" edit box
the floor to the conveyor top.)
Limit switch position for the conveyor home

"Org(mm)" edit box
position. (Distance from the conveyor end.)
Specifies the dimensions of the conveyor to be registered.
"Speed(mm/s)" 
Operation speed of the conveyor.
edit box
Start position of the conveyor operation.

"Start(mm)" 
"Motion info" section (Specify the distance from the home position
edit box
of the conveyor.)
End position of the conveyor operation.

"End(mm)" 
(Specify the distance from the home position
edit box
of the conveyor.)
[make model] check box Creates a default conveyor model.
• When the default conveyor model is modified, clear the [make model] check box unless
NOTE the default conveyor model is to be used. If the [make model] check box is not cleared,
the modification for the model becomes invalid, and the model is restored to the default
model.
7-31
156225-1CD 179/532
7.7.2 Adding a Press

Presses are device that have 3 linear axis (X, Y, Z). By default, only the Z-axis is enabled to
move because the X and Y axes motion have been restrained by soft limits. To change the
soft limit restriction please refer to the Section "7.7.4 Modifying the Soft Limit of a Device" .
To add a press to the cell. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the
[New] button, and select [Press] .
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [New] button, and
select [Press] the [Press] dialog appears.
Select if the default press model is to be used or not by checking or unchecking the
[Make Model] check box. (The [Make Model] check box is selected by default.)
Press the [OK] button.
2. Enter the name of the press in the “Device Install” dialog, as shown in the figure below.
3. The press is added to the cell and a model is automatically generated if the [Make
Model] option was checked in the “Press” dialog.
7-32
156225-1CD 180/532
7.7.3 Adding a Gantry

A gantry device is composed of a “robot” model (RB1) with three linear axes (X, Y, Z) for the
base and a “station” model (ST1) with three external rotation axes for the head (Rx, Ry, Rz).
The control point (TCP) is thoroughly determined by the three rectangular linear axes, and is
independent of the external axes.
To add a gantry to the cell. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the
[New] button, and select [Gantry] .
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [New] button, and
select [Gantry] the [Gantry] dialog appears.
Select the check box to specify if the following items in “Gantry” dialog box are
required.
[Series List] check box: Configuration of external rotation axis.
(Checked: serial configuration; cleared: parallel configuration.)
[Make Model] check box: Creation of a model. (Check the box if model creation is
desired.)
Note that both check boxes are selected by default. 
Press the [OK] button.
7-33
156225-1CD 181/532
2. Enter the name of the gantry in the “Device Install” dialog, as shown in the figure below.
3. The gantry is added to the cell and a model is automatically generated if the [Make
Model] option was checked in the “Gantry” dialog.
7.7.4 Modifying the Soft Limit of a Device

The motion range of device can be modified with the “Soft Limit Setting” dialog.
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Soft Limit] button, the
[Soft Limit Setting] dialog appears.
2. Select the device to be edited from the “Name” combobox.

Note that when a gantry device is selected, the dialog expand to also display settings
for the Rx, Ry, Rz axes.
7-34
156225-1CD 182/532
3. Modify the values as required and press the [Apply] button to make the modification.
4. Press “Close” to close the dialog.
5. For the modification to take affect, close the cell file and then open it again.
NOTE To enable the modifications, reload the cell.
7.7.5 Moving a Device

Devices can be moved by using the Position Panel.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [Position Panel] button, the [Position
Panel] dialog appears.
Unlike other robots, they can only be moved using the “Pulse” or “Joint” frame coordinate
system. Using the “Joint” frame is the equivalent of a rectangular coordinate system
(coordinate X, Y, Z in millimeters).
Gantry also have a station (external axes) mounted at the end of the robot TCP (X, Y, Z axes)
that allows Rx, Ry and Rz rotations. To move this axis, change the selection in the robot
7-35
156225-1CD 183/532
combobox to the robot name ending by “-ST1”.
For further detail on the Position Panel operation, please refer to Section "8.1 Position Panel"
.
7.7.6 Programming a Device

Devices can be programmed to move in the same manner as a robot controller by creating
jobs and then playing them back.
The Job panel is used to display the job and allow teaching. On the [Controller] tab, in the
[External Device] group, click the [Job Panel] button, the [Job Panel] dialog appears.
Selected job
Displays the “Select Job”

Adds, modifies or deletes dialog
instructions.
Select the [Enter] button
Synchronizes the robot processing mode.
position with the current
position in the display box.
Job display box
Adds multiple lines of
instructions at a time by
entering coordinate
values.
- Updates the job if it has been edited with other software.

- Moves the cursor to the step of the current robot position.
If the cell contains multiple devices and the "Multiple Controller Dialog" mode is enable, a
NOTE separate Job panel can be displayed for each device in the cell. Select the device to be
displayed in the controller combobox of the toolbar before displaying the Job panel.
7-36
156225-1CD 184/532
Job Panel
Item Description
Select the current job from the dropdown list or click on the [...] button
Job selection
to its right to display the “Select Job” dialog. (Refer to the " Select Job "
combobox
for details.
The device moves to the step selected in the job display panel if the
[Sync] step synchronization check box is selected.
JOB Edit dialog box for job editing appears by double-clicking the
selected line.
JOB Edit Dialog Box:

Modify the instruction in the edit box. Select either the [Add Line] or
[Replace Line] button.
Job display box
Executes the command selected among [Del], [Add], [Mod] radio

[Enter] button
buttons.
Displays the Interpolation dialog box.

Specify motion type, speed and position level for the playback
operation, and click [OK].
[MOVE...] button
To enable the modification of the motion type and speed

NOTE when a teaching position is modified, select the [Allow
Modif.] check box.
[Close] button Closes the Job Panel
7-37
156225-1CD 185/532
 Select Job
The Select Job dialog box (see the figure below) allows to select, copy, delete the jobs. It can
also import jobs registered in other cells.
Selected controller Controller folder
Selected job
List of the jobs in the controller folder.
Displays the content

of the selected job.
Selecting a Job
Select a job from the job list, then click on [OK]. 
Creating a Job
Type the name of the new job in the “Selected Job” field. The job name may not
exceed 8 characters and cannot contain any spaces.
Importing a Job
Procedure
1) Click on [Import].
2) Select a job, and click [Open].
3) Click [OK] to import the job.
7-38
156225-1CD 186/532
Copying a Job
Procedure
1) Select a job to be copied, and click on [Copy...]: the Job Copy dialog box as
shown below appears.
2) Enter a job name in the Destination of Copy edit box, and click on [Copy>>].
3) The job to be copied is displayed on the right; check the item, then click on [OK]
to copy the job.
Deleting a Job
Select a job to be deleted from the job list in the Select dialog box, then click on [Delete].
 Input of Coordinates (AxisInput)

Press [AxisInput] in the Job Panel to display Axis Data Input dialog box shown below, and
create a list by entering coordinate values (either pulse or rectangle). Instructions are added
to the job for each point of the list.
7-39
156225-1CD 187/532
Axis Data Input Dialog Box
Item Description
[Pulse] radio button Coordinate values are entered in pulse value.
[Rectangle] radio button Coordinate values are entered in rectangle value.
Loads the coordinate values from a CSV file, and inserts the
[CSV File Load] button
coordinate values right after the selected line in the list.
Inserts the coordinate entered in the Axis Input dialog box right after
[Line Insert] button
the selected line in the list.
[Line Edit] button Edits the selected line in the Axis Input dialog box.
Deletes the selected line from the list. (Multiple selection is

[Line Delete] button
allowed.)
Closes the Axis Data Input dialog box; the list is added as
[OK] button
instructions.
[Cancel] button Closes the Axis Data Input dialog box without modifying the job.
7-40
156225-1CD 188/532
Axis Input Dialog Box
Item Description
Radio Button selected in

the Axis Data Input Dialog Box
Coordinate
Pulse Rectangle
S/X S-axis X-axis
Pulse/Rectangle L/Y L-axis Y-axis
U/Z U-axis Z-axis
R/Rx R-axis Rx-axis
B/Ry B-axis Ry-axis
T/RZ T-axis Rz-axis
[OK] button Applies the modification, and closes the Axis Input dialog box.
[Cancel] button Closes the Axis Input dialog box without executing the modification.
Procedure
1. Select either the [Pulse] or [Rectangle] radio button in Axis Data Input dialog box.
2. Edit coordinate values with [Line Insert], [Line Edit], or [Line Delete], and create a list.
If a CSV file already exists, load coordinate values by selecting [CSV File Load].
3. When the list is completed, press [OK] to add the created list as instructions after the
selected line in the job.
The motion type and speed of MOVE instructions which have been added with the input of
NOTE coordinates are the set values specified in Interpolation dialog box displayed by clicking
[MOVE...] in the Job Panel.
7-41
156225-1CD 189/532
7.7.7 Other Operations with devices

 Deleting a Device
Device and their model can be deleted by using the same procedure as other controllers.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [Delete] button, the [Select Controller/
Robot] dialog appears..
 I/O Signals for Devices

Devices also have I/O signals that can be use to interact with other controllers in the cell.
They can be used in a similar way than those of a VRC controller.
Device I/O Monitor

The I/O Monitor for device is displayed in the same way as other controller but the displayed
dialog is different.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [I/O Monitor] button, the [I/O Monitor]
dialog appears
If the cell contains multiple device and the "Multiple Controller Dialog" mode is enable, a
NOTE separate I/O Monitor can be displayed for each device in the cell. Select the device to be
displayed in the controller combobox of the toolbar before displaying the I/O Monitor.
I/O Monitor can display signals change from an instruction and also give signals to the robot
by selecting an IN signal before or during playback.
The I/O data specified in I/O Monitor can be saved as well.
7-42
156225-1CD 190/532
I/O Monitor Dialog Box
Item Description
[Group No] Specifies the I/O group number to display.
Turns ON all the IN signals of all registered robots. Uncheck

[Set all IN-Signal] check box
the box to turn OFF all the IN signals.
Turns ON all the OUT signals of all registered robots. Uncheck

[Set all OT-Signal] check box
the box to turn OFF all the OUT signals.
[Clear I/O] button Clears all the signals of the selected robot.
[Close] button Closes I/O Monitor dialog box.
7-43
156225-1CD 191/532
7.7.8 Conveyor Operation Panel

This panel is used to operate the conveyor with 1 axis.
To operate the conveyor with multi-axis, refer to Section "7.7.5 Moving a Device".
Setting the conveyor
Conveyor Operation Panel
Item Description
To set the conveyer position for teaching the robot, input the
number or set the number by the button.
Position The position of conveyor in [Position] is

reflected LS offset value of the each robot.
NOTE When the other robot is selected, the position of
conveyor in [Position] is changed, without the
displayed conveyor is not operating.
When this is turned off during playback, the review on stopping

Conveyor Power On
the conveyor is enabled.
If this is turned on, the selected robot moves with conveyor on

operating the conveyor.
Robot Moving with Conveyor
When [Robot Moving with Conveyor] is used, set the conveyor
synchronization of the selected robot in advance.
7-44
156225-1CD 192/532
7.7.9 Conveyor Synchronization

This panel is used to set the synchronization condition between the robot and the conveyor.
If the conveyor synchronization option is available, this panel is displayed automatically when
the conveyor is added. Refer to Section "11.8 Setting of spot welding simulation" about
conveyor synchronization option.
To change the synchronization condition of registered conveyor. On the [Controller] tab, in the
[External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Condition File] button, the [Conveyor
Synchronization] dialog appears.
Conveyor Synchronization Setting
Item Description
The list of the controller which can use the conveyor

Robot synchronized function is displayed. Select the controller by the
list.
Select the conveyor synchronized with the controller selected by

Conveyor No
[Robot].
The name and speed of the conveyor selected by [Conveyor

Conveyor Info
No] is displayed.
7-45
156225-1CD 193/532
Conveyor Synchronization Setting
Item Description
[Condition File No] : Select the conveyor condition file of

the selected conveyor and controller.
the file is registered by the virtual
pendant.
[Tracking] : Specify whether to carry out the
synchronization with the robot-axis or
the base-axis.
[Base Axis] : When the [Base Axis] is selected by
[Tracking], the selected axis is dis
played.
[Direction Rev] : When the [Base Axis] is selected by
[Tracking], the item is displayed.
When the conveyor traveling
direction is opposite of the forward
Condition direction of base axis, this item is
"ON".
[Average Time (msec)] : The averaged travel time of conveyor
is displayed.
[User Frame No] : The user frame number of the
conveyor direction is displayed. The
user frame number corresponding to
the conveyor number is selected
automatically.
[LS offset (mm)] : Set the distance of the conveyor origin
position. When this item is set to
1000mm, the conveyor origin position
of the selected robot is located
1000mm before the origin position on
the display.
7-46
156225-1CD 194/532
7.8 Cycle Time
7.8 Cycle Time
On the [Controller] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Cycle time] button.
The latest cycle time of playback is displayed on the following display.
NOTE This function can not use depending on the system version of controller. Please refer to
Section "A.6 List of Function depending on the system version of controller".
Displays the maximum of playback
Copys the displayed data to the clipboard
7-47
156225-1CD 195/532
7.9 Trace
7.9 Trace
Trace is a function to display update points of the robot position when the robot playback is
performed. Larger dots in the traces mean the separation of the command data (step end).
Traces can be set with the "Trace Manager" dialog box. On the [Simulation] tab, in the
[Monitor] group, click the [Trace] button.
7.9.1 Trace Manager

Multiple traces can be set.
When a controller is registered to the cell a trace is automatically added for Tool Center Point
(TCP) of each robot.
“Trace Manager” Dialog Box
Item Description
Displays the information of the defined traces.

Trace Model: Name of the trace model (used in the CadTree)
Enable: Enable/Disable the trace generation during playback.
Length: Approximate travel distance of the traced point during
playback.
Trace list
Time: Playback Time
Keep TraceLine: In the case of Disable, the trace lines is deleted
automatically before the playback is started.
The “Trace Property” of a trace can be displayed by double-clicling on
a trace from the list.
Edits a trace with the “Trace Property” dialog.

[Edit] button
For details refer to Section "7.9.2 Trace Properties".
7-48
156225-1CD 196/532
7.9 Trace
“Trace Manager” Dialog Box
Item Description
Defines a new trace with the “Trace Property” dialog.

[Add] button
For details refer to Section "7.9.2 Trace Properties".
[Delete] button Deletes the trace definition currently selected in the trace list.
Opens the “Trace Copy” dialogs with the data of the trace currently
[Clipboard] button selected in the list.
For details refer to Section "7.9.3 Trace Copy".
Deletes all the trace models.

[Clear Model] button Note that before playback, all the previously generated trace models
are automatically deleted.
[Clear TraceLine]
Delete all the trace lines.
button
Save the trace lines as the model file.
[Save TraceLine] The trace is not saved on the cell. When it needs that the
button
NOTE trace is saved, the trace is saved by [Save TraceLine],
and save the cell.
[Close] button Closes the “Trace Manager” dialog box.
7.9.2 Trace Properties

The “Trace Property” dialog box is displayed by pressing the [Edit] or [Add] button of the
“Trace Manager” dialog box.
It allows to set the trace properties such as the color, number of points, traced model, etc.
“Trace Property” Dialog Box
Item Description
Indicates that the trace will be generated during playback when

[Enable]
checked.
7-49
156225-1CD 197/532
7.9 Trace
Item Description
Selects the robot associated with the trace.

A trace point is generated everytime the robot position is updated
[Robot]
during playback. 
This field cannot be modified when editing an existing trace.
Displays the name of the model that will be traced. 

The default model is the robot TCP. 
[Model]
To change model, press the [...] button beside the “Model” field to
display the “Select Model” dialog box. Select a model and press [OK].
Displays the name of the model that is used as the parent of the trace
and as a coordinated system for the trace point. 
[Parent] The default model is the “world” model. 
To change model, press the [...] button beside the “Parent” field to
display the “Select Model” dialog box. Select a model and press [OK].
When this item is checked, the trace lines before playback is not
[Keep TraceLine]
deleted and the playback is started.
Defines the maximum number of data points that are generates in the
trace model. The value may be increase up to 20 000 points. When
[Max Points]
the maximum value is reached, the oldest points are erased as new
points are generates.
Displays the color of the trace model. 

[Color] To change the color, press the [...] button beside the “Color” field to
display the “Color” dialog box. Select a color and press [OK].
[Line Type] Selects the line type: dotted, normal, thick.
If in [Add] mode: adds a new trace definition. 

[OK] button If in [Edit] mode: updates the selected trace definition.
Closes the “Trace Property” dialog box.
[Cancel] button Closes the “Trace Property” dialog box.
7-50
156225-1CD 198/532
7.9 Trace
7.9.3 Trace Copy

The “Trace Copy” dialog box is displayed by pressing the [Clipboard] button of the “Trace
Manager” dialog box.
It allows to copy the last playback data points of the selected trace to the clipboard or a text
file.
The displayed trace data are "Controller Name", "Robot Name", "Model Traced", "Trace
Model", and "Reference". Then, the values of position and speed at each trace points are
displayed.
“Trace Copy” Dialog Box
Item Description
[File] button Saves the displayed trace information to a text file.
[Clipboard] button Copies the displayed trace information to the clipboard.
[Close] button Closes the “Trace Copy” dialog box.
7-51
156225-1CD 199/532
7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode
7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode
NOTE The VRC Maintenance mode can only be started when there are no opened cell in
MotoSim EG-VRC. Before proceeding, save and close all opened cells.
The VRC controller can be started up in maintenance mode to perform various maintenance
task such as initializing data, setting, etc. When there are no opened cell, the “VRC
Maintenance Mode” dialog can be displayed by selecting from MotoSim EG-VRC : on the
[Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Maintenance Mode] button.
VRC Maintenance Mode
VRC.BINPath Select the VRC.BIN file to be maintenance by pressing the [...] button.
Start Start up the controller (VRC.BIN) and displays the Virtual Pendant in
maintenance mode.
End Closes the Virtual Pendant and shuts down the controller.
Some operations in the Virtual Pendant may take a few moments. Do not press the “End”
NOTE button until the Virtual Pendant has completed its current operation.
Closing the “Virtual Pendant” in the middle of an operation may cause the lost of VRC.BIN
data.
7-52
156225-1CD 200/532
7.11 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
Display the model from Safety Function File. And the file can be edited.
Following function is available in MotoSim EG-VRC.
• Display the robot range limit data
• Edit the safety function data
• Display the tool interference model
• Display the robot approximate model
• This function is available only when the controller is DX200 and the parameter of safety
function is available.
• Function safety in which a simulation is possible on MotoSim EG-VRC is as follows.
Robot Range Limit
Axis Range Limit
Speed Limit
Tool Angle Monitor
NOTE Following function safety can not be simulated on MotoSim EG-VRC.
Axis Speed Monitor
Tool Change Monitor
Safety Signal
• When the edited files are loaded to DX200, it is necessary to put in "SAFETY MODE",
and to disable "SAVE DATA CRC CHECK FUNC.(FSU)". After loading, please make sure
to enable "SAVE DATA CRC CHECK FUNC.(FSU)".
And, please make sure to check the settings on DX200.
7.11.1 Displaying Robot Range Limit

Display the model from the Robot Range Limit.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Function Safety] button, and
select [Safety Function File]. And. choose the [Robot Range Limit]tab.
7-53
156225-1CD 201/532
Parameter
[Robot Range Limit]
Item Description
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the
parameter is displayed.
[Add Model]
The model of selected file number is displayed. Click the vertex list
when the model is displayed, teacher model is moved to that
position.
File No.
[Delete Model]
The model of selected file number is cleared.
For those details or Editing them, please refer to "DX200 OPTIONS

Parameter INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY BOARD
OPERATION".
7-54
156225-1CD 202/532
[Robot Range Limit]
Item Description
Range Combination Range combination dialog appears, and combine the ranges.
Set the contents of Inside model or Outside/Plane model.

[Color]
Displays the Color Dialog to change the color of model.
[Opacity]
Specifies the opacity of model. The value can be set between 1.00
Model Settings and 0.00, which corresponds respectively to fully opaque and
completely transparent.
[Add All Model]
The models of all file number are displayed.
[Delete All Model]
The models of all file number are cleared.
Close Close the dialog.
 Area Combination
Creates a new area by combining two already-specified areas.
Click the [Area Combination] button, the [Range Combination] dialog is displayed.
For details, please refer to "DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION".
[Range Combination]
Item Description
Input File1 Select the input file1.
Logic Select "AND" or "OR".
Input File2 Select the input file2.
Output File Select the output file.
Combine Execute Combination.
7-55
156225-1CD 203/532
When combination is finished, the following dialog is displayed. Click the [OK] button, a new
area is written to output file. Click the [Cancel] button, a new area is not written.
When overwriting is finished, the following dialog is displayed. Click the [OK] button, a new
area model is displayed. Click the [Cancel] button, a new area model is not displayed.
7.11.2 Editing the Safety Function Data

Edit the safety function file. Following files are available. To edit the files, it is necessary to put
them into the robot folder. On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the
[Function Safety] button, and select [Safety Function File] the [Safety Function File Settings]
dialog appears.
• Robot Range Limit

• Axis Range Limit
• Axis Speed Monitor
• Speed Limit
• Tool Angle Monitor
• Tool Change Monitor
 Robot Range Limit Data

Edit the Robot Range Limit Data. Choose the {Robot Range Limit} tab. For details, please
refer to Section "7.11.1 Displaying Robot Range Limit".
7-56
156225-1CD 204/532
 Axis Range Limit Data

Edit the Axis Range Limit Data. Choose the {Axis Range Limit} tab.
Parameter
[Axis Range Limit]
Item Description
File No.

OPERATION".
7-57
156225-1CD 205/532
 Axis Speed Monitor Data

Edit the Axis Speed Monitor Data. Choose the {Axis Speed Monitor} tab.
Parameter
[Axis Speed Monitor]
Item Description
File No.

OPERATION".
7-58
156225-1CD 206/532
 Speed Limit Data

Edit the Speed Limit Data. Choose the {Speed Limit} tab.
Parameter
[Speed Limit]
Item Description
File No. parameter is displayed.
Select the Speed Limit in Teach Mode, the setting of it is available.

OPERATION".
7-59
156225-1CD 207/532
 Tool Angle Monitor Data

Edit the Tool Angle Monitor Data. Choose the {Tool Angle Monitor} tab.
Parameter
[Tool Angle Monitor]
Item Description
File No.

OPERATION".
7-60
156225-1CD 208/532
 Tool Change Monitor Data

Edit the Tool Change Monitor Data. Choose the {Tool Change Monitor} tab.
Parameter
[Tool Change Monitor]
Item Description
File No.

OPERATION".
7-61
156225-1CD 209/532
7.11.3 Displaying the Tool Interference Model

Display the tool interference model from the Tool Interference Data.
select [Tool Interference Model] the [Tool Interference] dialog appears.
Item Description
File No.
7-62
156225-1CD 210/532
Item Description
Select the data number.

[Points]
Specify the X, Y, and Z of two points.
[Radius]
Data No.
Specify the radius of sphere and cylinder.
For those details or Editing them, please refer to "DX200
OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY BOARD
OPERATION".
Display/Clear the tool interference model.

[Color]
[Opacity]
Model Settings and 0.00, which corresponds respectively to fully opaque and
completely transparent.
[Add Model]
The model of the file number is displayed.
[Delete Model]
The model of the file number is cleared.
7.11.4 Displaying the Robot Approximate Model

Display the robot approximate model from robot parameter.
select [Robot Approximate Model] the [Robot Approximate] dialog appears.
7-63
156225-1CD 211/532
Selected controller
Robot Name
Value of
[Robot Approximate Model]
Item Description
Display the approximate model.

[Color]
[Opacity]
and 0.00, which corresponds respectively to fully opaque and
Show Model completely transparent.
NOTE When the parameter does not have approximate

model, the model is not displayed.
Delete Model Clear the approximate model.
7-64
156225-1CD 212/532
8.1 Position Panel
8 Tool Functions
MotoSim EG-VRC has tools to operate and teach a robot, including functions to display the
current position and pulses of the robot; it also has functions that simplifies teaching
operations such as OLP (on-screen teaching function to teach target point) and interference
check function.
This chapter explains each function and its application.
8.1 Position Panel
The Position panel displays position data of a robot, and enables robot operation by entering
numerical values in pulses or coordinate units.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Teachingl] group, click the [Position Panel] button, the [Position
If the cell contains multiple controllers and the "Multiple Controller Dialog" mode is enable,
NOTE a separate Position panel can be displayed for each robot in the cell. Select the robot to
be displayed in the robot combobox of the toolbar before displaying the Position panel.
8-1
156225-1CD 213/532
8.1 Position Panel
Controller Name
Values units
Selected Robot
Coordinate system
reference frame
Specify each axes

value
Change the value

with these buttons
Set the step value
for the spin buttons
Position Data Panel
Item Description
The coordinate system reference frame can be selected with the

[Frame] combobox "Frame" combobox. The choice of frame available in the list may
change depending on the robot configuration.
When checked, the [Fix TCP] function is enabled. The robot TCP
[Fix TCP] checkbox position remains fixed relative to another model in the cell. Refer to
section Section "8.1.2 Fix TCP" for details.
Displays the "Select Model" dialog to change the model reference

[Set Fix TCP...] button
used by the Fix TCP function.
Displays the robot "Configuration" dialog to select a different robot

[Configuration] button configuration to reach the current position. (Refer to section Section
"8.1.3 Robot Position Configuration" for details)
When checked, the [Move Slave] function is enabled. When a robot

or station is moved, other slave robots from the same controller are
moved with it so that their TCP maintain the same relative position to
the moved robot or station.
[Move Slave] checkbox By default all robots are set as slave. The individually setting of each
robot can be changed by pressing the [...] button to display the “Set
Slave Robot” dialog.
Note that when the function is enable, if one of the robot cannot reach
the proper position, all the robots are prevented from moving.
[Close] button Closes the position data panel.
NOTE The Fix TCP section is not available when the Frame is set to "Work Angle".
8-2
156225-1CD 214/532
8.1 Position Panel
Keyboard entry
The value of an axis can be entered directly with the numeric keys. Select the desired axis
edit box, enter the new value, and then press the [Enter] key to update the robot position or
the [Tab] key to move to the next axis.
 Pulse
Displays the pulse values of the S, L, U, R, B, T axis of the robot.
 Joint
Displays the angular values of the S, L, U, R, B, T axis in angular units (degrees or radians).
 Robot
Displays the position (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz) of the robot current Tool frame (TCP) relative to the
Robot frame.
8-3
156225-1CD 215/532
8.1 Position Panel
 Base
Base frame. If the robot doesn't have any base axis, the Base frame and Robot frame
overlaps each other.
 Tool
This frame is useful to move the robot in the Tool coordinate system (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz) but
the displayed values are always "0" even though the robot moves since the reference system
and the Tool coordinate frame are the same.
 User
selected user frame. When selected, a 2nd combobox will appear next to the "Frame"
combobox to allow the selection of the user frame number. Only the defined user frame will
appear in the list. At least one user frame need to be define in order to select the User Frame
reference system.
8-4
156225-1CD 216/532
8.1 Position Panel
 Work
Displays the position (X, Y, Z, W, T, C) of the robot current Tool frame (TCP) relative to the set
Work frame. When this coordinate system is selected, the "Set Frame..." button and the
"Reverse Work Side" checkbox will appear under the axis values.
Work Frame
The Work frame is defined by three components: the frame position (or origin), the travel
direction, and the work surface. The normal of the work surface is set as the Z-axis (red
arrow) and the tool travel direction is set as the X-axis (blue arrow). The Y-axis (green arrow)
will be set perpendicular to the other two axes.
The Work angle (W) is defined by the angle between the tool and the work surface in the YZ
plane. Changing the value of "W" will rotate the tool around the Work frame X-axis. The "W"
angle is define between -90.0 and 90.0 degrees. The Reverse Work Side checkbox indicates
if the Work Angle is on the same side then the Y-axis (unchecked) or on the opposite side
(checked). If a work angle is moved over the 90.0 degree limit, the work angle side will
change and the work angle will be set back within its allowable limit.
8-5
156225-1CD 217/532
8.1 Position Panel
The Travel angle (T), also called the Push/Pull angle, is defined as the angle between the
torch and the YZ plane. When set to 0 degree, the tool is in perpendicular to the travel
direction. If "T" is positive, the tool is pushing; and if it is negative, the tool is pulling. The "C"
angle is the rotation angle around the Tool Z axis.
8-6
156225-1CD 218/532
8.1 Position Panel
8.1.1 Work Frame Setting

The Work frame can be set manually or automatically. Press the "Set Frame..." button to
display the Work Frame Set dialog and set your preferences.
Set Work Frame
Item Description
Determine which components of the Work frame are to be

automatically updated as the robot moves. Settings during
"Auto Search" section
teaching [Teach] and during playback [Play] are independently
set.
Enables the mouse picking operation.Pressing the [Shift] key

[Screen Pick Active] check box
enables or disables the "Screen Pick Active" mode.
[Close] button Closes the dialog box.
[More] or [Less] button Displays or hides the pick mode setting section.
Determine which values of the Work Frame will be changed

"Set Value For:" section
when the screen is clicked.
Determines which information for a click surface is used to set

the Travel Direction or the Work Surface.
[Normal] radio button:
The normal of the face is used.
[Edge] radio button:
The edge direction closes to the picked point is used.
"Use Face:" section Note if both the X-axis and the Z-axis are checked, the Z-
axis is set in the Edge direction.
[Point] radio button:
The direction defined by the Work frame origin and the
picked face point is used.
The [Reverse Direction] checkbox can be used to select the
opposite direction.
8-7
156225-1CD 219/532
8.1 Position Panel
Set Work Frame
Item Description
Sets the type of objects that can be selected when clicking on

"Pick Object" section
the screen. Please refer to Section "6.4 Pick Settings".
Sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked

"Pick Mode" section
area. Please refer to Section "6.4 Pick Settings".
Auto Search
MotoSimEG can automatically set the Work frame by searching from the work surface. The
tool Z-axis positive direction is searched to find the first intersecting face. The found face
intersection point and normal can be used to calculate the frame position and Z-axis. The
travel direction (or Work frame X-axis) can automatically be determined by using the robot
previous position and new position.
Each component of the Work frame can be set to automatically updated as the robot moves or
not. The settings are independently set for "Teach" and "Play" mode. By default the "Auto
Search" is active (checked) for all the components except for the "Travel Direction" in "Teach"
which tends make jogging operation of the robot difficult because the Work frame changes
after each position change.
• The Work surface search and calculation can become fairly intensive in cells with large
models made of thousand of faces and will slow down the playback animation. For
such cases, it may necessary to turn off (uncheck) the Work Surface auto search and
NOTE manually set the Z-direction.
• When the tool is close to an edge formed by multiple faces, the face with the normal
pointing upward will be selected over the other ones.
• If no surface can be found, the position is set as the tool position and the previously
found normal (Z-axis) is reused.
Manually setting the Work Frame

The Work frame components can be set manually by clicking on the screen. To control the
pick result, press the "More" button to display the Pick Setting section of the dialog. Select the
value to be set and click on the screen to change those values to those of the clicked
geometry.
Note that the "Auto Search" - "Teach" check boxes and the "Pick" - "Set Value for" check
boxes are exclusive of one another. By default, only the "Travel Direction" is checked to be
manually set by using the face point information ("Use Face: point"). Therefore, clicking on
the screen will cause travel direction (X-axis) to turn in the work surface plane to point toward
the clicked point.
8-8
156225-1CD 220/532
8.1 Position Panel
8.1.2 Fix TCP

The Fix TCP function allows fixing (or attaching) the robot TCP position relative to another
model in the cell. If the robot base or the attached model is moved, the robot changes
position so that it TCP remains in the same position relative to the specified model.
The Fix TCP function is enabled by the robot Position panel. Check the "Fix TCP" check box
to enable the function. The default model to which the TCP is attached is the world. To
change the model, press the "Set Fix TCP..." button to display the "Select Model" dialog.
This function is useful to determine the layout of a cell. For example the robot TCP can be
attached to a work piece. As the robot base or work piece are moved around during the
layout procedure, the robot automatically adjust itself to keep its TCP in the same position on
the work piece. It then becomes obvious if the work piece become out of reach, because
robot will no longer maintain its position on the work piece.
Its can also be used when teaching a robot with external axis. After the tool has been set in
position, if the robot external axis need to be changed, with the Fix TCP function enabled the
robot tool will remains in position. This avoids having to adjust the robot tool after moving the
external axis.
NOTE The function is automatically disabled if the Position panel is closed or if a job is played
back. The Fix TCP section is not available when the Frame is set to "Work Angle".
8-9
156225-1CD 221/532
8.1 Position Panel
8.1.3 Robot Position Configuration

The robot position "Configuration" dialog displays a list of different ways the robot can reach
its current position. To display the "Configuration" dialog, select {Tool} - {Teaching} - {Robot
Configuration} or from the robot "Position" panel click the "Configuration" button.
Configuration Dialog Box
Item Description
Displays the list of all available robot configurations in which the

robot can reach the current position. Changing the selected
Configuration List configuration will move the robot into the specified configuration.
The asterisk next to the index number indicates the initial
configuration of the robot.
Closes the Configuration dialog and changes the robot configuration

[OK] button
to the select one.
Closes the Configuration dialog and returns the robot to its initial
[Cancel] button
configuration.
A robot can often reach the same position in different ways. The robot resulting pulse position
will be different but the tool will be at same position (XYZ position). The robot configuration is
used to differentiate between those possibilities.
The configuration is define by six parameters:
Specifies if the B-axis rotation center is in the FRONT or the

FRONT or REAR
REAR of the S-axis rotation center.
Specifies if the elbow of the robot (angle between the lower

UP or DOWN
and upper arm) is UP or DOWN.
8-10
156225-1CD 222/532
8.1 Position Panel
DX200, DX100, FS100

: B-axis position
Specifies if the angle of the B-axis is to be positive or
negative.
FLIP: B-axis angle is greater or equal to 0°
FLIP or NO FLIP
NO FLIP: B-axis angle is small than 0°
NX100 : R-axis position
Specifies if the R axis is FLIP or NOFLIP. FLIP
position indicates an angle from -90° to 90°, 270° to
360°, or -360° to -270°.
Specifies if the S-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°

S<180 or S>=180
(within one turn) or greater (over one turn).
Specifies if the R-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°

R<180 or R>=180
(within one turn range) or greater (over one turn range).
Specifies if the S-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°

T<180 or T>=180
(within one turn range) or greater (over one turn range).
Example:
FRONT,UP,FLIP,S<180,R<180,T<180 REAR,DOWN,FLIP,S<180,R<180,T>=180
8-11
156225-1CD 223/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
8.2 I/O Monitor
The I/O Monitor allows the simulation of the input and output signals of the YIU0x unit
(DX100) or the NIO0x board of the NIF0x unit and other I/O expansion boards. It displays the
current I/O states of the controller. Input signals can be changed manually before or during
playback. Output signals maybe changed by the execution of I/O instructions during job
playback or by the virtual pendant.
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [I/O Monitor] button, the [Virtual I/O]
dialog appears.
If the cell contains multiple controllers and the "Multiple Controller Dialog" mode is enable,
NOTE a separate I/O Monitor can be displayed for each controller in the cell. Select the
controller to be displayed in the controller combobox of the toolbar before displaying the I/
O Monitor.
The I/O Monitor support the following I/O expansion boards:

DX200, DX100:
• JARCR-XOI01
• JARCR-XOI02
• JARCR-XOI03
The analog EW boards are not supported for the DX200/DX100.
FS100:
• LIO-08R (JAPMC-IO2308-E)
• LIO-09R (JAPMC-IO2309-E)
NOTE
NX100:
• JARCR-XOI01
• JARCR-XOI02
• JARCR-XOI03
• JANCD-XEW01-1
• JANCD-XEW01-2
• JANCD-XEW02
To add or remove I/O expansion board refer to section Section "11.4 Adding I/O Board
Module".
8-12
156225-1CD 224/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
8.2.1 Dedicated and General I/O

This function emulated the I/O of the YIU0x unit (DX100) or the NIO0x board of the NIF0x unit.
These I/O are found under the “Standard I/O” tab.
Comment identifying the usage of the

I/O signal pointed by the mouse.
External Input can be turned ON/OFF

by clicking on them with the mouse.
Virtual I/O
External input signals #20010 to #20057 ON/OFF status display.

The ON/OFF status can be toggled by left clicking on a signal status
IN section icon.
● (Green) : ON
● (Black) : OFF
External output signals #30010 to #30057 ON/OFF status display.

The ON/OFF status of the signals cannot be change by clicking on
OUT section them.
● (Green) : ON
● (Black) : OFF
[Set all IN-Signal] All general-purpose input (IN#0001 - IN#1024) is put into the state of
check box the compulsion input.
[Set all OUT-Signal] All general-purpose outputs (OUT#0001 - OUT#1024) are made an
check box output status.
[Close] button Closes the “Virtual I/O” window.
NOTE For the relationship between the External Input/Ouput signals and the Universal Input/
Output signal please refer to the Section "8.2.4 Inputs and Outputs".
8-13
156225-1CD 225/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
8.2.2 Expanded Digital I/O

This function emulated the expanded digital I/O of the XIO0x board. These I/O are found
under the “Expanded I/O” tab.
NOTE The expanded digital I/O board [JANCR-XOI0x] need to be added to the CMOS in order to
be displayed. Please refer to Section "11.4 Adding I/O Board Module".
Comment identifying the usage of the

I/O signal pointed by the mouse.
External Input can be turned ON/OFF

by clicking on them with the mouse.
Virtual I/O
External input signals #20060 to #20107 ON/OFF status display.

The ON/OFF status can be toggled by left clicking on a signal status
IN section icon.
● (Green) : ON
● (Black) : OFF
External output signals #30060 to #30107 ON/OFF status display.

The ON/OFF status of the signals cannot be change by clicking on
OUT section them.
● (Green) : ON
● (Black) : OFF
[Set all IN-Signal] All general-purpose input (IN#0001 - IN#1024) is put into the state of
check box the compulsion input.
[Set all OUT-Signal] All general-purpose outputs (OUT#0001 - OUT#1024) are made an
check box output status.
Close Closes the “Virtual I/O” window.
8-14
156225-1CD 226/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
NOTE For the relationship between the External Input/Ouput signals and the Universal Input/
Output signal please refer to the Section "8.2.4 Inputs and Outputs".
8.2.3 Analog I/O (EW Board)

This function emulated the analog and digital I/O of the XEWxx board. These I/O are found
under the “EW Board” tab.
• This function cannot be use in the case of DX100 controller.

NOTE • This function is enabled when the CMOS loaded from a real system contains an analog 
I/O board [JANCR-XEWxx].
For details, please refer to Section "11.4 Adding I/O Board Module".
 JANCD-XEW01-1
Buttons to turn ON/OFF signals

going to the controller.
Check this box to automatically generate

proper response to the ARCON command.
Virtual I/O
Wire Sticking Signals to the controller that the wire is sticking. (#21274)
Arc Occurence Signals to the controller that the arc is on. (#21273)
Arc Shortage Signals to the controller that the arc was extinguished. (#21272)
Wire Shortage Signals to the controller that there is a shortage of wire. (#21271)
Gaz Shortage Signals to the controller that there is a shortage of gaz. (#21270)
Search Signals to enable the search function. (#31275)
8-15
156225-1CD 227/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
Gaz Flow Signals to enable the gaz flow. (#31274)
Wire Retract Signals to retract the wire. (#31273)
Wire Inching Signals to feed the wire. (#31272)
ArcOn Signals to enable the welding arc. (#31271)
CH1 Display the analog output value of channel 1. (AOUT1)
Simulate welding
Enables the automatic simulation of the normal response from a
machine automatic
welding machine to the controller “Arc On” command.
response
 JANCD-XEW01-2
Virtual I/O
8-16
156225-1CD 228/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
 JANCD-XEW02
Virtual I/O
Buttons to turn ON/OFF signals

going to the controller.
Move the sliding bars

to send analog signals
(-14V to +14V) to the
controller.
Check this box to automatically generate

proper response to the ARCON command.
Wire Sticking Signals to the controller that the wire is sticking. (#21274)
Arc Occurence Signals to the controller that the arc is on. (#21273)
Arc Shortage Signals to the controller that the arc was extinguished. (#21272)
Wire Shortage Signals to the controller that there is a shortage of wire. (#21271)
Gaz Shortage Signals to the controller that there is a shortage of gaz. (#21270)
CH1 Slider Set the analog value send to the controller on channel 1. (AIN01)
CH2 Slider Set the analog value send to the controller on channel 2. (AIN02)
Search Signals to enable the search function. (#31275)
Gaz Flow Signals to enable the gaz flow. (#31274)
Wire Retract Signals to retract the wire. (#31273)
Wire Inching Signals to feed the wire. (#31272)
ArcOn Signals to enable the welding arc. (#31271)
Simulate welding
Enables the automatic simulation of the normal response from a
machine automatic
welding machine to the controller “Arc On” command.
response
8-17
156225-1CD 229/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
8.2.4 Inputs and Outputs

 DX200, DX100, NX100
DX200
Classification of I/O signals
Logic Name Classification Description Range
Reference with input instruction of 00010 - 05127

0xxxx General Input
the job. (4096 signals)

1xxxx General Output
Signal No. corresponding to the 20010 - 25127

2xxxx External Input
input terminal. (4096 signals)
Signal No. corresponding to the 30010 -35127

3xxxx External Output
output terminal. (4096 signals)
Signal to change the operating 40010 - 41607

4xxxx Specific Input
condition of the robot. (1280 signals)
Signal notifying the operating 50010 - 53007

5xxxx Specific Output
Interface Panel Signal notifying the operating 60010 - 60647

6xxxx
Input condition of the interface panel. (512 signals)
70010 - 79997
7xxxx Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary relay in the concurrent I/O
(7992 signals)
Monitoring of the hardware signal 80010 - 80647

80xxxx Control Status
status of the robot control section. (512 signals)
Pseudo input relay reading from 82010 - 82207

82xxxx Pseudo Input
the system parameter. (160 signals)
Input signal from thenetwork 27010 - 29567

27xxxx Network Input
device. (2048 signals)
Output signal to the network 37010 - 39567

37xxxx Network Output
1 word data (16 bits)

General Register
M000 - M559
Analog output register
M00 - M999
Mxxxx Register M560 - M599
(1000 signals)
Analog input register
M600 - M639
System Register
M650 - M999
8-18
156225-1CD 230/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
DX100

0xxxx General Input






6xxxx
70010 - 79997
(7992 signals)


82xxxx Pseudo Input



General Register
M000 - M559
M00 - M999
(1000 signals)
M600 - M639
System Register
M650 - M999
8-19
156225-1CD 231/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
NX100

0xxxx General Input






6xxxx
70010 - 79997
(79921 signals)


82xxxx Pseudo Input


M00 - M499
Mxxxx Register 1 word data (16 bits)
(500 signals)
An External Input signal (#20010 - #25127(DX200), #22567(DX100), #21287(NX100)) or

External Output signal (#30010 - #35127(DX200), #32567(DX100), #31287(NX100)) is
allocated for each I/O data of the board.
The standard NIO0x board can transmit to the controller 40 input points (5 bytes) and 40
output points (5 bytes). The first 16 I/O points are normally configured has dedicated I/O. The
dedicated I/O assignment depends on the controller selected application. The remaining I/O
points are assigned to the General I/O which corresponds to the I/O with the I/O instruction of
a job.
8-20
156225-1CD 232/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
Input Output
20010 - 20017: Dedicated Input 30010 - 30017: Dedicated Output

20020 - 20027: Dedicated Input 30020 - 30027: Dedicated Output
20030 - 20037 : General I/O (IN#001-008) 30030 - 30037 : General I/O (OUT#001-008)
In the case of a Digital I/O expansion board (JARCR-XOI01, JARCR-XOI02 or JARCR-

XOI03), the board can transmit to the controller 40 input points (5 bytes) and 40 output points
(5 bytes).
There external signals normally followsthose of the NIOxx board and are assigned to General
I/O.
Input Output
To help identify the correspondance between the I/O board signal and the controller signal,
comments for each I/O point can be added in the VRCNXMAIN.INI file under the [IO_ALLOC]
section. The comment corresponding to an I/O point is displayed in the Virtual I/O dialog
comment section when the mouse pointer is over a I/O point.
The information is entered in the following format:

LG<External I/O No.>=Comment
For example:
File:VRCNXMAIN.INI
[IO_ALLOC]
LG20030=IN0001
LG20031=IN0002
LG20032=IN0003
...
8-21
156225-1CD 233/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
 FS100
FS100

0xxxx General Input






6xxxx
70010 - 79997
(7992 signals)


82xxxx Pseudo Input



General Register
M000 - M559
M00 - M999
(1000 signals)
M600 - M639
System Register
M650 - M999
An External Input signal (#20010 - #21287) or External Output signal (#30010 - #31287) is
allocated for each I/O data of the board.
In the case of a Digital I/O expansion board (LIO-08R, LIO-09R), the board can transmit to the
controller 32 input points (4 bytes) and 32 output points (4 bytes).
8-22
156225-1CD 234/532
8.2 I/O Monitor
In regard to the first board, the configuration of the first 16 I/O points (2 bytes) is dedicated by
system. The dedicated I/O assignment depends on the controller selected application. The
remaining 16 I/O points (2 bytes) are assigned to the General I/O which corresponds to the 
I/O instruction of a job.
In regard to the subsequent board, 32 input points and 32 output points are assigned to the
General I/O.
When the board is set, the area for 48 input points and 48 output points (6 bytes) is reserved.
The first 32 points (4 bytes) are usable area, and the remaining 16 points (2 byte) are
unusable area (they are assigned to the area of the board status).
When two I/O expansion boards are set, I/O signals are as follows.
.
Input Output
20010 - 20017 : Assigned by system 30010 - 30017 : Assigned by system

20020 - 20027 : Assigned by system 30020 - 30027 : Assigned by system
20050 - 20057 : Unusable Area 30050 - 30057 : Unusable Area
To help identify the correspondence between the I/O board signal and the controller signal,
comments for each I/O point can be added under the [IO_ALLOC] section in the
"VRCNXMAIN.INI" file. The comment corresponding to an I/O point is displayed on the
comment section in the Virtual I/O dialog when the mouse pointer is over a I/O point.
The information is entered in the following format:

LG<External I/O No.>=Comment
For example:
File:VRCNXMAIN.INI
[IO_ALLOC]
LG20030=IN0001
LG20031=IN0002
LG20032=IN0003
...
8-23
156225-1CD 235/532
8.3 I/O Events
8.3 I/O Events
An I/O Event allows to monitor a specific I/O state during playback. When the I/O state
changes to a set condition, it triggers an event, which executes a model script.
For example, in a handling application, if the output #1 is used to open and close the gripper,
an event can be linked to this I/O signal in MotoSim EG-VRC to execute a model script to
change the gripper appearance to an open or close state.
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [I/O Setting] group, click the [I/O Events Maneger] button, the 
[I/O Events] dialog appears.
8.3.1 I/O Event Manager
8-24
156225-1CD 236/532
8.3 I/O Events
I/O Events Dialog Box
Item Description
List of all the I/O Events registered in the cell.

• Controller: Name of the controller.
The checkbox on the left of the controller name,
indicates if the I/O Event is enables or not. The
enable state can be changed by clicking on the
checkbox.
• I/O Signal: Displays the I/O number or I/O name of the I/O
signal being monitors. 
I/O Event list Displayed information is changed by checking or
unchecking the “Display I/O Signal Name”
checkbox.
• Condition: The event will execute when the I/O signal
changes to this condition (ON or OFF).
• Event: Description of the event that will be executed
when the I/O signal changes to the set condition.
Double-clicking on an I/O Events will display its I/O Event Property
dialog for edition.
[Display I/O Signal Name] When checked the I/O Signal column in the list displays the I/O
checkbox name instead of the I/O number.
[Add] button Displays the “I/O Event Property” dialog to create a new I/O event.
Displays the “I/O Event Property” dialog of the currently selected 

[Edit] button
I/O Event for edition.
[Delete] button Deletes the currently selected I/O Event.
[Enable All] button Enables all of the I/O Events
[Disable All]button Disables all of the I/O events.
Displays the “Model Script Editor” dialog to add or edit the model
[Script Editor]button
scripts. (For details, refer to Section "9.12 Model Script")
[Close]button Closes the I/O Events dialog.
NOTE The I/O names displayed for a I/O signals correspond to those defined in the 
VRCNXMAIN.INI file (For detail, refer to section Section "8.2.4 Inputs and Outputs")
8.3.2 I/O Event Property

The “I/O Event Property” dialog box is displayed by pressing the [Edit] or [Add] button of the 
“I/O Events” dialog box.
It allows setting the I/O Event properties such as the I/O signal, condition and event.
8-25
156225-1CD 237/532
8.3 I/O Events
“I/O Event Property” Dialog Box
Item Description
Indicates that the I/O Event will be monitored during playback when
[Enable]
checked.
Selects the controller associated with the I/O Event.

[Controller]
This field cannot be modified when editing an existing I/O Event.
Selects the controller I/O signal that will be monitored during playback.
The combobox list contains both the I/O number and I/O name, but
only one of the information will display in the box.
Displayed information is changed by checking or unchecking the
[I/O Signal] “Display I/O Name” checkbox.
The combobox list only contains the I/O signals available on the
selected controller. Changing controller selection changes the list
content.
Selects if the event will execute when the I/O signal changes to the
[Condition]
ON or OFF condition.
Enter or select the script name to be executed when the I/O signal
[Event]
changes to the set condition.
If in [Add] mode: adds a new I/O Event definition. 

[OK] button If in [Edit] mode: updates the selected I/O Event definition.
Closes the “I/O Event Property” dialog box.
[Cancel] button Closes the “I/O Event Property” dialog box.
NOTE The I/O names displayed for the I/O signals correspond to those defined in the 
VRCNXMAIN.INI file (For detail, refer to Section "8.2.4 Inputs and Outputs")
8-26
156225-1CD 238/532
8.4 I/O connection
8.4 I/O connection
The I/O connect allows to exchange I/O signals between robot controllers.
It is possible to interlock the motion of robot to set this function.
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [I/O Setting] group, click the [I/O Connection Maneger] button,
the [I/O Connections] dialog appears.
8.4.1 Management of I/O connection

Select a controller.
I/O connection list.
I/O Connection
Item Description
The robot controller can be selected.

Controller When selected the "ALL Controller", all setting can be displayed in
current cell.
8-27
156225-1CD 239/532
8.4 I/O connection
I/O Connection
Item Description
List of all the I/O connections registered in the cell.

• Controller: Name of the controller.
The checkbox on the left of the controller name,
indicates if the I/O Event is enables or not. 
The enable state can be changed by clicking on
the checkbox.
• I/O Name: Displays the I/O number or I/O name of the I/O
I/O connection list signal being input. 
Displayed information is changed by checking or
unchecking the “Display I/O Signal Name”
checkbox.
• Connection: The value of connection will be output to I/O
name signal.
Double-clicking on an I/O Connections will display its I/O
Connection Property dialog for edition.
[Display I/O Signal Name] When checked the I/O Name column in the list displays the I/O
checkbox name instead of the I/O number.
Displays the I/O Connection Setting dialog to create a new I/O

[Add] button
Connection.
Displays the I/O Connection Setting dialog of the currently selected

[Edit] button
I/O Connection for edition.
[Delete] button Deletes the currently selected I/O Connection.
[Enable All] button Enables all of the I/O Connection.
[Disable All]button Disables all of the I/O Connection.
[Close]button Closes the I/O Connection dialog.
8-28
156225-1CD 240/532
8.4 I/O connection
8.4.2 I/O Connection setting

The I/O Connect setting dialog box is displayed by pressing the [Edit] or [Add] button of the 
I/O Connection dialog box. It allows setting the I/O Connection properties such as the I/O
Name and connection.
Displayed contents of connection.
I/O Connection setting
Controller The robot controller can be selected to edit the I/O connection.
Select the controller I/O name that will be connected.

Displayed information is changed by checking or un-checking the
[Display I/O Name check] box.
Input
The combo-box list only contains the I/O Names available on the
selected controller. Changing controller selection changes the list
content.
The time can be set to delay to substitute connection for input.

Delay Timer
(Unit of time is second)
[Display I/O Signal Name] When checked the I/O Name column in the list displays the I/O
checkbox name instead of the I/O number
Displayed contents of connection by selecting the Input.

• [Oper.]: “+”,”*”, “ “ can be selected.
• [ (! ]: “!”, “(“, “!(“, “(!“, “ “ can be selected.
• [Controller]: The robot controller can be selected that will
have the output signals.
Connection
• [I/O Signal]: Displayed I/O signals as output by un-checking
the [Display I/O Signal Name] checkbox.
• [I/O Name]: Displayed I/O names as output.
• [ ) ]: “)“, “ “ can be selected. Should be set to be equal
to the number of pre brackets.
If in [Add] mode: adds a new I/O Connection definition.

[OK] button If in [Edit] mode : updates the selected I/O Connection definition.
Closes the I/O Connection Property dialog.
8-29
156225-1CD 241/532
8.4 I/O connection
I/O Connection setting
[Cancel] button Closes the I/O Connection Property dialog.
Logical expression
+ Mean OR ( ∪ ).
* Mean AND ( ∩ ).
Mean NOT. This will be used to set "make-before-break

!
contact".
( ) Mean bracket.
Procedure
1. When pushed [Add] button, displays the I/O Connection Setting dialog to create a new
I/O Connection. When pushed [Edit] button , Displays the I/O Connection Setting
dialog of the currently selected I/O Connection for edition.
2. After setting each items, and pushed [OK] button, connection will be updated.
Below is example setting, the [OUT001] of [NX100-2] will be set to the [IN001] of
[NX100-1] after 1.0 second.
(4)Delay timer(second)
(1) Select controller
example：1.00
example：NX100
(2) Input signal

example：IN0001
(3) Connection expression

example：Controller：NX100-2
I/O Name：OUT0001
 PLC setting
The PLC device can be used to set the complicated connection
“X“, “Y“, “M“ means,
- “X“ : Input signal
- “Y“ : Output signal
- “M“ : Internal register
The maximum number of each signal is 128.
8-30
156225-1CD 242/532
8.4 I/O connection
Below is example diagram to set,
N X100 P LC N X100-2
① ②
O U T0001 X0001 X0001
M 0001
O U T0002 X0002
X0002
④
Y0001 IN 0001
③
O U T0005 X 0003 X 0003 X 0004

Y0001
O U T0006 X 0004
M 0001
1. Set to substitute OUT001 of NX100 for X001 of PLC device.
Also, “OUT0002”, “OUT0005” and “OUT0006”set to substitute “X0002”, “X0003” and

“X0004” of PLC device.
8-31
156225-1CD 243/532
8.4 I/O connection
2. Set to substitute the internal register [PLCX:0001+PLC:X0002] for [PLC:M0001].
3. Set to substitute the internal register [(PLC:X0003*PLC:X0004) + PLC:M0001] for

PLC:Y0001.
8-32
156225-1CD 244/532
8.4 I/O connection
4. Finally, set to substitute PLC:Y001 for NX100-2:IN001.
The setting of example diagram is finished,
8-33
156225-1CD 245/532
8.5 Variable Monitor
8.5 Variable Monitor
Displaying and editing the robots are enabled by setting the Variable Monitor.
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Variable Monitor] button, the [Variable
Monitor] dialog appears.
Variable Monitor
Item Description
Displays the Variable Property dialog box to set the variables to be

displayed and edited.
When setting a position variable (such as P, BP, EX variables), be
sure to specify the frame (coordinate) in the FRAME combo box.
Setting of FRAME:
Variable P: When "USER" has been selected, set the user
coordinate number in the [UF#] box.
Variable BP: Enabled only when "PULSE" or "BASE" is
selected.
Variable EX: Enabled only when "PULSE" is selected.
[Add(A)] button
8-34
156225-1CD 246/532
8.6 Lap Time Panel
Variable Monitor
Item Description
Displays the Variable Property dialog box to modify the variables.

If "PULSE" is selected in the FRAME combo box when a position
[Mod(M)] button variable
(such as P, BP, EX variables) is selected in the Name combo box,
no selection can be made in the .TYPE. section.
[Del(D)] button Deletes the selected variables.
[Clear(L)] button Deletes all the variables displayed in the Variable Monitor window.
[Close(C)] button Closes the Variable Monitor window.
8.6 Lap Time Panel
The Lap Time Panel dialog box shows playback time of a specified section or the number of
stroke per minute (spm).
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Lap Time Panel] button, the [Lap Time
NOTE This function can not be used with high-speed playback function. Refer to Section "7.5.4
Refresh Interval" about high-speed playback function.
Procedure
1. Enter the following comment at the point where the lap time count is to be started.
(Note that the comment has to be entered before the start point as shown in the figure
below at "(a)".)
'PRT:LAP=START
8-35
156225-1CD 247/532
8.6 Lap Time Panel
2. Enter the following comment at the point where the lap time count is to be stopped.
(Note that the comment has to be entered after the end point as shown in the figure
below at "(b)".)
'PRT:LAP=STOP
(a) Comment to start the

Lap Time count.
(b) Comment to stop the

Lap Time count.
3. On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Lap Time Panel] button, the
[Lap Time Panel] dialog appears.
Playback time of specified

interval,
OR
The number of stroke per
minute (spm.)
Controller
li
4. Play back the job.
NOTE Controllers can not be selected during the playback.
5. After the playback, the Lap Time Panel dialog box shows the playback time between
two points specified in step 1 and 2 above, or the number of stroke per minute (spm) of
the currently selected controller.
To display the lap time of each controllers, change the robot selection in the controller
list.
6. Press to reset the value to zero in the Lap Time Panel dialog box.
8-36
156225-1CD 248/532
8.7 Stage Master
8.7 Stage Master
The Stage Master dialog allows selecting which controller will be affected by the playback
start command.
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Stage Master] button, the [Stage
Master] dialog appears.
In the Stage Master dialog, put a check mark next to the controller that will be affected by the
playback start command then press [OK] to close the dialog.
8-37
156225-1CD 249/532
8.8 Pulse Recorder
8.8 Pulse Recorder
When playback is performed with [Pulse Recorder] dialog box displayed on the screen, the
pulse position of the specified robot or the model information are displayed in the dialog box at
every screen refresh. When it needs that the model information are displayed, Check the
[Output Model Script].
When moving the cursor in the displayed list of data, if the selected data line contains pulse
information, the robots are moved to the specified pulse positions. If the selected data line
contains model information, the model script is executed.
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Pulse Recorder] button, the [Pulse
Recorder] dialog appears.
Pulse Recorder Dialog Box
Item Description
Moves the cursor to the first data line and executes it.
Move the cursor to the previous data line and executes the line.
Continuously executes the data line in the pulse record from the
cursor current position to the end of the list or until stopped.
Stops the continuous execution of the data lines started by

pressing the button.
Moves the cursor to the next data line and executes the line.
8-38
156225-1CD 250/532
8.8 Pulse Recorder
Pulse Recorder Dialog Box
Item Description
Moves the cursor to the last data line and executes it.
Output Model Script Model information is displayed in the list of pulse record.
When the pulse record is played, the robot position is set to the
Update VRC controller. If this item is "OFF", the playback gets faster because
the robot position is not reflected.
[Copy] button Copies all the data lines to the clipboard.
[Delete] button Deletes the data line where the cursor is located.
[Reset] button Deletes the all the data lines.
[Load] button Retrieves the previously saved data lines from a text file (.txt).
[Save]button Stores all the data lines in a text file (.txt).
[Close]button Closes the Pulse Recorder.
• Buttons in the Pulse Recorder dialog box can only be used after a job has been played
NOTE back.
• When the pulse record is played, the robot position is updated at refresh intervals. Refer
to Section "7.5.4 Refresh Interval"" for refresh interval.
8-39
156225-1CD 251/532
8.9 Teaching
8.9 Teaching
8.9.1 OLP
OLP is a teaching tool that simplifies the robot teaching by moving the robot to an target 
position.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching group, click the [OLP] button, the [OLP] dialog appears.
For the details on how to use OLP, refer to Section "11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function".
Name of the
operation object
Use the [Shift] key
to toggle the “Pick
Enable” checkbox
8-40
156225-1CD 252/532
8.9 Teaching
OLP dialog box
Item Description
To be selected whenever OLP is used.

[OLP Pick] check box The check box is automatically cleared when another function is
selected to operate the robot.
Determines the method to move to the target point.

[Position] check box:
The Operation Object is moved to the position (XYZ) of the target
point.
[Orientation] check box:
The Operation Object is turned to match the orientation (Rx, Ry,
Rz) of the target point frame.
[Z-Axis] check box:
The Operation Object is turned so that its Z-axis matches the Z-
axis of the target point frame.
[Use Face] section:
“Move Mode” section This setting is enable with [Orientation] or [Z-Axis] mode. It can
be use to change the direction of the Z-Axis when selecting a
face.
[Normal] radio button:
The Z-axis is in the same direction as the face normal.
[Reverse] radio button:
The Z-axis is in the opposite direction of the face normal.
If only the orientation is to be changed without

NOTE changing the position, uncheck the [Position]
checkbox before clicking any point.
Sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked area.

[Free] check box:
Point of the model at the clicked position.
[Vertex] check box:
“Pick Mode” section Nearest vertex from the clicked position.
[Center] check box:
Center of the nearest face or edge from the clicked position.
[Edge] check box:
Nearest edge point from the clicked position.
Sets the type of the object to be selected when clicking on the cell
view. (Multiple items can be selected)
[Model] check box:
Solid models.
[Frame] check box:
Model frame or AXIS6 models.
“Pick Object” section [Lines & Inters] check box:
Lines such as LINE part, WORK line and wireframe model, and
intersection lines generated by the intersection of parts or models.
[Point] check box:
Points such as TRACE points.
[Floor] check box:
FLOOR parts.
8-41
156225-1CD 253/532
8.9 Teaching
OLP dialog box
Item Description
Selects an object to be moved to the target point.

[Robot TCP] radio button:
-Sets the robot TCP as the object to move.To select the robot,
please refer to Section "7.3 Deleting a Controller".
[Move Slave] checkbox:
- When checked, the [Move Slave] function is enabled. When a
robot or station is moved, other slave robots from the same
controller are moved with it so that their TCP maintain the same
relative position to the moved robot or station. 
By default all robots are set as slave. The individually setting of
each robot can be changed by pressing the [...] button to display
the “Set Slave Robot” dialog.
[Teacher] radio button:
-Sets the “Teacher” coordinate axis as the object to move.
[Model] radio button:
-Sets the selected model as the object to move.
Model can be selected with or {Screen} - {Model} -
{SelectModel} or the [CADTree].
[XYZ] button:
-Displays the position data panel as shown below to manually
modify the position or orientation of the operation object.
“Operation Obj” section
Position dialog Teacher dialog
NOTE Refer to the dialog title bar to confirm the operation

object name.
8-42
156225-1CD 254/532
8.9 Teaching
OLP dialog box
Item Description
TUse to move the part held by the robot to a specific point (External
Reference Point).
[Active] check box:
“Move to External Ref. - When check the robot will move the point clicked on the model it
Point” section is holding to the defined external reference.
[Select Reference] button:
Displays the Select Model dialog to select a model (frame) as the
external reference point.
Use to move the base axis (servotrack) at the same time as the robot
when moving to a target point.
[Active] check box:
"Synchronous Move of
- When check the base axis will move according the set method to
Base Axis" section
enable the robot to reach the target point.
[Method...] button
-Specifies the method to move the base axis.
 OLP Function Pick Method and Display

When the mouse pointer is over the cell view, press down the left mouse button. The model
considered for selection will display in yellow with a red dot to indicate the specific point
location. In the case of a solid model, the border (edges) of the pick face will be highlighted in
green. The display will update to represent change of selection as the mouse pointer is
moved over different models. The actual selection is made only when the mouse button is
released.
Pick Point
The pick point display will change depending on the selected move mode.
Displays a point.
Position
8-43
156225-1CD 255/532
8.9 Teaching
Displays a frame (Z-axis is in red).
Orientation
Display an arrow (Z-Axis).
Z-axis
 Selecting [Position] in the "Move Mode" section: (Other items set at

default)
The robot moves so that the robot TCP overlaps with any clicked point.
Note that this motion does not involve any change in the wrist posture.
Click
8-44
156225-1CD 256/532
8.9 Teaching
 Selecting [Position] and [Orientation] in the "Move Mode" section:

(Other items set at default)
The robot moves changing its wrist's posture so that the frame of the robot TCP overlaps the
frame of the clicked point.
Click
 Selecting "Move to External Reference Point"

Click a point on a model carried by the robot and the robot will move to bring that point to the
reference point. (The reference point needs to have been set before this operation can be
used.)
Reference Model
Click
8-45
156225-1CD 257/532
8.9 Teaching
 Selecting [CurModel] in the "Operation Object" section

Click a point and the currently selected model will be move to the click location. The name of
the current model is displayed in the OLP dialog title bar.
Click
Current Model
NOTE For more details on the OLP operation, please refer to Section "11.1 Teaching Using
OLP Function".
8.9.2 Operation Handle

The operation handle is to perform robot jog operation by intuitive operation.
Drag the operation handle on the cell screen, the position of the robot is changed. So,
unskilled engineers can perform robot operation easily.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Operation Handle] group, click the [Handle Display] button, the
operation handle is displayed.
• This function is available with the following robots only.

FS100 BMDA003-A00
NOTE • During dragging operating the handle, The current position in the virtual pendant is not
changed. When releasing the mouse button, the current position in the virtual pendant is
reflected.
8-46
156225-1CD 258/532
8.9 Teaching
 Handle
Elbow handle
Turning handle
TCP handle
Axis handle
Guide line
The rotating handle is displayed on the cell view as below. To operate this handle, Move
the mouse in right and left.
NOTE
This handle is to operate the position of TCP, it displayed on the TCP

flame. The following coordinates are available to operating this handle.
• Base axis
• Robot axis
TCP handle
• Tool axis
• User axis
The TCP handle included in the control group of the current job is
colored.
This handle is to operate turning-axis. The turning handle included in

Turning handle
the control group of the current job is colored.
This handle is to operate elbow angle. The elbow handle included in

Elbow handle
the control group of the current job is colored.
When the mouse cursor is on the robot model, this handle is displayed.
Axis handle This handle is to operate each axis. The axis handle included in the
control group of the current job is colored.
This is supporting indication to make the position on the XY plane plain

Guide line
visually. The guide line is a perpendicular dashed line towards XY
plane from the TCP handle.
8-47
156225-1CD 259/532
8.9 Teaching
 Display and operating the operation handle

TCP handle
The following coordinates are available to operating TCP handle. The operating coordinate is
selected by Sync toolbar. To operate the handle, drag the handle of the direction to move.
When click the handle, the handle is displayed little bigger.
For example, to move as below, drag the green handle to right.
Drag this handle
Base axis: TCP handle always moves with posture same as a base coordinate.
8-48
156225-1CD 260/532
8.9 Teaching
Robot axis: TCP handle always moves with posture same as a robot coordinate.
Tool axis: TCP handle always moves with position and posture same as TCP.
8-49
156225-1CD 261/532
8.9 Teaching
User axis: TCP handle always moves with posture same as a selected user coordinate.
Selected user coordinate
• When select USER AXIS on the sync toolbar, the following dialog box is displayed.
8-50
156225-1CD 262/532
8.9 Teaching
Posture handle
To regulate the posture of TCP, Drag the rotating handle of the TCP handle. The operating
coordinate is selected by Sync toolbar.
For example, select TOOL AXIS on the sync toolbar and drag the rotating handle as below,
TCP posture rotates about the X-axis of TCP (the blue handle) and the robot posture is
changed.
Drag the rotating handle
When the rotating handle is dragged with BASE AXIS, ROBOT AXIS and USER AXIS,
NOTE the TCP handle is not move. But the robot posture is changed. (When operate the other
handle operation, the robot and TCP handle move.)
Turning handle
This handle is to operate turning-axis. When click the handle, the handle is displayed little
bigger.
For example, to move as below, drag the turning handle to right.
Drag the turning handle
8-51
156225-1CD 263/532
8.9 Teaching
Elbow handle
This handle is to operate elbow angle. When click the handle, the handle is displayed little
bigger.
For example, to move as below, drag the turning handle to right.
Drag the elbow handle
Axis handle
When the mouse cursor is on the robot model, this handle is displayed. This handle is to
operate each axis. Drag this handle, the corresponding axis rotates.
Drag the axis handle
8-52
156225-1CD 264/532
8.9 Teaching
 Synchronized operation
When operate the Operation handle, the selected robot and another robot can move to keep
their TCP the same relative position.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Operation Handle] group, click the [Synchronized] button, and
operate the operation handle.
For example, to move as below, drag the red handle of R1 to down, R2 moves to keep their
TCP the same relative position.
Drag this handle
8-53
156225-1CD 265/532
8.10 Collision Detection
This function displays the collision between some models.

When the collision is detected, the model is displayed in red, and the robot pulse data and the
executing job name is displayed in the collision log.
To use the Collision detection, the following settings are needed.

1. The model (work, robot, etc.) group is registered as "Collision model group".
2. To detect collision, the model group pairing is registered as "Collision pair".
3. Select the Collision pair, and start the Collision Detection.
For details, please refer to Section "11.3 Collision Detection Setting".
8.10.1 Collision Detection Dialog

In this dialog, set up to detect collision, and operate the start/end the collision detection.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Collisions] group, click the [Collision Detection] button, the
[Collision Detection] dialog appears.
3.Select the collision 1.Register the collision

pair to be used. model group.
4.Start/End the collision 2.Register the collision

detection. pair.
Reset the collision log, or

copy the collision log to
clipboard.
Collision log list
When the data need be
When the collision log is
outputted in the form of
clicked, the robot moves
tab delimited, select the
the interfering position.
[ExcelOption] on the
copy dialog.
8-54
156225-1CD 266/532
Collision Detection dialog option
Item Description
Collision Color (RED) The interfering model is displayed in red.
Playback without
To reduce the time to check collision, Redraw is skipped on playback.
Redraw
When the collision log is clicked, the robot moves the interfering
position, and the cursor location in the virtual pendant moves to the
Move Collision Step
step number position recorded in that log.
When this operation is used, set the teach mode.
When the models approach with in the selected distance, the models
Near miss check
are considered interfering.
• The function is not available for hidden model.

• Near miss check option may need time to process.
NOTE • [Playback without Redraw] and [Move Collision Step] can not use depending on the
system version of controller. Please refer to Section "A.6 List of Function depending on
the system version of controller".
8.10.2 Collision Model Group Setting

 Collision Model Group Display
The model (work, robot, etc.) group is registered as "Collision model group".
To display the Collision Model Group dialog box, click the [ModelGroup] button on the
Collision setting dialog box.
Collision Model Group

List
Item Description
The registered collision model group is displayed.

When the collision model group is selected, the models of the collision
List
model group are highlighted.
8-55
156225-1CD 267/532
Item Description
Add The new collision model group is created.
The collision model group selected in the list is edited.

Edit When the collision model group in the list is double-clicked, that can be
edited.
The new collision model group is created based on the collision model
Copy
group selected in the list.
Del The collision model group selected in the list is deleted.
Del All All collision model group selected in the list are deleted.
 Auto-registration of the collision model group

The collision model group of robot is registered automatically in following case. Edit it if
needed.
• When the new controller is created
• When the old cell (before MotoSim EG-VRC ver2.60) is opened.
• The tool model is not added. Click the [Edit] button, and add the tool model if needed.
• The time to check collision depends on the number of model and the complexity of
NOTE model.
All robot models are registered by Auto-registration. If some robot models need not be
checked, narrow down the models of the collision model group at the Collision Model
Group Detail Dialog Box.
 Collision Model Group Detail Display

The models (work, robot, etc.) are registered/deleted to the collision model group.
To display the Collision Model Group Detail dialog box, click the [Add] button, the [Edit] button,
8-56
156225-1CD 268/532
or the [Copy] button on the Collision Model Group dialog box
.
Collision Model Group Detail
Item Description
On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [Select Model]
button. Select the model in the MotoSim EG-VRC, that model is added
to the [Model List].
Pick Enable
Select the model on the CadTree, and click the [Add from CadTree]
Add from CadTree
button, that model is added to the [Model List].
8-57
156225-1CD 269/532
Collision Model Group Detail
Item Description
When the model is added, the child model of that is also registered
simultaneously.
For example, If the "SAKU" is selected in the CadTree and the [Add
from CadTree] button is clicked, the child models "SAKU1", "SAKU2",
"SAKU3", "SAKU4", "SAKU5", and "SAKU6" are also added.
("SAKU" is dummy model, so it is not added.)
A child model is also

registered
simultaneously
Del The selected model in the [Model List] is deleted.
Del All All models in the [Model List] are deleted.
8-58
156225-1CD 270/532
8.10.3 Collision Definition Setting

 Collision Definition Dialog
To detect collision, the model group pairing is registered as "Collision pair".
To display the Collision Definition dialog box, click the [Add] button, and the [Edit] button on
the Collision Detection dialog box.
Collision Detection function check if master interfere slaves. So, select one model group as
Master, and Select one or more model group(s) as Slave.
Collision model group

list
Select the model group to
check collision.
Master is only one model
groups.
Collision Definition
Item Description
The registered collision model group is displayed in the list.

When the collision model group is selected, the models of the collision
Collision model group
model group are highlighted.
list
To check the collision model group, set the Attribute items "Master" or
"Slave".
Set the robot action when collision occurs. If this is checked, playback
Playback stop by is stopped when collision is detected in playback. When the playback
collision detection is continued without interruption, do not check this, and register the
collision definition.
8-59
156225-1CD 271/532
8.11 Sensing Option Setting
When the Sensing option is used, to detect the point where the wire of robot has contact with
the work, the searching operation (Starting Point Detection function) is available.
Please refer to "INSTRUCTIONS FOR BASIC OPERATION OF STARTING POINT
DETECTION FUNCTION" of each the controller for details.
• This function can not be used for the FS100 controller.

• When this function is used, "Starting point detecting function" of option function in
maintenance mode need be checked "use".
• When this function is used, turn off the servo simulation.On the [Simulation] tab, in the
[Playback] group, click the [Servo Emulation] button.
NOTE
• Sensing function (SRCH tag of MOV* instruction) can be simulated, but sensing result is
not the real one.
• The master model of sensing gets deeply into the slave one depending on the moving
speed of sensing.
8-60
156225-1CD 272/532
Procedure
It explains the procedure for setting the sensing option between the wire of robot (Model
name: wire) and the work (Model name: work).
1. The wire (Model name: wire) is added at the torch head of robot.
In this case, the "CYLINDER" is used for the parts of wire.
2. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Settings] group, click the [Sensing Setting] button, the
[Sensing Option Setting] dialog appears.
3. Select [Master] in the [Model List] group.
8-61
156225-1CD 273/532
4. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [Select Model] button. Click the "wire"
model, "wire" is displayed at [Model].
5. Click the [Add] button, the "wire" is set to the [Master] in the [Model List] group.
6. Select [Slave] in the [Model List] group, and set the "work" to the [Slave] as Step 4 and
5.
7. Click the [OK] button.
8-62
156225-1CD 274/532
8.12 Spray Model for Paint
The Spray Model for Paint function allows creating the spray model easily. The spray model is
displayed and hidden automatically, when the SPYON or SPYOF instruction is executed.
Paint Panel
Item Description
[Gun No.] spin box

Paint gun number.
(1 to 3)
[Tool No.] spin box Specifies the tool number to set the paint gun number.
"(a)TCP distance"
Distance from the paint spray outlet (nozzle).
edit box
"(b)Valid distance"
Effective range to apply paint from the nozzle.
edit box
"(c)Max Diameter"
Maximum width of the paint spray face.
edit box
"(d)Mini Diameter"
Minimum width of the paint spray face.
edit box
"(e)Nozzle Position"
Nozzle position viewed from the flange.
edit boxes
8-63
156225-1CD 275/532
Paint Panel
Item Description
"(e)Nozzle Posture"
Nozzle posture viewed from the flange.
edit boxes
[TCP calculation] Automatically calculates tool dimensions according to the input

check box information.
[Transparent] check box Displays paint model in translucent color.
"Model division"
Number of divided paint spray faces.
combo box
[TCP distance] button Paint color from nozzle to TCP.
[Valid distance] button Paint color from nozzle to the end of the valid painting distance.
[Display model]
Displays the created spray model.
check box
Procedure
1. Select the controller for the spray model setting.
2. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Settings] group, click the [Paint Setting] button, the
[Paint Panel] dialog appears. 
Set the Gun No. and Tool No. to according to the job.
3. Click the [OK] button or the [Apply] button, and then the spray model is created.
4. When the playback is executed, the spray model related to the Gun No. of SPYON or
SPYOF instruction is displayed and hidden automatically.
NOTE This function can not used with two or more robot system.
8-64
156225-1CD 276/532
8.13 Speed Graph Function
This function displays on a graph the robot TCP speed during playback.
• This function cannot be used in conjunction with the High-Speed Playback function. For
details on the High-Speed Playback function, please refer to Section "7.5.4 Refresh
NOTE Interval" of the MotoSimEG-VRC Operation Manual.
• This function doesn't support multiple controllers or a controller with multiple robots.
• The speed displayed in this function is the speed of the TCP of the R1 robot of the
current controller selected at the time the Speed Graph dialog was displayed.
8.13.1 Basic usage

The procedure for using the Speed Graph function is as follows.
Trace Settings
Graph Settings
Playback
Graph Operations
8.13.2 Trace Settings

To display the speed in the graph, this function uses the data from the robot TCP trace.
Therefore, the Trace function must be enabled and set to the robot TCP in order to use this
function.For more details about the Trace function, please refer to Section "11.2 Trace
Function" of the MotoSimEG-VRC Operation Manual.
Procedure
1. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Trace] button, the [Trace
Manager] dialog appears. To use the speed graph, you will need to set the trace to the
TCP model: <ControllerName>-R01_tcp (example: DX100-R01_tcp). By default, the
trace <ControllerName>-trace1 is already set to the TCP of the controller's R1 robot.
8-65
156225-1CD 277/532
If it does not exist or was changed, please create a trace for the model "[controller
name]-R01_tcp".
2. To verify the settings, double-click on the trace "<ControllerName>-trace1" or select it
and press the [Edit] button. In the "Trace Property" dialog, if it not already set, select
the "<Controller_Name>-R01_tcp" model in the "Model" field.
To display the speed relative to a moving work piece, change the "Parent" field from
"world" to the model representing the work piece.
8-66
156225-1CD 278/532
8.13.3 Graph Settings

Set the graph settings before displaying the graph.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Speed Graph] button, the [Speed
Graph] dialog appears.
Press the [Settings] button to display the "Graph Settings" dialog.
If the following message displays, the settings for the current controller are not set
properly. Please verify the graph settings.
NOTE
8-67
156225-1CD 279/532
 Graph Settings Dialog

In this dialog, display parameters such as I/O signals, line color, line thickness, scale, etc. can
be set. Up to 5 I/O signals can be displayed. The same I/O signal cannot be set multiple
times.
Set the line color

Set the line thickness
Check to display
this data Open the dialog to
select the I/O signal
Check to adjust the

Y-axis scaling during
playback
Graph Settings [Graph Settings]
Item Description
Sets the rate at which the Speed Graph is updated.

Refresh Interval
(0.004 to 0.4 sec)
Speed Units Sets the speed units for the Y-axis.
Gradations Sets the number of gradation lines along the X and Y axes.
Y-axis auto-scaling When checked, the Y-axis scaling is automatically adjusted during
during playback playback to display the full range of the speed.
 I/O Signal Setting Dialog

The "I/O Signal Setting" dialog is used to select the I/O signal to plot on the speed graph.
Select between Input or Select the signal

Output signals number
8-68
156225-1CD 280/532
8.13.4 Playback
During playback, the speed is plotted on the speed graph. The graph can display up to 200.0
seconds of data. Playback data beyond 200.0 seconds will not be displayed. Also note that
graph operations cannot be done during playback.
8.13.5 Graph Operations

After playback is complete, various operations can be done with the speed graph.
Cursor (yellow line)

position
Display of robot
speed and step
number change
Copy the graph data
Display of the I/O

signals
Display the graph
settings dialog
Fit the whole playback Display of the data at

within the display area the cursor position
Mouse Operations
Move the cursor position (yellow line) to the clicked position.

Click on the graph The robot in the MotoSimEG-VRC window will also move to
the position corresponding to the cursor position.
Mouse Wheel Roll the mouse wheel to change the X-axis scaling factor.
[Ctrl] key + Mouse Wheel Roll the mouse wheel to change the Y-axis scaling factor.
Drag the bottom scrollbar to horizontally pan (X-axis) the

Drag the scrollbar
graph in the display area.
Keyboard Operations
[←] [→] keys Move the cursor position by one segment.
[Ctrl] + [←] [→] keys Move the cursor position rapidly.
[Home] key Move the cursor and the display area to X=0.0
[End] key Move the cursor and the display area to X=Max.
8-69
156225-1CD 281/532
 Graph Data Copy

When the [Copy] button from the "Speed Graph" dialog is pressed, the "Copy Data" dialog
displays. Press the [File] button to save the data to a text file. Press the [Clipboard] button to
copy the data to the Windows clipboard so that the data can be paste in another application.
8-70
156225-1CD 282/532
8.14 Running an External Software
8.14 Running an External Software
To run an external software with MotoSim EG. On the [Home] tab, in the [Tools] group, click
the [External Software] button, the [Launcher] dialog appears and perform the settings
explained in the list below.
Launcher Dialog Box
Item Description
Select [Add] to register the software to run; the Launcher Setting dialog box
appears.
Press the [Browse] button on the right of the Path edit box. Select the desired
program (executable file), and press [OK]. (The file name will be automatically
entered in the Name edit box.)
[Add] button Path name of

the external Executable file name
program to run. of the path: ".EXE"
(directly editable.)
File name opened by the software specified

in the Path edit box. (Directly editable.)
[Edit] button Edits the settings of the registered software.
[Delete] button Deletes the registered software.
8-71
156225-1CD 283/532
8.15 Job Browser
Launcher Dialog Box
Item Description
Double-click the desired software in the “Keyword” column to run the external
software.
“Keyword”
column
Double-click to run the software.
8.15 Job Browser
Job Browser supported the selection the job. Job Browser is available for the NX100, DX100
and FS100.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Teching] group, click the [Job Browser] button, the [Job Browser]
dialog appears.
 When starting Job Browser for the first time

When starting Job Browser for the first time, the bellow dialog appears. Open the Search tab
in the Job Browser, search the job, and set the job to the root of the job tree.
8-72
156225-1CD 284/532
8.15 Job Browser
 Main Window
Job Browser
Item Description
Controller Select the controller.
Job Tree tab Job Tree tab shows the job hierarchy as a tree.
Search tab Search the job in the controller on the Search tab.
Bookmark tab Bookmark tab shows the registered jobs as bookmark.
Select Job Set the selected job in the tree or list to the virtual pendant.
Close Close the Job Browser.
 Sub Window
Job information and contents are displayed at the sub window. Job Browser enables the user
8-73
156225-1CD 285/532
8.15 Job Browser
to selectively hide and display the sub window.
Sub window
Item Description
Display the contents of the selected job. The line of the Contents list can be
selected. When set the job to the virtual pendant, the cursor is set to the
Contents selected line.
Double-click the line, the job can be set to the virtual pendant. (The cursor is
set to the selected line.)
Job Info The job header of the selected job is displayed.
Name The name of selected job is displayed.
Comment The comment of selected job is displayed.
Date The date of selected job is displayed.
Group The control group of selected job is displayed.
StepNo The steps number of selected job is displayed.
8-74
156225-1CD 286/532
8.15 Job Browser
 Right-click menu
Right-click menu
Item Description
The selected job is set to the root of Job tree.

Set Selected Job to Root
The current job tree is cleared.
Add to Bookmark / Remove

The selected job is added to (removed from) the Bookmark.
from Bookmark
Job Data Update The selected job data is updated. The node is closed.
Contents Display/Hide the Contents window.
Job Info Display/Hide the Job Info window.
The Job tree is expanded from the selected

node.
During the expansion, the follow dialog box

is displayed. Do not execute the playback.
Expand
NOTE
Set the master job set in the virtual pendant to the root of Job
Set Master Job to Root
tree. If the master job is not set, The root of Job tree is not set.
8-75
156225-1CD 287/532
8.15 Job Browser
Right-click menu
Item Description
Set the current job set in the virtual pendant to the root of Job
Set Current Job to Root tree. If the current job is not set, The root of Job tree is not
set.
 Job Tree Tab

Display the hierarchy structure of jobs as tree structure. The target instructions are CALL JOB,
JUMP JOB and PSTART JOB. The tree is displayed until eight-level. And the tree can be
expanded. The root of tree is set the follow jobs.
• The selected job on the Job tree
• The selected job in the list (Search tab/Bookmark tab)
• Master job in the virtual pendant
• Current job in the virtual pendant
 Search Tab
Press the [Search] button, jobs in the virtual controller is searched and the appropriate jobs
are displayed in the list. A keyboard search is available. When the text box is empty, All jobs
8-76
156225-1CD 288/532
8.15 Job Browser
are displayed.
 Bookmark Tab
The selected job in the tree/list can be registered as bookmark.
It is useful for registering jobs with much reference number of times.
8-77
156225-1CD 289/532
9.1 Cad Tree
9 Model Editings
This chapter explains the operations for creating and editing the workpiece and tool models
using the CAD functions.
A model is generally created by combining basic figures, such as cubes and cylinders; in
addition to the general method, MotoSim EG-VRC supports the model creation by reading
HSF and HMF data.
9.1 Cad Tree
9.1.1 Outline of the Cad Tree

On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [Cad Tree] dialog
appears.
Button to Button to set

change position. model opacity. Model selection display
Note: Right-click the mouse on
Press to create this display to open the
a new model. menu for operation and
edition of the model.
Model Model
Dummy Robot (HMF,
(MDL) HSF)
Display
Hide
Select display style of a model from the combo box.

SeeAll: Displays the model and its frame.
Model Only: Displays only the model.
Frame Only: Displays only the frame.
Hide All: Hides everything.
Show Name: Add the model name to the current display setting.
Wireframe: Changes the model display mode to wireframe
*Note that in this dialog box, "frame" represents a coordinate
axis of a model.
Select display/nondisplay the child model in the Cad Tree.
+ : Displays the child model in the Cad Tree.
: Hides the child model in the Cad Tree.
*1) If a display style of a model (See, Hide, etc.) is selected in
" + " status, the model and their child models in lower layers
will be displayed in the same style.
*2) If a model is deleted in " + " status, the model and their child
models in lower layers will be deleted, except for "world",
"Teacher", and the robot models.
9-1
156225-1CD 290/532
9.1 Cad Tree
9.1.2 Tree Structure

The Cad Tree displays a column of models in a tree structure.
As shown in the following diagram, a model in the level immediately above the subject model
is the parent model of the subject model.
Parent model of "dai", "FLOOR",

"worldframe", and "H6".
world
Parent model of "work".
dai
work
FLOOR
worldframe
H6
9.1.3 Opacity Settings

To set the model opacity, select the model in the Cad Tree and set the value using the spin
button indicated in the following figure.
The maximum value of opacity is “1.00”. Decreasing the value below the maximum value
reduces the opacity, the model becomes translucent enabling to see other models through it.
If the value is set to “0”, the model becomes completely transparent and can no longer be
seen.
Spin button to specify opacity.
9-2
156225-1CD 291/532
9.1 Cad Tree
9.1.4 Teacher
"Teacher" is a tool to create a target point (coordinate) at an arbitrary position, and is
displayed as an AXIS6 frame on the screen. It simplifies the use of OLP-related function and
the relocation of parts.
To enable the Teacher, point the cursor to "Teacher" in the Cad Tree, and click on [Pos] to
display the “Position Teacher” dialog box. Specify the values in this dialog box. (For further
detail on the "Position" dialog box, please refer to Section "9.5 Positioning a Model").
(2) Select [Pos]. (1) Select "Teacher".
Set the incremental value

of the spin button .
9.1.5 Mouse-Driven Model Editing

 Right Mouse Button Operation
A pop-up menu for model editing operation appears by clicking the right mouse button at a
location where a model is displayed.
However, note that the viewpoint operation menu appears when clicking the right mouse
button where there is no model displayed or when the Cad Tree is not on the screen.
Menu for model editing.
9-3
156225-1CD 292/532
9.2 Creating a New Model
To start creating a new model, click on [Add] of the Cad Tree menu to display the Add Model
dialog box.
Procedure
1. Enter a name of the new model to be created in the Name edit box of the Add Model
dialog box. 
(By default, the model name and the model file name are the same: the model file is
created with the model name.) 
2. Click [OK] in the Add Model dialog box. 

A newly created model is displayed in the Cad Tree. (Note that new model file does
not contain any data at this point.) 
3. Double-click the new model name in the Cad Tree to edit the model. 
The file data editing dialog box (as shown below) appears; refer to Section "9.3 Editing
a Part" to edit the file data.
4. When the creation of the model is completed, click [Close] to complete the file data
editing.
9-4
156225-1CD 293/532
 Creating a Model from an Existing Model

A new model creation can be achieved not only by creating parts with the CAD function, but
also with an existing model file. In addition to those methods, a new model can also be added
with the method explained in Section "9.11 Reading a Model".
Procedure
1. Click [Add] of the Cad Tree, or select {File} - {New Model} from the right-click menu of
the Cad Tree.
2. The Add Model dialog box appears. Press the [...] button on the left of the File Name
edit box to select a file. 
3. Enter a new model name in the Name edit box of the Add Model dialog box.
4. Click [OK].
5. If the model file path doesn't correspond to the "models" folder under the cell folder, the
following dialog box will display and offer to copied model file to the "models" folder of
the cell.
If the "Yes" button is clicked and a file with the same name already exists in the cell
"models" folder. The following dialog will display to ask for overwrite confirmation.
For RWX or 3DS model format, the files will automatically be converted to HMF format.
The created HMF file will be located in the "models" folder of the cell. After the
conversion is successfully completed, the following message will display.
9-5
156225-1CD 294/532
When adding LINE data (wire frame), it is recommended to use LINE data in the HMF
format: adding LINE data in other format may take some time.
NOTE If the LINE data is in a format other than HMF, convert the LINE data with “MDL2HMF.EXE”
before adding the model. (The MDL2HMF.EXE is located in a folder where MotoSim EG-VRC
was installed).
 Creating a Dummy Model

Dummy model is a model with only the position and direction data and no modeling data
(model file). Normally, external servo track or rotation axis have a reference position that is
fixed and unchangeable (even if it is changed, it returns to the original position when opening
the cell next time).
To avoid such problem, use a dummy model: create a dummy model, then register the
external axis as a child model of the dummy model. This way, the reference position of the
external axis or rotating axis can be moved by changing the reference position of the dummy
model.
Procedure
1. Click [Add] on the Cad Tree dialog box, or select {File} - {New Model} from the right-
click menu of the Cad Tree.
2. The Add Model dialog box appears; enter a new model name in the Name edit box.
3. Check the [Dummy Model] check box.
4. Click [OK].
9-6
156225-1CD 295/532
9.3 Editing a Part
9.3 Editing a Part
MotoSim creates a model data file by combining basic figures such as cubes and cylinders:
such figures are called "parts" in this manual.
The following sections explain on how to edit the parts using the file data editing dialog box of
the Cad Tree.
9.3.1 Displaying the File Data Editing Dialog Box

In the Cad Tree, double-click the model to be edited, or select {Attribute} - {Edit File Data} to
display the file data editing dialog box as follows:
Select a part type.
Parts list.
File data editing dialog box
Item Description
Displays a dialog box to edit the part selected in [Add Parts] combo
[Add] button
box. Also displays the added part on the cell window.
Displays a dialog box to edit the part selected in the parts list.
[Edit] button
(Multiple selection is not possible.)
Deletes the part selected in the parts list.

[Delete] button
(Multiple selection is not possible.)
Changes the parent of the part selected in the parts list.

[Move Org] button
Refer to Section "9.9.1 Changing the Parent Model" for details.
9-7
156225-1CD 296/532
9.3 Editing a Part
File data editing dialog box
Item Description
Stores/Retrieves the data of the part selected in the parts list on the
clipboard.
[ClipBoard...] button
[Close] button Closes the file data editing dialog box.
9.3.2 Registering a Part

Procedure
1. Select a type of parts to be added in [Add Parts] combo box in the file data editing
dialog box.
2. Click [Add] to display the part on the cell window; the parts editing dialog box appears.
9-8
156225-1CD 297/532
9.3 Editing a Part
3. See descriptions below to edit the part in the parts editing dialog box:
• Enter the values for model size, position, etc. with the spin buttons or key-
strokes. (The incremental value of the spin buttons is specified in the Step combo
box.)
• Click [Color...] to display the Color dialog box, and specify the color.
• To move the part to an arbitrary point with the Teacher, set the Teacher to the target
position; click [Goto] in the "Teacher" section to move the part to the teacher coordi-
nate. To move the part including the posture to the teacher, check the [POSE]
check box and then click [Goto]. (For the details of the Teacher, refer to 
Section "9.1.4 Teacher".)
4. When all the settings for the model are completed in the parts editing dialog box, click
[OK] to add the part to the model data file.
5. Create a model by repeating the steps 1 to 4 to register additional parts.
9.3.3 Part Types

This section explains on how to edit the parts according to the part type.
 BOX
The BOX is a rectangular parallelepiped part, which can be edited in the BOX Edit dialog box.
• The origin of the part is the center of the BOX part model.
Origin of the part
9-9
156225-1CD 298/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 BOX2
The BOX2 is a rectangular parallelepiped part, which can be edited in the BOX2 Edit dialog
box.
• The origin of the part is the vertex of the BOX2 part model.
Origin of the part
 CYLINDER
The CYLINDER is a cylindrical part, which can be edited in the CYLINDER Edit dialog box.
• Selecting the [Straight] check box links the values of the upper and lower diameters 
("U. Diameter" and "L. Diameter", respectively).
• The value in "Number" edit box represents the number of sides to form a cylinder: the
larger the number becomes, the more perfect the cylinder becomes. Therefore, when "3"
is input, the number of side faces becomes three, forming a triangular cylinder.
• The origin of the part is the center of the CYLINDER bottom.
Origin of the part
9-10
156225-1CD 299/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 CONE2
The CONE2 is a conic part, which can be edited in the CONE2 Edit dialog box.
• The origin of the part is the center of the CONE2 bottom.
Origin of the part
 SPHERE
The SPHERE is a spherical part, which can be edited with the "SPHERE Edit" dialog box.
• The origin of the part is the center of the sphere.
Origin of the part
9-11
156225-1CD 300/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 PIPE2
The PIPE2 is a pipe part, which can be edited in the PIPE2 Edit dialog box.
• The values in "U. Thickness" and "L. Thickness" edit boxes respectively represent the
thickness of upper and bottom faces of the pipe.
• Selecting the [Straight Cylinder] check box links the upper and lower diameters ("U.
Diameter" and "L. Diameter", respectively), and the upper and bottom face thickness.
• The origin of the part is the center of the PIPE2 bottom.
Origin of the part
9-12
156225-1CD 301/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 AXIS6
The AXIS6 is a part that may contain multiple frames (position and orientation data). The
frames can be used as a target point or for external axis setting. It can be edited in the Frame
Edit dialog box.
• To add a frames, press [Insert]. The frames are added to the "Index" list box.
• To delete a frame, select the frame number in the "Index" list box, and press [Delete].
• To edit a frame, select the frame number in the "Index" list box and modify the values in
the "Position" section. The position can be displayed and modified relative to various
coordinated system depending on the "Operation" mode.
"Operation" combo box settings
"Absolute" Displays the position with reference to the model frame.
Displays the position with reference to the frame original

"Relative"
position when initially selected in the "Index" list box.
Displays the position with reference to a selected model.

"SelModel" When this mode is first selected the "Select Model" dialog
will display to allow selection of the reference model.
NOTE The frame corresponding to the selected "Index" of the list box is highlighted in red in the
main view.
Model name Coordinate system (Changes

according to the operation mode)
AXIS6 model
9-13
156225-1CD 302/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 LINE
The LINE is a part that contains multiple points. The points are links together by straight-line
segments to form a continuous line. It can be edited with the "LINE Edit" dialog box. A
minimum of 2 points must be defined for the line to display. Points can be inserted, edited or
deleted in the same manner as the "FRAME Edit" dialog box. (Please refer to the " AXIS6 "
section for details).
Point 4
Point 2
Point 1
Point 3
Point 5
Origin of the part
 LINE2
The LINE2 is a part that may contains multiple lines each made of 2 points. It can be edited
with the "LINE2 Edit" dialog box. The points with an odd index number are the starting points
and those with an even index number are the end points. The total number of defined points
must be even to display all the segments. Points can be inserted, edited or deleted in the
same manner as the "FRAME Edit" dialog box. (Please refer to the " AXIS6 " section for
details).
Start
Point 2 Point 3
End
Point 1
Start Point 4
End
Origin of the part
9-14
156225-1CD 303/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 CUBE
The CUBE is a polyhedron part, which can be edited in the CUBE Edit dialog box.
• When a CUBE model is added, a model with four points appears on the screen, with the
four points already registered in the CUBE Edit dialog box as shown below.
• The apex of the figure at the bottom is registered as a point from No. 1, the point in the
height direction is the last registered point in the model file form. 
The points at the apex of the bottom figure are arranged as follows:
-When the height is set to Z-axis positive (+) direction: counterclockwise to Z-axis
positive (+) direction.
-When the height is set to Z-axis negavite (-) direction: clockwise to Z-axis positive
(+) direction.
Z-axis
Point 4
100
Point 2 100 Point 1
X-axis
Y-axis
100
Point 3
 FLOOR
The FLOOR is a floor part, which can be edited in the FLOOR Edit dialog box.
• The values "X Num" and "Y Num" edit boxes respectively represent the numbers of
dividing lines that divide the face in the X-direction and Y-direction.
• The origin of the part is the center of the FLOOR model.
Origin of the part
9-15
156225-1CD 304/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 FACE
The FACE is a face part, which can be edited in the Face Edit dialog box.
• Register apexes to create faces. 

Several faces can be created in one FACE part, however, there must be three or more
points to create each face. If the points are not in the same plane, the face will be divided
into some triangles. Therefore, unless these points are clearly on the same plane, create
the FACE with units of three points.
Point 1
Point 5
FACE 1 Point 7 Point 6

Point 8
Point 2
Point 3 FACE 2
FACE 3
Point 4
Point 9
Procedure
1. Select the [Pickup ON] check box. 
(Clear the check box to change the viewpoint on the screen.)
2. Click the points 1, 2 and 3 as shown in the above figure. 

The frame of the clicked point is displayed in "Vertex List" box. Click [Add Face>>] to
create the FACE 1 defined by three points.
3. Click the points 4 to 6, and click [Add FACE>>] to create FACE 2.
4. Click the points 7 to 9, and click [Add FACE>>] to create FACE 3.
9-16
156225-1CD 305/532
9.3 Editing a Part
 “Teacher” Section of the Parts Editing Dialog Box

The parts BOX, CYLINDER, CONE2, PIPE2, AXIS6, SPHERE, LINE, LINE2 can be relocated
by using the "Teacher" section of each editing dialog box.
When using the Teacher, it has to be previously set: refer to Section "9.1.4 Teacher" for
details.
“Teacher” section of the parts editing dialog box
Item Description
[Goto] button Moves the part to the Teacher position.
[POSE] check box Moves the part including the posture to the Teacher position.
9-17
156225-1CD 306/532
9.4 Editing a Model
9.4 Editing a Model
A model can be cut, copied, pasted, etc. with commands under {Edit} of the Cad Tree.
Select a model from the Cad Tree, and edit the model with the commands described below:
 Cut
Cuts the selected model.
 Copy
Copies the selected model.
 Paste
Pastes the cut or copied model in an arbitrary place.
When selecting {Copy} - {Paste} within the same cell, enter the model name to be copied.
 Delete
Deletes the selected model. However, the model file will not be deleted though the model is
deleted from the Cad Tree and the cell window.
When deleting the currently selected model including its child models are to be deleted, set
the display/nondisplay status ( + or ) on the left of the model name to + in the Cad Tree,
then select [Delete]. Note, however, that the "world", "Teacher", and robot model will not be
deleted even if they are in the + status.
 Add
Creates a new model.
Refer to Section "9.2 Creating a New Model" for details.
 Rename
Changes the model name.
Note, however, that the names of "world", "Teacher", and the robot model names cannot be
changed.
9-18
156225-1CD 307/532
9.4 Editing a Model
 Property
Specifies opacity, scale, and model type. (The command {Property} is located under
{Attribute}.)
Property dialog box
Item Description
[Opacity] edit box Specifies the opacity of the model.
[Scale] edit box Specifies the scale of the model.
[Model Type] edit box Specifies a character string in the model.
Set up whether the back plane of CAD data is shown or hidden.

When the back plane is shown, the CAD data is displayed according to
that data.
When the back plane is hidden, display speed is faster.
[Back Plane Culling]
check box When the back plane is hidden, some parts of the CAD
NOTE data may be lost.
When the CAD data need be displayed collect, check off
the Back Plane Culling.
[OK] button Applies the modifications, and closes the Property dialog box.
[Cancel] button Closes the Property dialog box without applying the modifications.
9-19
156225-1CD 308/532
9.5 Positioning a Model
Position a model by specifying the values in the Position dialog box.

To display the Position dialog box, click on [Pos] button or select {Attribute} - {Set Position}
menu item of the Cad Tree.
Set the incremental value of

The spin button
Position dialog box
Item Description
“Absolute”
Displays the position with reference to the parent model, and
moves the model.
“Relative”
Displays the position with reference to the selected model, and
"Operation" combo box
moves the model.
“SelModel”
Displays the Select Object dialog box; displays the position with
reference to the model specified in the Select Object dialog box,
and moves the model.
9-20
156225-1CD 309/532
Position dialog box
Item Description
Allows to store or retrieve the data of the Position dialog box in the
clipboard.
[matrix] button
Move the model to the Teacher current position.

[Goto] button
Moves the model to the Teacher position.
[POSE] check box
“Teacher” section
When checked and the [Goto] button is used, the model also
moves to match the Teacher orientation.
When using the Teacher, it has to be previously set: refer to Section
"9.1.4 Teacher" for details.
[Enable] check box

Enables the mouse picking operation. 
Pressing the [Shift] key enables or disables the "Pick Enable"
mode.
“Pick” section [Pick two points] check box
The chosen model is parallel-shifted so that the specified point of
the model may unite with the pick position of the 2nd point.
[Settings >>] or [<< Settings] buttons
Displays or hides the pick setting section.
Determines the method to move to the picked point.

[Position] check box
The model is moved to the position (XYZ) of the picked point.
[Orientation] check box
The model is turned to match the orientation (Rx, Ry, Rz) of the
picked point frame.
“Move Mode” section
[Axis] check box
The model axis specified in the combobox is turned so that it
matches the picked face normal.
[Reverse] check box
This setting is enable with [Orientation] or [Axis] mode. It can be
use to change the direction of the picked face normal.
Sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked area.

“Pick Mode” section
Please refer to " Pick Mode Setting " for details.
Sets the type of the object to be selected when clicking on the cell
“Pick Object” section view. (Multiple items can be selected)
Please refer to " Pick Object Setting " for details.
[OK] button Applies the modifications, and closes the Position dialog box.
9-21
156225-1CD 310/532
Position dialog box
Item Description
[Cancel] button Closes the Position dialog box without applying the modifications.
The operating procedure of a two-point pick is explained concretely below.

1. With the first pick, the point to align is specified.
First pick
2. With the second pick, the movement place is specified.
Second pick
3. The point specified as the first point moves to the position of the second point.
9-22
156225-1CD 311/532
9.6 Editing Multiple Models (Model List)
9.6 Editing Multiple Models (Model List)
Multiple models can be edited in the Model List dialog box. To open the dialog box, select
{Edit} - {Models List} of the Cad Tree right-click menu.
Model selection list box
Model List dialog box
Item Description
Displays the models registered in the cell.

Model selection list box
The selected models are highlighted. (Multiple selection is possible.)
Deletes the models selected in the model selection list box. The
[Delete] button models on the cell window are also deleted, however, their model files
still exist.
Changes the parents of the models selected in the model selection list
[Change Parent] button box.
Refer to Section "9.9.1 Changing the Parent Model" for details.
Moves the parents of the models selected in the model selection list
[Move Parent] button box.
Refer to Section "9.9.2 Moving the Parent Model" for details.
[Close] button Closes the Model List dialog box.
9-23
156225-1CD 312/532
9.7 Searching a Model
9.7 Searching a Model
Search for a desired model with the Find dialog box. To open the dialog box, select {Edit} -
{Find} from the Cad Tree right-click menu.
If the entered name exists, the model is selected in the Cad Tree.
Enter the model name.
9-24
156225-1CD 313/532
9.8 Saving and Reading a Model Group
A model and its parent-child relevant information can be saved as a set.

This can be done by creating a folder under [cell folder name\models] and naming it with the
same name as the subject model, then by saving the following files in the new folder:
• The parent-child relevant information of the model (ModelInfo.dat).
• Subject model and its all the child models (*.mdl, *.hsf).
 Saving a Model Group

Procedure
1. Select a model with the status symbol (on the left of the selected model name) in the
Cad Tree set to + .
2. Select {Edit} - {Save Model Group] from the Cad Tree right-click menu. 
Select [Yes] to create a folder with the same name as the model selected in the step 1.
The files of the model (selected in the step 1) and its child models are copied to the
folder, and a parent-child relevant information file "ModelInfo.dat" is generated.
9-25
156225-1CD 314/532
 Reading a Model Group

Select {Edit} - {Load Model Group] from the Cad Tree right-click menu. Select a
“ModelInfo.dat” file to read the saved model including its child models.
NOTE If there is a model with the same name in the current cell, the second one will automatically be
numbered. (The number will be added after the name.)
 Syntax of the ModelInfo.dat

MODEL
{
NAME=Camera_Dummy //Logical name of the model
PARENT=world //Parent model name
FILENAME=dummy //File name
COLOR=RGB (0,0,255) //Color of the model
HIDESEE=1 //Display/nondisplay information
OPACITY=0.25 //Opacity
AXIS6=4000.000,5500.000,2000.000,-1.57,0.00,-0.35 // Position of the model
}
9-26
156225-1CD 315/532
9.9 Changing and Moving the Parent Model
9.9 Changing and Moving the Parent Model
9.9.1 Changing the Parent Model

The parent model of an arbitrary model can be changed with {Parent Change} under
{Attribute} of the Cad Tree menu.
With this function, the relation (coordinate) between the selected model and its parent model
is automatically changed, and the model position does not change. Use this function in case
of changing the parent model while keeping the model in the same position.
To use this function, select the desired model in the Cad Tree, then select {Attribute} - {Parent
Change} from the Cad Tree right-click menu.
9.9.2 Moving the Parent Model

The parent model of an arbitrary model can be moved with {Parent Move} under {Attribute} of
the Cad Tree menu.
Since the relation (coordinate) between the selected model and its parent model does not
change with this function, the selected model position changes when it is moved to its new
parent model with {Parent Move}.
To use this function, select the desired model in the Cad Tree, then select {Attribute} - {Parent
Move} from the Cad Tree right-click menu.
9-27
156225-1CD 316/532
9.10 Changing a Model File
9.10 Changing a Model File
The model file of an existing model can be changed with {ChangeFilePath} under {Attribute} of
the Cad Tree menu.
To use this function, select a model to be changed in the Cad Tree, then select {Attribute} -
{ChangeFilePath} from the Cad Tree menu. Select the desired model file in a file selection
dialog box to change the model file.
Note that the change will only take effect the next time the cell is open.
NOTE The model files for "world", "Teacher", and robot models cannot be changed.
9-28
156225-1CD 317/532
9.11 Reading a Model
A model appears on the cell by dragging and dropping its model file (in the HSF, HMF, MDL,
3DS, or RWX format) to the cell window, and the model file is copied to the "models" folder.
In this operation, a parent model can also be selected.
Drag and drop.
Model displayed on the cell.
Procedure
1. Drag and drop an arbitrary model to the cell window; If the model file path doesn't
correspond to the "models" folder under the cell folder, the following dialog box will
display and offer to copied model file to the "models" folder of the cell.
If the "Yes" button is clicked and a file with the same name already exists in the cell
"models" folder. The following dialog will display to ask for overwrite confirmation.
9-29
156225-1CD 318/532
For RWX or 3DS model format, the files will automatically be converted to HMF format.
The created HMF file will be located in the "models" folder of the cell. After the
conversion is successfully completed, the following message will display.
2. The Select Model Parent dialog will display. Select the model that will become the par-
ent of the new model and press the [OK] button. (By default the "world" model is
selected.)
When adding LINE data (wire frame), it is recommended to use LINE data in the HMF
format: adding LINE data in other format may take some time.
NOTE If the LINE data is in a format other than HMF, convert the LINE data with “MDL2HMF.EXE”
before adding the model. (The MDL2HMF.EXE is located in a folder where MotoSim EG-VRC
was installed).
9-30
156225-1CD 319/532
9.12 Model Script
9.12 Model Script
Model script allows manipulate models by the execution of a series of model commands. The
model script editor allows to write and manage the model script of the specified controller.
The model script can be executed from the Model Script Editor or from an I/O Event during
playback. (For details on I/O Events refer to section Section "8.3 I/O Events").
9.12.1 Model Script Editor

To display the Model Script Editor select {Model} - {Model Script Editor} from the main menu.
Model Script Editor Dialog Box
Item Description
Controller Select the controller for which the scripts are to be edited.
Displays the list of scripts for the selected controller.

Script List Select a script to display/edit its content in the right section of the
dialog.
Displays the name of the selected script. 

Script The script content in displayed in edit box below where the model
commands can be added or modified.
9-31
156225-1CD 320/532
9.12 Model Script
Item Description
Adds a new script to the list.

[Add] button A dialog will display to enter the script name. Enter a name and
press OK. The new script will be added to the list.
[Delete] button Deletes the script currently selected in the script list.
Save the script content to file.

[Save]button Note: Scripts are saved to the “ModelScript.txt” file under each
controller folder.
[Run]button Execute the script selected.
[Close]button Closes the Model Script Editor dialog.
9.12.2 Model Commands

Model commands can be used in model script to manipulate models in the cell. Note that
model names are case sensitive. Make sure that the names are typed exactly like the name
of the model appearing in the Cad Tree.
 Model Display
Notation SEE M1
Meaning Displays the model M1.
 Model Non-display
Notation HID M1
Meaning Hides the model M1.
 Model Move 1 (Set Model Parent)

Notation MOV M1 M2
Moves the model M1 in the Cad Tree to change its parent to M2. Without
Meaning changing the model location on the display, the model relative position
from its new parent (M2) is changed automatically.
 Model Move 2
Notation AXIS6 M1=10,20,30,0,0,0
Moves the model M1. The position from the parent is changed to
Meaning
(10,20,30,0,0,0).
9-32
156225-1CD 321/532
9.12 Model Script
 Model Move 3
Notation ADDX6 M1=10,20,30,0,0,0
Moves the model M1. The position from the parent is changed by adding
Meaning
(10,20,30,0,0,0) to the current position.
 Model Copy 1
Notation DUP M1 M2
Meaning Copies (duplicates) the model M1 to create M2.
If MotoSim EG-VRC is saved without deleting the copied model, the

description (information on arrangement, etc.) is written in to the cell.
Note
The copied model will reference the same model data file (.mdl) as the
original model.
 Model Copy 2
Notation REF M1 M2
Meaning Copies (references) the model M1 to create M2.
Even if MotoSim EG is saved without deleting the copied model, the

Note
description (information on arrangement, etc.) is not written in to the cell.
 Model Deletion
Notation DEL M1
Meaning Deletes the model M1.
9-33
156225-1CD 322/532
9.12 Model Script
9.12.3 Display of script input assistance

As for the script, the edit that uses the manual edit and the “Script input assistance” dialog box
can be done.
The “Script input assistance” dialog box opens when the line edited in the “Model Script
Editor” dialog box is double-clicked.
Item Description
The model instruction is selected. (The input item changes by the

Model instruction selected model instruction. )Please refer to the explanation of the
following each model instructions for details.
The edited model instruction is added to a selected line. (Former

[Add] button
model instruction moves below by one line. )
[Change] button A selected line is changed by the edited model instruction.
The script input assistance is closed without changing the edited

[Cancel]button
content.
It explains the input item of each model instruction.
The model's display (SEE), the model's non-display (HID), and the model's deletion (DEL)
The [model] is input.
The [model] is input by either the selection with the direct input or Cad Tree or .
The model name is

input.
9-34
156225-1CD 323/532
9.12 Model Script
 The model's movement 1(MOV), the model's copy 1(DUP), and the model's copy 2(REF)
[Model1] and [Model2] are input.
The [Model] is input by either the selection with the direct input or Cad Tree or .
Model 1 and model 2

are input.
 The model's movement 2(AXIS6) and the model's movement 3(ADDX)

The [Model] and the [Position] are input.
The [Model] is input by either the selection with the direct input or Cad Tree or .
The position is input either with the direct input or of each item. The incremental value
of is set by [Step].
The Model is input.
The Position is input.
Set the incremental value of the
spin button
9-35
156225-1CD 324/532
9.13 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option>
NOTE To use this function (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is required. (The
MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EG-VRC.)
Loads the following CAD data format to the cell directly.

• IGES
• STEP
• Inventor
• ProE
• Solidworks
• CATIA V5
• SAT
And, when loading the data to cell, the following format is specified.
• HSF
• SAT
This function is accessible by:
a)The Add Model dialog of the [Cad Tree]
(For details, please refer to section " Creating a Model from an Existing Model ".)
b)Dragging and dropping the file over the cell display area.
(For details, please refer to section Section "9.11 Reading a Model".)
When adding a model with method a) Add Model dialog, it is necessary to select "All (*.*)"
NOTE in the "File Type" section, in order to display all the file types and be able to select the
IGES or SAT files.
 CAD Data Import

Before importing CAD data, the "CAD Import" dialog will display. The healing settings in the
dialog can be changed if required. (This dialog doesn't display when importing SAT file.)
To change the default settings related to the CAD Import, please refer to section Section "10.6
CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option>".
9-36
156225-1CD 325/532
The figure below shows, the "CAD

Import" dialog when the IGES data
healing is disabled. 
This is the default setting.
The "CAD Import" dialog with the IGES

data healing enabled.
CAD Import
When enabled, a healing algorithm is applied to the imported CAD data.

[Recreate surface] check box
The [Recreate surface] option is normally selected.
The [Recreate surface] is part of the normal healing process. If it is
unselected, this step will be skipped in the healing process.
“Enable
If the surface regeneration doesn't give the intended results, unselect
Healing” section
the "Recreate Surface" may improve the healing results.
[Disable on error] check box
The [Disable on error] option is normally selected.
When the [Disable on error] is selected, the healing will be disabled if
an error occurs during the healing process.
Select this type when the model applies a CAM function. Do not select this
Imports the type when the model is tool or peripheral equipment.
work file for
General CAD data are displayed in the CadTree dialog, and the model
CAM teaching
for CAM teaching are displayed .
9-37
156225-1CD 326/532
CAD Import
If checked, the "IGES Import" dialog will no longer be displayed when an

[Don't show this
IGES file is imported. The "IGES Import" dialog display can be re-enable in
dialog next time]
the "Option Setting" dialog under the "CAD Import/Export" tab. Please
check box
refer to section Section "10.6 CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option>".
[OK]button The IGES file import will proceed with the options set in the dialog.
[Cancel]button Cancel the IGES file import
The healing process attempts to repair any corrupted data of the imported CAD files.
However, the processing time to import a file may increase significantly when healing is used.
NOTE The performance may also vary depending on the extent and nature of the errors in the
original CAD file. In some cases, result with healing may be worst than reading the file without
healing.
9-38
156225-1CD 327/532
9.14 Changing the Coordinate Origin of CAD Data <CADPack Option>
9.14 Changing the Coordinate Origin of CAD Data

<CADPack Option>
Change the coordinate origin of external CAD data.

After [Cad Tree] is displayed, right-click on the work to change the coordinate origin and select
the [set Originpos] menu. Then the [Origin Point] dialog is displayed, change the value of
position.
NOTE This function is available with the following format of external CAD Data.
CATIA, SOLIDWORKS, Pro/E, INVENTOR, IGES, STEP, SAT
It is possible to change the coordinate origin of external CAD data as follows.
9-39
156225-1CD 328/532
9.15 CAD Data Export
When IGES or SAT data are exported (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack
NOTE is required. (The MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EG-
VRC.)
Exports in IGES,SAT or HSF format the data of multiple models with their relative position
from a selected base point.
 Export
Before the CAD data of IGES or SAT format is exported, the "Export" dialog is displayed. The
export settings in the dialog can be changed if required.
To change the default settings related to the export, please refer to section Section "10.6 CAD
Import/Export <CadPack Option>".
NOTE The settings selected in the "Export" dialog will not change the settings in the "Option
Setting" dialog under the "CAD Import/Export" tab.
Export
[Units] radio button Sets the measuring units of the exported SAT or IGES files.
“Version (SAT Only)” Sets the SAT file version used in the exported file.Recommended
section value: 6 (Setting range: 4 to 16)
9-40
156225-1CD 329/532
Export
If checked, the "IGES Import" dialog will no longer be displayed

[Don't show this when an IGES file is imported. The "IGES Import" dialog display can
dialog next time] be re-enable in the "Option Setting" dialog under the "CAD Import/
check box Export" tab. Please refer to section Section "10.6 CAD Import/
Export <CadPack Option>".
[OK]button The CAD export will proceed with the options set in the dialog.
[Cancel]button Cancel the CAD export.
Procedure
1. Select in the Cad Tree the models to export.
• To select a single model:
Expand the model node so that there is no "+" icon on the left of the model name
and select the model.
The “SAT1” model will be

exported.
• To select multiple models

Collapse the node containing the desired models so that there is a "+" icon on the
left of the model name. All the child models in the collapsed branch will also be
exported.
The child “SAT1” and “SAT2” model of

the “POS” model will be exported.
9-41
156225-1CD 330/532
Only the model referring to

• IGES,SAT or HSF format files;
NOTE • .mdl files composed of BOX, BOX2, CYLINDER, CONE2, SPHERE, PIPE2, AXIS6,
LINE, LINE2 parts;
can be exported. When selecting multiple models, at least one of the selected models
must make reference to such CAD file.
2. Right click on the CadTree to display the popup menu. Then select "Export CAD
File..."
3. In "Select Base Model" dialog, select the model to be used as the base point (origin) of
the exported model and press the [OK] button.

4. In the "Save As" dialog, select the file type (IGES,SAT or HSF). Enter a filename and
press the [Save] button.
9-42
156225-1CD 331/532
5. If the "Export" dialog is set to display, the "Export" dialog will display to confirm the
IGES/SAT export settings. Change the settings as required, and then press [OK]. For
more details please refer to the " Export " section above.

6. When the export is completed the following message will display.
9-43
156225-1CD 332/532
10.1 Graphical Settings
10 Configuration Settings
Various configuration settings can be made in the Option Setting dialog box.
Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Options] menu.
For the graphical settings, select the “Graphic” tab of the Option Setting dialog box.
Graphic tab
Item Description
[Reset] button Restores all the values to the default setting.
[OK] button Applies the modifications, and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] button Closes the dialog box without applying the modifications.
10-1
156225-1CD 333/532
10.1.1 Background Color

Specify the background color of the cell window in the “Background Color” section.
Item Description
"Top" color Displays the current color of the upper part of the background.
indication box Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select the desired color.
"Bottom" color Displays the current color of the bottom part of the background.
indication box Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select the desired color.
[Same Color] Check this check box to set the “Bottom” background color to the same
check box color as the “Top” background.
10.1.2 Smooth Transition

Specify if a smooth transition is executed when changing viewpoint in the “Smooth Transition”
section.
Item Description
Select to execute the smooth transition function when changing the

[Execute] check box
viewpoint.
Specify the duration of the smooth transition. (Editable when the

"Duration" edit box
[Execute] check box is selected.)
10.1.3 Display
Configure the graphic driver in the "Display" section.
Item Description
Select a graphic driver from the list: "OpenGL" is selected by default.

The graphic drivers currently available are "OpenGL" and "WinGDI".
"Driver" combo box

NOTE To apply the change of graphic driver, reload the cell.
Displays the coordinate axis below on the lower left of the cell window.
[Axis Triad On]
check box
[Perspective]
Check this check box to display the cell in perspective.
check box
10-2
156225-1CD 334/532
10.1.4 Shadow
Set the following items for shadow display in the “Shadow” section.
Item Description
[Show] check box Select to display shadows on the cell window.
Displays the current color of the shadows.

"Color" indication box Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select a desired color.
(The [color] button is enabled when the [Show] check box is selected.)
Enter the resolution value.

"Resolution" edit box
(Editable when the [Show] check box is selected.)
Enter the value for the gradation effect.

"Blurring" edit box
(Editable when the [Show] check box is selected.)
10.1.5 Frame & AXIS6

Specify the Frame and Axis6 display property.
Item Description
“Frame Length” spin

Enter the value of the frame and Axis6 length with the spin button.
box
"Always Display Axis6

When checked, the Axis6 are displayed in front of all the other parts.
in Front" checkbox
Regular Display Axis6 Displayed in Front
10.1.6 Level of Detail

When changing the scene viewpoint or during playback the level of detail can be decrease in
order to obtain a smoother animation. This function is useful to improve display performance
10-3
156225-1CD 335/532
of cell containing a large amount of data such as very detailed HSF model.
Item Description
When this item is checked, the level of detail will be reduced during
viewpoint change and playback. The level of detail data will also be
generated for the HSF models when required.
• When the function is enabled, a message offers to

generate the level of detail data for the currently
Enable opened cell. If the data was previously generated for
NOTE this cell, it is not necessary to regenerate the data and
you may press "Cancel".
• The generation of the level of detail data may take
some time depending on the size of the model file.
• When the displayed surface becomes rougher during viewpoint change or playback,
NOTE depending on the data some model elements may not display.
• It is easier to distinguish the discrepancies between levels of detail when displaying the
cell in "Flat Shading" (refer to Section "6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode").
Displayed surface
become rough
 Generating the Level of Detail Data

When the Level of Detail function is enabled, the level of detail data need to be generate for
10-4
156225-1CD 336/532
the function to work properly. If an opened cell doesn't contain the level of detail data, a
message will prompt the user to confirm that the data should be generated at this time.
While generating the level of detail data, the "Generating Level of Detail" dialog will display the
generation progress. To stop the data generation, click on the "Abort" button. Note that when
aborting the generation, the current file processing will continue until completed, and then the
generation will stop and data for the remaining file will not be created
.
When adding HSF model and the Level of Detail is enable, the level of detail data will
automatically be generated for the new model. The "Generating Level of Detail" progress
dialog will display but the process cannot be aborted.
10-5
156225-1CD 337/532
10.2 Markup Settings
To configure the lines and texts on the cell window, select the "Mark Up" tab of the Option
Setting dialog box.
Mark Up tab
Item Description
"Color" indication box

Displays the current color of the markup object (line and text).
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select the desired
"Mark up" section color.
"Thickness" spin box

Directly enter the value or specify the value with the spin button to
specify the thickness of the markup line.
10-6
156225-1CD 338/532
Mark Up tab
Item Description
"Font Name" combo box

Select a desired font for the text.
NOTE When using two-byte characters for the text, make sure
to select a font which can be displayed properly.
"Text" section
"Size (pts.)" edit box
Specify the size of the font.
"Back Color" indication box
The color indication box displays the current markup text background
color.
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box. And select the desired
background color.
10-7
156225-1CD 339/532
10.3 Robot Option Settings
When a robot axis reaches its limit position, the color of the axis changes.
Robot Option tab
Item Description
[Execute in Teach] check box

Select to display the axis reaching its limit in a reverse color or a limit
color in a teaching operation.
[Execute in Play] check box

Select to display the axis reaching its limit in a reverse color or a limit
color in a playback operation.
First
"Limit Value (%)" edit box
Directly enter the value to specify the limit value for the first limit
axis check.
"Pulse limit warning"
section "Limit Color" indicaiton box
Displays the current first limit color. Press [color] to display the Color
dialog box, and select the desired color.
Second
"Limit Value (%)" edit box
Directly enter the value to specify the limit value for the second limit
axis check.
"Limit Color" indicaiton box

Displays the current second limit color. Press [color] to display the
Color dialog box, and select the desired color.
10-8
156225-1CD 340/532
Robot Option tab
Item Description
When this item is checked, the job playback animation is stored in

memory. After the playback, the animation can then be exported in HSF
file format.
• When the job is executed, click the button.

(If the click the [PLAY] button on the virtual pendant,
"Playback
Animation" section the playback animation is not included.)
NOTE • The playback animation file does not support any
model color change the may occur during playback
(such as collision detection, limit warning... ).
• For the file export operation, please refer to the
Section "4.6.1 Playback animation file export".
When enabled MotoSim EG-VRC will display a separate copy of

controller related dialog or panel for each controller in the cell. When a
dialog is initially displayed, it is set to the currently selected controller.
"Multiple Controller
Once displayed the dialog will always display the information for the same
Dialog" section
controller, even if the current controller is changed. To display multiple
copy of a same dialog, display a first copy of the dialog, then change the
current controller and display the dialog again.
10-9
156225-1CD 341/532
10.4 Language and Unit Settings
10.4 Language and Unit Settings
To configure the language and unit, select the "Lang / Unit" tab of the Option Setting dialog
box.
Lang / Unit tab
Item Description
Select the [Japanese] or [English] radio button to configure the language.

"Language" section
To set from the main menu, select {View} - {English} or {Japanese}.
Select the units for each type of values.

"Length/Position" edit box
Indicates the unit of the length.
"Unit Settings"
section "Angle" edit box
Indicates the unit of the angle.
"Weight" edit box
Indicates the unit of the weight.
10-10
156225-1CD 342/532
10.5 Performance Settings
10.5 Performance Settings
To configure the performance, the "Performance" tab of the Option Setting dialog box.
Performance tab
Item Description
"None" radio button

All model data are displayed.
"Culling Threshold" radio button
Model data which displayed size is smaller than the
selected pixel on the display are not displayed.
"Framerate Optimization"
section
If the threshold is large, performance is
NOTE improved. But, if the threshold is overlarge, the
necessary model data are not displayed. Set up
the threshold in accordance with the model data.
10-11
156225-1CD 343/532
10.6 CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option>
NOTE To use this function (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-CadPack is required. (The
MotoSim EG-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EG.)
10.6.1 CAD Import

Option settings related to reading CAD format files.
“Enable Healing”
When enabled, a healing algorithm is applied to the importedCAD data.
section
The [Recreate surface] option is normally selected.

[Recreate
The [Recreate surface] is part of the normal healing process. If it is
surface] check
unselected, this step will be skipped in the healing process.
box
If the surface regeneration doesn't give the intended results, unselect the
"Recreate Surface" may improve the healing results.
[Disable on The [Disable on error] option is normally selected.

error] check box When the [Disable on error] is selected, the healing will be disabled if an
error occurs during the healing process.
10-12
156225-1CD 344/532
Select this type when the model applies a CAM function. Do not select this
Imports the work type when the model is tool or peripheral equipment.
file for CAM General CAD data are displayed in the CadTree dialog, and the model
teaching
for CAM teaching are displayed .
When this option is selected, the "CAD Import" dialog will not display when
an IGES file is read.
[Don't show the
[CAD Import]
dialog] check box NOTE For details on the CAD data import, please refer to Section
"9.13 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option>".
The healing process attempts to repair any corrupted data of the imported CAD files. However,
NOTE the processing time to import a file may increase significantly when healing is used. The
performance may also vary depending on the extent and nature of the errors in the original
CAD file. In some cases, result with healing may be worst than reading the file without healing.
10.6.2 IGES/SAT Export

Units Sets the measuring units of the exported SAT or IGES files.
Version (SAT Sets the SAT file version used in the exported file.
Only) Recommended value: 6 (Setting range: 4 to 16)
When this option is selected, the "Export" dialog will not display when the
"Export CAD file" function is used.
[Don't show the
[Export] dialog]
check box NOTE For details on the IGES, SAT data export, please refer to
Section "9.15 CAD Data Export".
10-13
156225-1CD 345/532
10.7 Show Teach Point <CadPack Option>
NOTE To use this function (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is required. (The
MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EG-VRC.)
To configure the Teach Point, the "Show Teach Point" tab of the Option Setting dialog box.
GuideLine
[Show] check
Select displaying the guide lines or not.
box
10-14
156225-1CD 346/532
Select the color of the guide line.
A teach point and a teach point

are connected with a dotted line,
and are displayed.
[Modify Color]
button
Teach Point No
[Show] check
Select displaying the teach point no. or not.
box
[Modify Color]
Select the color of the teach point no.
button
Show Teach Point
Frame only
Arrow Only (S)
Arrow Only (M)
Style
Arrow Only (L)
Frame and Arrow (S)
10-15
156225-1CD 347/532
Frame and Arrow (M)
Style Frame and Arrow (L)
None
Length Change the frame length (Z-Axis) of teach point.
[Modify Color]
Select the color of the frame length (Z-Axis)
button
Select reversing the frame length (Z-Axis)or not.
[Show Teach
Point Inverse
Direction] check
box
[Reset] button Initialize the settings.
[OK] button The settings are saved and the dialog is closed.
[Cancel] button The settings are canceled and the dialog is closed.
10-16
156225-1CD 348/532
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
11 Applied Operation
 What is OLP Function?

Normally, teaching operation uses the programming pendant to move the robot model to the
target position. The OLP (Off-Line Programming) function is a quick and efficient way to move
the robot to a target position. When the desired destination is located on a model, by using
the OLP panel, the end of the tool (TCP) can conveniently be moved to the target position by
simply clicking on the screen (for example, any point of a workpiece, etc.).
• When moving the robot tool end with the OLP function, the message "Cannot reach this
point" may appear even if the robot is not too far from the target point. This may happen
when the tool end cannot be moved to the target point due to the shape or current
SUPPLE posture of the robot.
-MENT
• A point other than the target point may be selected depending on the point clicked and
the view position. When this occurs, use the programming pendant to move the robot or
change the camera scope of the screen to click on the proper model.
11-1
156225-1CD 349/532
11.1.1 Teaching Operation Setup

The teaching operation is explained by using “Arc_Sample.vcl” as an example.
Procedure
1. Open “Arc_Sample.vcl”.
(If it is difficult to perform the teaching operation, hide the displayed models such as
fence, controller, etc. by selecting the obstructing model and then setting its display
property to “Hide All” in the combo box on the Cad Tree dialog box.)
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button, the [OLP] dialog
appears.
11-2
156225-1CD 350/532
3. Display the cell window so that the workpiece is visible as shown in the figure below.
11.1.2 Position Designation in Free Mode

In "Free" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the point of the model corresponding to the
clicked position.
1. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
2. Click on the following position of the workpiece model displayed in the cell window.
Click here.
3. The tool end moves to the clicked position.
11-3
156225-1CD 351/532
Click on another point, and the tool end moves to the clicked position.
11.1.3 Position Designation in Vertex Mode

In "Vertex" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the model vertex nearest to the clicked
position.
Check.
Select.
Click a side near

the corner.
3. The tool end moves to the nearest vertex.

Click on a point near another vertex to check if the tool end moves to the nearest ver-
11-4
156225-1CD 352/532
tex.
11.1.4 Position Designation in Center Mode

In "Center" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the face or edge center nearest to the clicked
position.
.
Check.
Select.
Click the side face.
3. The tool end moves to the center point of the designated model face or edge. 
If the tool overlaps on the model, the tool direction is improper. Use the programming
pendant to correct the position afterward.
Click on another face to check if the tool end moves to the center of the designated
11-5
156225-1CD 353/532
model face.
11.1.5 Position Designation in Edge Mode

IIn "Edge" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the edge point nearest to the clicked position.
.
Check.
Select.
2. Cick on the following position of the workpiece model displayed in the cell window.
Click here.
3. The tool end moves to the edge point nearest to the clicked position. Click on another
face point to check if the tool end moves to the closest edge.
11-6
156225-1CD 354/532
11.1.6 Designation with Orientation Mode

Orientation Move Mode can be used by itself or in combination with the Position Mode.
Checking the [Orientation] checkbox rotates the tool end frame to align it with the target point
frame. If the [Position] mode is also check, the tool end will also move overlap the target
frame. Therefore, if you only want to change the orientation of the tool without moving it,
make sure to uncheck the [Position] checkbox.
The target point frame appears when the left mouse button is pressed down on a model and is
represented by 3 colored arrows. The red arrow is the Z-axis and corresponds to the normal
(or reversed normal) of the face where lies target point; the blue arrow is the X-axis and is
defined by the face edge closest to the point; and the green arrow is the Y-axis and is
orthogonal to the two other axis.
• That some geometries, such as lines or points, do not have sufficient information to
generate a frame information. In such cases, the tool end will maintain its original
NOTE orientation.
• The direction of the Z-axis can be changed by selecting [Normal] or [Reverse] mode in
the "Use Face:" section.
Procedure
1. Hide the T-shape workpiece and the stand to make it easier to create a new workpiece.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [CadTree]
dialog appears. To hide the lower hierarchy of the “DAI” tree. Confirm that the cursor is
on the “DAI” model, then select “Hide All” in the Cad Tree dialog combobox to hide the
model.
2. Select “world” in the Cad Tree and click on the [Add] button to add the BOX of the fol-
lowing specifications.
Model: WORK2
11-7
156225-1CD 355/532
X (mm) 0 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 0
3. Click on the [Pos] button in the Cad Tree to set the position as shown in the table
below.
X (mm) 800 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) 560
Rx (degree) 150 Ry (degree) -20 Rz (degree) 0
4. To see and understand the coordinate axis of “WORK2”, select “WORK2” in the Cad
Tree, then select “SeeAll” to display the Frame of the coordinate axis on the “WORK2”.
Check.
Select.
11-8
156225-1CD 356/532
6. Click on the position of the “WORK2” as shown below.
Click.
7. The tool end moves to the model vertex and the tool coordinate axis is aligned in the
same direction as the target point frame that was displayed when the point was clicked.
If the [Orientation] checkbox is not checked, the direction of the tool coordinate axis will
not be changed as shown below.
 Designation with Z-Axis Mode

Z-Axis Move Mode can be used by itself or in combination with the Position Mode. Checking
the [Z-Axis] checkbox rotates the tool end frame to align its Z-axis with the target point Z-axis.
If the [Position] mode is also check, the tool end will also move overlap the target frame.
Therefore, if you only want to change the orientation of the tool without moving it, make sure
to uncheck the [Position] checkbox.
The target point Z-Axis appears when the left mouse button is pressed down on a model and
is represented by a red arrows. For a solid, the Z-axis corresponds to the normal (or reversed
11-9
156225-1CD 357/532
normal) of the face where lies target point. For a line, it corresponds to the line direction to the
next closest point.
• Points do not have sufficient information to generate Z-axis information. In such cases,
NOTE the tool end will maintain its original orientation. .
• The direction of the Z-axis can be changed by selecting [Normal] or [Reverse] mode in
the "Use Face:" section.
Procedure
The procedure is explained by using "WORK2", which has been used in "Designation with
Orientation Mode", as an example.
1. Move the robot to its home position.
Check.
Select.
3. Click on the face of the "Work2", and the tool Z-axis will turn so that the tool end is per-
11-10
156225-1CD 358/532
pendicular to the clicked face of the model.
11.1.7 Pick Object Filter

The "Pick Object" section allows setting the type of model that can be selected with mouse.
Use this section when pick operation cannot be executed properly because the objects
overlap each other. This setting filters which object types can be selected and enables proper
pick operation.
Procedure
The procedure is explained by using “WORK2”, which has been used in " What is OLP
Function? ", as an example.
1. Display the Cad Tree; hide the “WORK2” and display the “DAI”.
2. Select “DAI” in the Cad Tree to add the AXIS6 of the following specifications.
Model: DAI (AXIS6) Frame No.: 0
X (mm) 0 Y (mm) 0 Z (mm) -100
Newly added
AXIS6

The AXIS6 is inside the BOX. (To see AXIS6 make sure that the Axis6 are always 
displayed in front in the "Options" dialog. Please refer to Section "10.1.5 Frame &
AXIS6"
11-11
156225-1CD 359/532
Check.
Select.
4. The tool does not move even though the “AXIS6” on the cell window is clicked. If you
click around the vertex of the BOX, however, the tool moves to the vertex. This is
because the [Frame] check box in the OLP dialog box has been cleared and only mod-
els are considered for selection.

Clicking of the AXIS6

does not move the tool.
11-12
156225-1CD 360/532
5. Check the [Frame] check box for the “Pick Object” and clear the [Model] check box.
Uncheck.
Check
6. Click on the AXIS6, and the tool moves to the vertex of the AXIS6.

SUPPLE
It is recommended to use this function with both [Frame] and [Parts] checked for normal
-MENT operation.
11-13
156225-1CD 361/532
11.1.8 Changing of Operation Object

Setting the "Operation Object" section in the OLP dialog box allows changing the object
moved by the pick operation. The "Operation Object" can be changed among.
The operation object of

when "CurModel" is selected
The operation object of

when "Teacher" is selected
Procedure
The procedure is explained by taking “CurModel” as an example.
Check.
Select.
2. Display the Cad Tree to select “DAI”, or click on the button to select the “DAI”
model in the cell window.
11-14
156225-1CD 362/532
3. Select a model for the operation object.

• When the current model was selected with the Cad Tree
Click on the tool end in the cell window with the mouse, and the “DAI” moves to the
tool end.
• When the current mode was selected with the button

Check the [OLP Pick] check box, then click on the tool end on the cell window, and
the “DAI” moves to the tool end.
Click here.
SUPPLE
Perform the same operation when the [Teacher] radio button is selected for the “Operation
-MENT Obj” section.
11.1.9 Move to External Reference Point

When the Move to External Reference Point function is active, the robot will move so that the
point clicked on a model (carried by the robot) is brought to the external reference point.
This is useful for applications like sealing and spot welding where the parts are handled by the
robot and brought to a fix point (distribution nozzle, spot gun) for processing.
Procedure
The procedure is explained by using the "SpotWeld.vcl" as an example.
1. Open the "SpotWeld.vcl" located in the "Example" folder. The cell display should look
like the one shown below.
11-15
156225-1CD 363/532
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button, the [OLP] dialog
appears. Click on the [More >>] button.
3. Set the external reference point.
With the "Select Model" mode , select the "hite" model by clicking on it.
11-16
156225-1CD 364/532
Click here
(model:hite)
To set the external reference point, click on the [Select Reference] button, the [Select
Model] dialog will display, select the "hite" model and press [OK].
The name of the selected reference model is displayed in the "Move to External Ref.
Point" section. Confirm that the "hite" model is selected.
11-17
156225-1CD 365/532
Check
Select
Check
5. Click on the work piece at the shown position.
Click here.
6. The robot will move the work piece target point to the external reference point.
NOTE To use the "Move to External Reference Point" mode, the "Operation Object" needs to be
set to robot.
11-18
156225-1CD 366/532
11.1.10 Synchronous Base Axis Move to Target Point

When a robot with servotrack/servotracks is moved with the OLP, the synchronous base axis
move function allows the tool end (TCP) to move to the target point with the servotrack
motion.
This operation function procedure is explained separately for robots with a single servotrack
and robots with multiple servotracks.
 Robot with Single Servotrack

Procedure
1. For the robot with a single servotrack, the move method can be selected among:
• Front movement;
• Approach little by little; and
• Middle of attainment and front.
2. Select the [Active] check box in the “Synchronous base axis move” .
Check.
Displays the selected move method.
11-19
156225-1CD 367/532
3. Click on the [Method] in the OLP dialog box to display the “Synchronous base axis
movement” dialog box, and set the move method.
Select the move method.
Input only when the

[Middle of attainment
and front] radio button
is selected.
Front Movement
The function enabled with the [Front movement] radio button allows the tool end to move to
the target point after the servotrack moves in front of the target point.
Aimed point
After move
Moving distance
Procedure
1. Select the [Front movement] radio button in the “Synchronous base axis movement”
dialog box.
Select.
2. Click on the target point.

• If the target point exceeds the servotrack soft limit, a message is displayed and the
servotrack moves to the soft limit.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point, an error message is displayed
but the servotrack moves in front of the target point.
11-20
156225-1CD 368/532
Approach Little by Little

The function enabled with the [Approach little by little] radio button allows the servotrack to
move only the distance between the target point and the position of the current tool end
(TCP), then the tool end (TCP) moves to the target point. In short, the servotrack and the tool
end (TCP) move so that the current robot posture is maintained as much as possible.
Aimed point
 Distance to
aimed point After
move
The robot moves
the distance 
Procedure
1. Select the [Approach little by little] radio button in the “Synchronous base axis
movement” dialog box.
Select.

but the servotrack moves in front of the target point.
11-21
156225-1CD 369/532
Middle of Attainment and Front

The function enabled with the [Middle of attainment and front] radio button allows the
servotrack to move toward the target point step by step to search for the first position where
the tool end (TCP) can attain the target point. The servotrack then moves to the middle point
between the first attainment and the front of the target point, and the tool end (TCP) moves to
the target point.
Target point
After
move
The first attainment Front of the
The robot moves in the direction Middle target point
of the target point step by step. point
Procedure
1. Select the [Middle of attainment and front] radio button in the “Synchronous base axis
movement” dialog box. In the “STEP” edit box, set the moving amount for each step
taken toward the target point.
Select.
Sets the interval

to search for the
aimed point.

• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point even though the servotrack
moves in front of the target point, the attainment is searched with the servotrack
moving in such a direction that the target point will be further (up to the maximum
soft limit) than the servotrack position before moving. 
 Searches for Target point

the attainment.
The original In front of the

position target point
 Searches  The end tool

does not reach
again.
the aimed point.
11-22
156225-1CD 370/532
and the servotrack returns to the original position before moving.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point because the servotrack moves
to the middle point between the first attainment and the front of the target point, the
attainment is searched again with the servotrack moving in such a direction that the
target point will be further than the middle point.
 Moves to the middle point. Target point

 Searches for
the attainment.
The original position

The end tool
In front of the
 The first  Searches does not target point
attainment again. reach the
target point.
11-23
156225-1CD 371/532
 Robot with Multiple Servotracks

For the robot with multiple servotracks, each servotrack moves the distance between the
current tool end (TCP) position and the target point, and the tool end (TCP) moves to the
target point.
Aimed point
Moving distance of
the third servotrack
Moving distance of
Moving distance of the first servotrack
the second servotrack After move
Procedure
1. Select the [Active] check box in the “Synchronous base axis move”. For the multiple
servotracks, the servotrack move methods cannot be selected since only one method
is available.
Select.

• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point, a message is displayed but the
servotracks move the distance to the target point.
11-24
156225-1CD 372/532
11.1.11 Position Designation with move slave function

When the [move slave] checkbox is checked, the [Move Slave] function is enabled. When a
robot or station is moved, other slave robots from the same controller are moved with it so that
their TCP maintain the same relative position to the moved robot or station. For example, this
section describes the move slave function with SDA10D-A00.
1. Display the OLP dialog box and check the [Move Slave] checkbox.
Check
2. To display the "Set Slave Robots" dialog, click the […] button. Then set which robot are
slave robots.
11-25
156225-1CD 373/532
3. Click the arbitrary points of works in the MotoSim EG-VRC.
Click here
4. Then, slave robots are moved with it so that their TCP maintain the same relative posi-
tion to the moved robot or station.
NOTE When the function is enable, if one of the robot can not reach the proper position, all the
robots are prevented from moving.
11-26
156225-1CD 374/532
11.2 Trace Function
11.2 Trace Function
11.2.1 Changing Trace Object

The object normally traced is the tool end, however, the trace object can be changed. 
The trace object is changed to the flange in the following explanation.
Procedure
The procedure is explained with the “Arc_Sample.vcl” example.
1. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Trace] button, the [Trace]
dialog appears. 
The “Trace Manager” dialog will appear. Trace can be added, edited or deleted. For
this exemple, the default trace will be edited.
2. Display the trace property by double clicking on the “HP6_trace1” or by pressing the
“Edit” button. Press the [...] next to the “Model” field to display the “Select Model” dia-
log and select the model to be traced. For this example, select the “HP6_flange”
model. Then click on the [OK] button. Make sure that the “Model” edit box shows the
selected model name and click on the [OK] button.
Select
“HP6_flange”
11-27
156225-1CD 375/532
11.2 Trace Function
3. Execute an job.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Start] button.
Flange tracing
The following figure shows when the tracing point is a tool.
Tool end tracing
11.2.2 Changing Trace Parent

The tracking drawn by the trace function is normally created and drawn as a model having
"world" as the parent. Therefore, changing the name of the “Parent” in the Trace
Configuration dialog box will change the parent of the tracking. This parent changing function
is useful in the following cases:
• Tracing welding point positions when the robot holds and moves a workpiece to a fixed
welding points.
• Points to be traced are set to welding points.
Procedure
The procedure is explained with the “Arc_Sample.vcl” example.
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [Cad Tree]
dialog appears. 
11-28
156225-1CD 376/532
11.2 Trace Function
To hide the “WORK” which is located on “DAI”, select “WORK” to set it to “Hide”.
2. Select “world” from the Cad Tree and click on the [Add] button to create the
“YOUSETU” model.
3. Add the “CONE2” model to “YOUSETU”.
11-29
156225-1CD 377/532
11.2 Trace Function
The following figures show “CONE2” and the layout setting.
Set the layout so that the model frame

comes to this position.
YOUSETU
4. Create the “WORK3” model that has “TCP” as the parent.

Select “HP6_tcp” from the Cad Tree, then click on the [Add] button.

Create "WORK3" on TCP.
5. Add the “BOX” model to “WORK3”.
11-30
156225-1CD 378/532
11.2 Trace Function
Set the BOX as follows.
WORK3
6. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Trace] button, the [Trace] dia-
log appears.
7. Display the trace property by double clicking on the “HP6_trace1” or by pressing the
“Edit” button. Press the [...] next to the “Model” field to display the “Select Model” dia-
log and select the model to be traced. For this example, select the “YOUSETU” model.
Then click on the [OK] button. Make sure that the “Model” edit box shows the selected
model name.
8. Press the [...] next to the “Parent” field to display the “Select Model” dialog and select
the model that will become the parent (and the reference coordinate frame) of the
trace. For this example, select the “WORK3” model. Then click on the [OK] button.
Make sure that the “Parent” edit box shows the selected model name.
9. The “Max. Points” field defines the maximum number of points that will be used by the
trace, this affect the length of the trace. (If the number of tracing points exceeds the set
value, tracing points are deleted in order from the oldest.)
In this example, set the value to 2000.
10. The “Color” field displays the color of the trace. Set any desired color by pressing the
[...] button next to the color.
11. Click on the [OK] button to save the setting.
12. Using the Virtual Pendant, create a new job which welds four corners of a workpiece as
11-31
156225-1CD 379/532
11.2 Trace Function
shown in the following figure. Teach the positions of each STEP with MOVL instruc-
tions. 
Initial State Viewed from Side Initial State Viewed from Front
STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3
STEP 4 STEP 5
13. Execute the job and the tracing track attached to “WORK3” will be displayed. This
helps to see which positions on the workpiece are to be welded.

As described above, changing the trace object and the parent with the Trace Configu-
ration dialog box can leave the moving track of the target point that can be easily read.
11-32
156225-1CD 380/532
11.3 Collision Detection Setting
This section explains to set up the collision detection and check the collision on the playback.
Follow the flowchart below to set up the collision detection.
Collision model group registration
Collision definition registration
Start collision detection
 Collision model group registration

Procedure
1. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Collision] group, click the [Collision Detection] button,
the [Collision Detection] dialog appears.
2. Click the [ModelGroup] button on the Collision Detection dialog box, the Collision
Model Group dialog box is displayed.
3. Click the [Add] button on the Collision Model Group dialog box, the Collision Model
Group Detail dialog box is displayed.
11-33
156225-1CD 381/532
4. Enter the collision model group name to [Model Group], display the [CadTree] dialog
box, and select the "DAI" in the CadTee dialog box.
Check the [A child model is also registered simultaneously] and click the [Add from
CadTree] button, "DAI" and "WORK" is added to the model list. Click the [OK] button to
save.
5. To edit the collision model group of robot, Double-click "DX100-R01" on the Collision
Model Group dialog box. The Collision Model Group Detail dialog box is displayed.
Delete the unnecessary model from model list. Click the button and click the tool
model on the MotoSim EG-VRC window. "Torch" is added. Click the [OK] button to
save.
 Collision definition registration

1. Click the [Add] button on the Collision Detection dialog box, the Collision Definition
dialog box is displayed.
11-34
156225-1CD 382/532
2. Enter "PAIR1" to the [Pair Name], Set Attribute of "DX100-R01" as "Master" and set
Attribute of "WORK" as "Slave".
 Start collision detection

1. Check the "PAIR1" check box on the Collision Detection dialog box, and check the
[Collision Check] check box.
2. To execute the job, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Start] but-
ton. When the collision occurs, the models turn red, and playback is stopped.
11-35
156225-1CD 383/532
11.4 Adding I/O Board Module
Even if CMOS.BIN of the real robot with I/O board module or welding board module, it is
possible to add virtually those board modules to the virtual controller.
11.4.1 Adding I/O Board Module (DX200, DX100, NX100).

• The following I/O expansion boards are supported:
DX200, DX100:
• JARCR-XOI01
• JARCR-XOI02
• JARCR-XOI03
The analog EW boards are not supported for the DX200/DX100.
NX100:
NOTE • JARCR-XOI01
• JARCR-XOI02
• JARCR-XOI03
• JANCD-XEW01-1
• JANCD-XEW01-2
• JANCD-XEW02
• When the new controller is created, this procedure can not be used. Prepare the cell
registered the controller beforehand, and use the procedure of this section.
Procedure
1. With a text editor software (e.i. Notepad) open the “HwEmu.ini” file located in the
controller folder of the cell (the same folder that contains the VRC.BIN file).
2. Edit the file as follows and then save the file.
[HwEmu.ini]
[VIRTUAL_SET]
VIRTUAL_SET=1
[RSW]
RSW=14
[BOARD] ← Set this value to 1
SLOT# 0=JZNC-NIF02-2
SLOT# 1=JARCR-XOI01 ← Do NOT change this.
SLOT# 2=
SLOT# 3= ← Do NOT change this.
SLOT# 4=JANCD-XEW01-1 ← Write the name of the desired board
: (SLOT#1 to #15 are available to add boards)
:
:
SLOT#15=
11-36
156225-1CD 384/532
3. Start MotoSim EG-VRC but do not open any cell. (If already running, close all open
cell). On the [Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Maintenance mode] button,
the [Maintenance mode] dialog appears. Click the [...] button form that dialog and
select the VRC.BIN file located in the controller folder of the cell. Then, click the [Start]
button to launch the controller in Maintenance mode. (For more detail about the con-
troller maintenance mode, refer to Section "7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode".)
4. From the Virtual Pendant main menu select {SYSTEM} - {SETUP}. 
Then select {IO Module} from the setup list.
11-37
156225-1CD 385/532
5. The list of “I/O MODULE” will display. Confirm that the board that were added in the
“HwEmu.ini” file are present. .
Press [ENTER] twice. A confirmation message will appear, select “Yes”
6. In the MotoSim-EG-VRC “Maintenance Mode” dialog, select the [End] button to exit the
controller maintenance mode.
7. Open the cell containing the modified controller. Display the Virtual I/O monitor and
confirm that the added I/O boards are present.
If the added I/O module doesn’t display.

Make sure that the “HwEmu.ini” file was properly modfied and that there are no typo in the
NOTE board name.
Make sure that the modified “HwEmu.ini” file and the selected “VRC.BIN” are both located
in the same controller folder of the same cell.
11-38
156225-1CD 386/532
11.4.2 Adding I/O Board Module (FS100).

• The following I/O expansion boards are supported:
• LIO-08R (I/O expansion board)
• LIO-09R (I/O expansion board)
NOTE • CNTR01 (Counter board)
I/O expansion boards other than listed above and welding boards are not supported.
• When the new controller is created, this procedure can not be used. Prepare the cell
registered the controller beforehand, and use the procedure of this section.
When this procedure is used, "SYPICK" instruction and "SYPLACE" instruction (used by
high-speed picking) disappear from the command list. Then, use the following procedure
with the virtual pendant.
NOTE 1. Change the security mode to "MANAGEMENT MODE".
2. Select {SETUP} - {TEACHING COND.}.
3. Select {DATA} - {RESET INSTRUCTION}, and a confirmation dialog box
will appear, select [YES] to reset instructions.
Procedure
1. When the cell is opened, save the cell and close it, and exit MotoSim EG-VRC.
2. With a text editor software (ex. Notepad) open the "HwEmu.ini" file located in the con-
troller folder of the cell (the same folder that contains the VRC.BIN file).
3. Write the board name (ex. "LIO-08R") in the [BOARD] section, and save the file.
[HwEmu.ini]
[BOARD]
SLOT# 1=LIO-08R
SLOT# 2=LIO-08R
←Set this by default
SLOT# 3=
SLOT# 4=CNTR01
SLOT# 5=
←Set this by default
SLOT# 6=
SLOT# 7=
SLOT# 8=
4. Start MotoSim EG-VRC but do not open any cell.

On the [Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Maintenance mode] button, the
[Maintenance mode] dialog appears. Then, to launch the controller in Maintenance
mode, operate in the "VRC Maintenance Mode" dialog. (For more detail about the con-
troller maintenance mode, refer to Section "7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode".)
11-39
156225-1CD 387/532
5. Select {SYSTEM} - {SETUP} in the virtual pendant.
6. Select {IO Module} from the list in the {SETUP} display.
7. The list of [IO MODULE] is displayed. Confirm that the boards added in the
"HwEmu.ini" file are present. After Confirming, click the [ENTER] button.
11-40
156225-1CD 388/532
9. The "EXTERNAL IO ALLOCATION(INPUT)" screen doesn't need any change. Press

10. The "EXTERNAL IO ALLOCATION(OUTPUT)" screen doesn't need any change.

11. A confirmation dialog box will appear, select the [YES] button.
12. In the MotoSim EG-VRC "VRC Maintenance Mode" dialog, select the [End] button to
exit the controller maintenance mode.
11-41
156225-1CD 389/532
13. Open the cell containing the modified controller. Display the [Virtual I/O monitor] dialog
and confirm that added I/O boards are present.
If the added I/O module doesn’t display.

Make sure that the “HwEmu.ini” file was properly modfied and that there are no typo in the
NOTE board name.
Make sure that the modified “HwEmu.ini” file and the selected “VRC.BIN” are both located
in the same controller folder of the same cell.
11-42
156225-1CD 390/532
11.5 Option Function Setting
The particular operation is available by setting option function.
NOTE MotoSim EG-VRC supports the function in the Section "1.2.1 Optional Functionof
controller" only.
Procedure
1. Start the controller in maintenance mode. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group,
click the [Maintenance mode] button, the [Maintenance mode] dialog appears. For
details refer to section "7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode".
2. Select {SYSTEM} - {SETUP} in the virtual pendant.
3. Select [OPTION FUNCTION] in the {SETUP} display.
11-43
156225-1CD 391/532
4. Set the function used to "USED".

For detail of each function, please refer to the controller "Operator's Manual".
11-44
156225-1CD 392/532
11.6 Dual-Arm robot Setting
When the Dual-Arm robot (ex. SDA10-A00) is used, the job used "Coordinated Instruction"
and "Parallel Start Instruction" can be created in MotoSim EG-VRC. This section describes
how to setup Dual-Arm robots and how to activate optional functions such as "Coordinated
Instruction" or "Parallel Start Instruction" of each controller.
Follow the flowchart below to setup Dual-Arm robots.
START
Creating Controller with a New VRC

Controller (no file)
After setting, start the controller in the maintenance mode.
Controller Initialization
Setting “Coordinated Instruction” and Operation in the

“Parallel Start Instruction” “Maintenance Mode”
Exiting the maintenance mode
After setting, start the controller in the normal mode.
Setting the robot model
Operation in the
Setting the calibration
“Normal Mode”
Registration the group combination
END
11-45
156225-1CD 393/532
11.6.1 Dual-Arm robot Setting (DX100)

Dual-Arms are composed of right arm, left arm and one torso. When defining the control group
of the controller during the initialization, three control groups need to be set. There are two
robot groups (R1 and R2) for the arms and one station group (S1) for the rotation of the torso.
To determine the robot model to select from the robot list, remove the "A00" part of the robot
type and replace it by:
• X0* for the left arm robot (R1)

• Y0* for the right arm robot (R2)
• W0* for the torso rotation (S1)
For example for a SDA010D-A00 robot, the control groups should be set to SDA010D-X00,
SDA010D-Y00 and SDA010D-W00.
Procedure
1. Proceed the step 1 and 2 of Section "7.1.1 Create a New VRC Controller (no file)".
Select some system version of the "DX100". When the operation is finished, the
controller starts in the maintenance mode.
2. Proceed all steps of Section "7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200, DX100, NX100)".
At the Step 3, set the control group to the following settings.
11-46
156225-1CD 394/532
The "MECHANICAL SPEC" screen and "MOTOR SPEC" don't need any change.
3. From the main menu, select {SYSTEM} - {SETUP}.

4. From the setup list, select {OPTION FUNCTION}.
5. Select the "Parallel Start Instruction" and set its value to "4 Tasks". When the confirma-
tion message displays, select "Yes" to make the change.
11-47
156225-1CD 395/532
6. Select the "Coordinated Instruction" and set its value to "Used". When the confirmation
message displays, select "Yes" to make the change.
7. Close the controller "Maintenance Mode" by clicking the [Finish] button of the MotoSim
EG-VRC "Instruction Guide" dialog.
8. To set the robot models , proceed the step 4 of Section "7.1.1 Create a New VRC Con-
troller (no file)".
9. To set the calibration data of the controller, proceed "Set calibration data base on robot
model layout" of Section "7.6.3 Robot Calibration Setting".
10. Change the security mode to "MANAGEMENT MODE" in the virtual pendant.
11. Select {SETUP} - {GRP COMBINATION}, add the group combination (ex. "R1+R2",
"R1+R2",…)
For detail of group combination, please refer to the "Controller Options: Instructions for
Independent/Coordinated control function" manual.
11-48
156225-1CD 396/532
11.6.2 Dual-Arm robot Setting (FS100)

Dual-Arms are composed of right arm, base axis of right arm, left arm and base axis of left
arm. When defining the control group of the controller during the initialization, four control
groups need to be set. There are two robot groups (R1 and R2) for the arms and two base
axis group (B1, B2).
• S0* for the base axis of the left arm robot (B1)
• S0* for the base axis of the right arm robot (B2)
For example for a SDA010F-A00 robot, the control groups should be set to SDA010F-X00,
SDA010F-S00, SDA010F-Y00 and SDA010F-S00.
Procedure
Select some system version of the "FS100". When the operation is finished, the
2. Proceed all steps of Section "7.1.4 Initializing the Controller (FS100)". At the Step 3,
set the control group to the following settings.
11-49
156225-1CD 397/532
Then at the Step 4, set the connection to the following settings.
The "MECHANICAL SPEC" screen and "MOTOR SPEC" don't need any change.
11-50
156225-1CD 398/532
5. Select the "DUAL ARM FUNCTION" and set its value to "Used". When the confirmation
troller (no file)".
10. Select the {SETUP} - {GRP COMBINATION} menu in the virtual pendant.
11-51
156225-1CD 399/532
11. Press [SELECT], and select "ADD GROUP".
12. Set the "NO.1 CONTROL GROUP" to "R1", "NO.2 CONTROL GROUP" to R2 and
"MASTER" to R1. Then click the [EXECUTE] button.
13. If the "R1+R2:R1" group combination set is created, the setting is finished.
11-52
156225-1CD 400/532
11.6.3 Dual-Arm robot Setting (NX100)

Dual-Arms are composed of right arm, left arm and one torso. When defining the control group
of the controller during the initialization, three control groups need to be set. There are two
robot groups (R1 and R2) for the arms and one station group (S1) for the rotation of the torso.
• W0* for the torso rotation (S1)
For example for a SDA10-A00 robot, the control groups should be set to SDA10-X00, SDA10-
Y00 and SDA10-W00.
Procedure
Select some system version of the "NX100". When the operation is finished, the
2. Proceed all steps of Section "7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200, DX100, NX100)".
At the Step 3, set the control group to the following settings.
11-53
156225-1CD 401/532
5. Select the "Parallel Start Instruction" and set its value to "4 Tasks". When the confirma-
tion message displays, select "Yes" to make the change.
6. Select the "Coordinated Instruction" and set its value to "Used". When the confirmation
troller (no file)".
11. Select {SETUP} - {GRP COMBINATION}, add the group combination (ex. "R1+R2",
"R1+R2",…)
For detail of group combination, please refer to the "Controller Options: Instructions for
Independent/Coordinated control function" manual.
11-54
156225-1CD 402/532
11.7 External Axes Setting (Motor Gun)
The following example shows how to setup an

external axis as a Motor Gun on a ES165N robot.
By default external axis are setup to rotate around
the Z-axis. This example explains how to change
the default behavior of the external axis to make
the Motor Gun model move linearly along the Z-
axis.
11.7.1 Initialization
Procedure:
Add a new controller with no CMOS.BIN according to the precedure of section 7.1.2 Create
Controller with no CMOS.
1. When initializing the controller with the procedure of section 7.1.5 Initializing the
Controller, at the “CONTROL GROUP” screen (step 4), enter the information as
follows:

2. The “CONNECT” screen doesn’t need any change. Press [ENTER] to continue to the
external axis setup screens.
3. The “AXIS CONFIG” defines the external axis mechanism type between “BALL-
SCREW”, “RACK&PINION” or “ROTATION“. The available types depends on the
machine type selected in the “CONTROL GROUP” screen. In the case of “GUN”, the
only choice is “BALL-SCREW”. Press [ENTER] to go to the next screen.
11-55
156225-1CD 403/532
4. In the “MECHANICAL SPEC” screen, define the “MOTION RANGE” (+ and -) of the
axis. The values are the soft limit of the external axis and will prevent the axis from
moving outside of this range.
The “REDUCTION RATIO” is used to enter the ratio of the speed reducer. Usually in
the case of a Motor Gun there are none, so both values are set to 1.
The “BALL-SCREW PITCH” is the linear motion for one full revolution of the screw. As
a reference, most motors encoder have a resolution of 4096 pulses per revolution. So
in this example, a value of 4.096 mm/r means that the gun shaft will travel 0.001 mm
for every pulse. 
5. In the “MOTOR SPEC” screen, if you know which hardware will be used, you may
enter it. Otherwise, leave the default value. For the “MOTOR” field, the choice will
affect the encoder resolution. The “SGMRS” motor series are fairly standard and have
a encoder resolution of 4096 pulses/revolution.
11-56
156225-1CD 404/532
6. In the “APPLICATION” screen, select “MOTOR GUN” as the application.

7. Continue the regular initialization procedure as per section 7.1.5 Initializing the Control-
ler. Press the “Finish” button of the “Instruction Guide” window to reboot the controller
in normal mode.
11.7.2 Model setup and motion

By default in MotoSim EG-VRC, the external axis are setup with the “world” model as a parent
and the axis will rotate around the Z-axis. In the case of a Motor Gun the external axis need to
be moved to the end of the robot and the motor motion change to move the model linearly
along the Z-axis.
Procedure:
1. Once the controller has been added to the cell. The robot model will be displayed in
the middle of the cell. The external axis will not have any model attached to it and will
only be visible in the CADtree dialog.
11-57
156225-1CD 405/532
2. Display the CADTree dialog, then select the controller station (e.i. NX100-ST1). Move
this model to the robot TCP model (e.i. NX100-RB1_tcp) with the “Move Parent” func-
tion.
3. With the Virtual Pendant, define the robot TOOL. This will change the robot TCP
model (e.i. NX100-RB1_tcp) in MotoSim EG-VRC.
4. Add or create a model for the Motor Gun fixed part with the robot flange (NX100-
RB1_flange) as the parent.
5. Add or create a model for the Motor Gun mobile part with the station axis model
(NX100-ST1_ex1) as a parent.
Model of the Motor Gun

fixed parts
Model of the Motor Gun

mobile parts
6. At this point, if the station axis is moved, the model will rotate around the Z-axis instead
of moving along it. To change this, save and close the cell.
7. With a text editor (such as “Notepad”), open the cell file (*.vcl).
In the controller section, under the station (ST1) section add the following line:
AXIS1=(TYPE=Z);.
Note that the ratio and offset can also be modified in this manner. This maybe useful if the
Motor Gun specific hardware is unknown.
AXIS1=(TYPE=Z)(RATIO=1.0)(OFFSET=0.0);
NOTE where:
AXIS* : Axis No. of the robot (begins with 1.)
TYPE: Direction to move (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry or Rz)
RATIO: The distance moved (mm or rad) for each pulse
OFFSET: The initial move amount (mm or rad)
11-58
156225-1CD 406/532
CELL_INIT
{
VERSION=1, 1, 0, 0
CONTROLLER(0)
{
PATH=%CELPATH%¥NX100;
NAME=NX100;
RB1
{
NAME=NX100-RB1;
FILE=%CELPATH%¥NX100¥RB1¥ES165N-A00.mdl;
}
ST1
{
NAME=NX100-ST1;
FILE=dummy;
AXIS1=(TYPE=Z);
Add this line
}
TRACE
{
ROBOT=NX100-RB1;
}
}
...
8. Save the text file and then reopen the cell file with MotoSim EG-VRC. Confirm that the
Motor Gun axis is working properly.
If the model doesn’t move in the proper direction, you may need to adjust the orienta-
tion of the station axis 1 location frame (e.i. NX100-ST1_EX1-POS) and then readjust
the Motor Gun mobile part model.
11-59
156225-1CD 407/532
11.8 Setting of spot welding simulation
Electric gun of an external axis is set to the robot, and it explains the procedure for simulating
the spot welding.
• The simulation of the spot welding is a function that can be used only with DX200/DX100. 
It doesn't deal with other controllers.
• The simulation of spot gun change system is not supported.
NOTE • The following function keys for spot welding using motor gun are not supported.
Manual spot welding ([INTERLOCK] + [./SPOT])
Manual dry spot welding ([INTERLOCK] + [2/GUN CLOSE])
Pressurizing ([INTERLOCK] +[8/PRESSURE])
Releasing ([INTERLOCK] +[9/RELEASE])
11.8.1 Initialize
Procedure:
A new controller is registered by the operational procedure of Section "7.1.1 Create a New
VRC Controller (no file)".
1. When initializing the controller with the procedure of section 7.1.3 Initializing the
Controller, at the “CONTROL GROUP“ screen (Step3), enter the information as
follows:
Please refer to Section "7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200, DX100, NX100)" for
details of the controller's initialization.
When the spot welding simulation is done with two or more robots, it is necessary to set
NOTE gun according to the robot.
Please select "GUN-1" each S1 and S2 when systems are two robots.
11-60
156225-1CD 408/532
2. Each item of the connection etc. keeps not changing, either [enter] being pushed, and
it advancing to the function specification of a set screen of an external axis. Each item
of the “MECHANICAL SPEC“and the “MOTOR SPEC“ is set, [enter] is pushed, and it
advances to the following screen.
Please refer to procedures 4 and 5 of Section "11.7.1 Initialization" for the setting of
each item.
3. "MOTOR GUN" is selected by the usage.
4. The initialization setting is done according to procedure of Section "7.1.3 Initializing the
Controller (DX200, DX100, NX100)". The completion button of the “Controller Mainte-
nance Mode Instructions ” is pushed. A virtual pendant is restarted in the normal
mode.
11.8.2 Setting of welded condition

It is variously set to simulate the spot welding.
Procedure:
1. To change the setting of the spot welding, the security mode is changed to
"MANAGEMENT MODE".
2. The main menu {SPOT WELDING} - {GUN PRESSURE} of a virtual pendant is
selected.
11-61
156225-1CD 409/532
3. The setting of the gun pressurizing power is changed.

An appropriate value is input to this “TOUCH PRESS“ and “1ST PRESS“, the cursor is
matched to the item of the “SETTING”, the [SELECT] or the [Space] key is pushed, and
the “SETTING” is changed to "DONE".
This procedure does only necessary minimum setting.

NOTE For detailed setting, please refer to each controller's “OPERATOR’S MANUAL (FOR SPOT
WELDING USING MOTOR GUN)“.
4. The main menu {SPOT WELDING} - {GUN CONDITION} of a virtual pendant is

selected.
11-62
156225-1CD 410/532
5. The setting of the gun characteristic is changed.

An appropriate value is input to this “PUSLE“ and “TORQUE“, the cursor is adjusted to
the item of the “SETTING”, the [SELECT] or the [Space] key is pushed, and the “SET-
TING” is changed to "DONE".

NOTE For detailed setting, please refer to each controller's “OPERATOR’S MANUAL (FOR SPOT
WELDING USING MOTOR GUN)“.
6. To make changed gun pressurizing power and gun characteristic effective, the servo is
turned off once. After that, it comes to be able to execute the simulation of the spot
welding by turning on the servo again.
SERVO ON Button EMERGENCY STOP Button
1) The emergency stop button is pushed, it puts into the emergency halt condition,
and the servo is turned off.
2) The emergency stop button is pushed, and the emergency halt condition is
released.
3) The servo is turned on pushing servo ON button.
It becomes impossible to do the playback of the welding job normally if the setting is not
NOTE reflected.
Please execute the procedure of servo OFF and turning on when you change the setting.
11-63
156225-1CD 411/532
11.8.3 Setting of welding machine

The welding machine can be simulated in MotoSim EG-VRC.
It is necessary to set the communication time and the welding time with the welding machine
to simulate the welding machine.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Welding Condition] button, the
[Welding Condition]] dialog appears.
“Welding Condition” Dialog Box
Item Description
[Communication Time
A fixed value of each welding machine is set
(msec)] edit box
[Welding Time (msec)] The welding time of each welding condition number specified by the
edit box welding instruction is set.
11.8.4 Making and control group setting of job

The control group of the job sets and it is necessary to set the group combination before
making the job is started.
Please refer to each controller's "OPERATOR'S MANUAL (FOR SPOT WELDING USING
MOTOR GUN)" for details.
11.8.5 Setting of simulation of electric gun

Please refer to Section "11.7 External Axes Setting (Motor Gun)" for the setting to simulate
electric gun.
11-64
156225-1CD 412/532
11.9 Setting of Conveyor Synchronization
Set the conveyor synchronization for the robot, and it explains the procedure for the
simulation of conveyor synchronization.
• This function can not use depending on the system version of controller. Please refer to
section Section "A.6 List of Function depending on the system version of controller".
• This function is available for 1 axis conveyor only. (2 axes and 3 axes conveyor can not
be set conveyor synchronization.)
NOTE • This function can not use CMOS.BIN of a real robot.
• This function can not be used with high-speed playback function.Refer to section Section
"7.5.4 Refresh Interval" about high-speed playback function.
• To simulate the job with high-speed picking, use the template function.
Refer to section Section "4.1.1 Template Function" about template function.
11.9.1 Overview Flowchart

Follow the flowchart below to create the environment.
System Construction
Setting of the option board (DX200, DX100, NX100)

Setting of the I/O module (FS100)
Setting of the file of the conveyor
Conveyor registration
Setting of the conveyor synchronization
Location of the conveyor
Creating and locating the works
Teaching
Operating the conveyor
Display the move command with conveyor synchronization
Playback
Playback of the job with conveyor synchronization
11-65
156225-1CD 413/532
11.9.2 System Construction

It explains the procedure from the new cell creation to creation the environment for creating
the job with conveyor synchronization.
 Controller Initialization
Follow the procedure of section Section "7.1.1 Create a New VRC Controller (no file)" to
create a new VRC controller. After Creation, the cell is saved and closed.
 Setting of the option board (DX200, DX100, NX100)

Procedure
1. With text editor software (ex. Notepad) open the "OPTION_BOARD.ini" file located in
the controller folder of the cell.
2. Edit the file as follows
DX200, DX100 NX100

[SLOT0] [SLOT0]
YCP02=1 NCP02=1
Set those value
CONVEYOR.RO CONVEYOR.ROM
M=1 =1
[SLOT1] [SLOT1]
YCP02=0 NCP02=0
CONVEYOR.RO CONVEYOR.ROM
(Setting of the option board 1 for conveyor synchronization)

File of conveyor synchronization #1 to #3 are available
3. Start MotoSim EG-VRC in Maintenance mode. (For more detail the controller mainte-
nance mode, refer to section Section "7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode".)
4. From the Virtual Pendant main menu select {SYSTEM} - {SETUP}.
5. Then Select {OPTION BOARD} from the setup list.
11-66
156225-1CD 414/532
6. The option board set to "OPTION_BOARD.ini" file is displayed. Select the option
board.
7. Set [YCP02] to [USED]. Push [Enter], and check message appears for three times, so
select "Yes" all time.
8. To Exit the maintenance mode, click the [End] button on the [VRC Maintenance Mode]
of MotoSim EG-VRC.
 Setting of the I/O module (FS100)

Procedure
1. Start MotoSim EG-VRC in Maintenance mode. (For more detail the controller
maintenance mode, refer to section Section "7.10 VRC Maintenance Mode".)
2. From the Virtual Pendant main menu select {SYSTEM} - {SETUP}.
3. Then Select {IO MODULE} from
11-67
156225-1CD 415/532
4. Select the [DETAIL] of the [CNTR-01] in the [IO MODULE] display.
If the "CNTR-01" does not exist in the IO module list, it needs that the counter board is set.
NOTE Then, use the step 1 to 3 in the procedure of Section "11.4.2 Adding I/O Board Module
(FS100).", and proceed this section from the beginning.
5. Set [CNTR-01] to [USED] and push [Enter].
7. The "EXTERNAL IO ALLOCATION (INPUT)" screen doesn't need any change. Press
11-68
156225-1CD 416/532
8. The "EXTERNAL IO ALLOCATION (OUTPUT)" screen doesn't need any change.

9. A confirmation dialog box will appear, select the [YES] button.
10. In the MotoSim EG-VRC "VRC Maintenance Mode" dialog, select the [End] button to
exit the controller maintenance mode.
 Setting of the file of the conveyor

Procedure
1. Open the Cell, and Change the security mode to "MANAGEMENT MODE".
2. From the Virtual Pendant main menu select {ROBOT} - {SETUP}.
3. The setting of the conveyor condition is changed.

• Set the value depending on the real robot to [POS RESOLUTION] and [AVERAGED
TRAVEL TIME], and Set [USED STATUS] to [USED].
• If the value of [POS RESOLUTION] is not set, [VERIFY ERROR (SENSOR PARAME-
TER)] alarm is occurred when [USED STATUS] is set to [USED].
• When [SEGMENT OVER] alarm is occurred during playback, change [AVERAGED
11-69
156225-1CD 417/532
TRAVEL TIME] to the value such as 200ms.

NOTE For detailed setting, please refer to each controller's "INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONVEYOR
SYNCHRONIZED FUNCTION".
 Conveyor registration
Refer to section Section "7.7.1 Adding a Conveyor" about conveyor registration.
If there is the user coordinates corresponding to the conveyor in the controller, the following
dialog box appears. Click [Yes] button, the conveyor is located corresponding to the user
frame position.
 Setting of the conveyor synchronization

Refer to section Section "7.7.9 Conveyor Synchronization" about setting the conveyor
synchronization. Then, robots with conveyor synchronization function made automatically the
user coordinates at the target conveyor position with the user coordinates number
corresponding to the conveyor number.
11-70
156225-1CD 418/532
 Location of the conveyor

Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [CadTree]
dialog appears. Select the conveyor model "CONVEYOR-NO [Conveyor Number] (ex.
CONVEYOR-NO1) ".
2. Click the [Pos] button. Set the location of the conveyor, and click the [OK] button. Then,
robots with conveyor synchronization function made automatically the user coordinates
location corresponding to the conveyor location.
 Creating and locating the works

Works are set on the conveyor.
Procedure
1. Set "[Conveyor Name]_TCP" as the parent model by pointing the cursor to "[Conveyor
Name]_TCP" in the Cad Tree, and the work models are created.
2. Works are set opposite the mark of the conveyor traveling direction (the triangle on the
conveyor). When the line passes through the conveyor origin position (If STP is set
other than zero by SYSTART command, when the line passes through the position set
11-71
156225-1CD 419/532
by STP), conveyor synchronization gets start running.
11.9.3 Teaching
 Operating the conveyor
The ways of operating the conveyor are Operation by conveyor operation panel or operation
by position panel.
Refer to section Section "7.7.8 Conveyor Operation Panel" and Section "7.7.5 Moving a
Device" for detail.
The position of conveyor in [Position] is reflected LS offset value of the each robot. When
NOTE the other robot is selected, the position of conveyor in [Position] is changed, without the
displayed conveyor is not operating.
 Teaching the conveyor synchronized move instructions (SYSTART,

SYEND, SYMOV*)
Teach the conveyor synchronized move instructions by the virtual pendant. Please refer to
"INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONVEYOR SYNCHRONIZED FUNCTION" of each the controller for
details.
• Click the [INFORM LIST] button of the virtual pendant, the command list dialog is dis-
played. Click the [SENSOR] button in the displayed dialog, SYSTART command and
SYEND command are available.
11-72
156225-1CD 420/532
• Click the [SHIFT] button and the [MOTION TYPE] button of the virtual pendant, MOV*
command is changed to SYMOV* command. Then, click the [MOTION TYPE] button,
the motion type is changed (SYMOVJ-> SYMOVL->SYMOVC). And, set the details.
11.9.4 Playback
 Playback of the job with conveyor synchronization
Procedure
1. On the virtual pendant, move the cursor in the job to the first step. Set the robot
position to the position of starting the job.
2. On the job panel of the conveyor, move the cursor in the job to the first step. Set the
conveyor position to the position of starting the job.
3. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Start] button
NOTE The [START] button of the virtual pendant can not use the conveyor synchronization.
Please execute the job with the above procedure.
11-73
156225-1CD 421/532
11.10 High-Speed Picking Simulation Function
11.10High-Speed Picking Simulation Function
This function is able to easily simulate "Conveyor Synchronized Function", "Conveyor

Synchronized Function with Shift Functions" and "Continuous Operation Conveyor
Synchronized Function".
• This function can be only used with the cells created from the template cell
"MPP3_PICKING" (one MPP3 robot with FS100 controller and two conveyors). This
function can not be used with the other cells.
NOTE
• This function can not be used with high-speed playback function.
Refer to Section "7.5.4 Refresh Interval" about high-speed playback function.
• Please do not modify the master job of a template cell.
11.10.1 Overview Flowchart

Follow the flowchart below to create the environment.
Creating a new cell from the template
Location of the conveyors
Setting the size and speed of the conveyors
Location of the works
Location of the pallets
Playback
 Creating a new cell from the template

Follow the procedure of section Section "4.1.1 Template Function" to create a new VRC
controller. Select the "MPP3_PICKING" in the template list, and create a new cell.
A cell available to the high-speed picking simulation is created automatically.
 Location of the conveyors

If needed, the location of the conveyors is changed.
In the template "MPP3_PICKING", the MPP3 robot picks the works from CONVEYOR-NO1,
and places the works on the CONVEYOR-NO2.
11-74
156225-1CD 422/532
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [CadTree]
dialog appears. 
Select the conveyor model "CONVEYOR-NO [Conveyor Number] (ex. CONVEYOR-
NO1) ".
2. Click the [Pos] button. Set the location of the conveyor, and click the [OK] button.
Then, the user coordinates location of MPP3 robot (a light blue FRAME) is changed
automatically corresponding to the conveyor location.
3. When the items other than the distance between the conveyors (Y direction) is
changed, the following setting is needed.

Display the "DETAIL EDIT" of the SYPICK/SYPLACE in the virtual pendant, and Set
the "SYNC START POS" and "TEACHING POS." corresponding to the conveyor posi-
tion.
For example, When CONVEYOR-NO2 is moved -500mm in the X direction, "SYNC
START POS" and "TEACHING POS." are added 500mm.
1) Move the cursor to the SYPLACE instruction in the virtual pendant, and display
the "DETAIL EDIT".
2) Add 500 to the value of "SYNC START POS".
3) Select the {VARIABLE} - {DOUBLE} menu, and add 500000 to the value of D001.
NOTE Teaching position is set to the value of D000 (SYPICK), or D001

(SYPLACE) (unit : micrometer).
11-75
156225-1CD 423/532
1350mm
When the work gets to the teaching position specified by

SYPICK (1000mm), the MPP3 robot starts picking the
work. When the conveyor is moved -500mm in the
traveling direction, the teaching position is needed to
add 500mm.
The user coordinate is set

on the conveyor origin
position. The difference
from the origin position to
the robot is 1350mm.
1000mm
The robot positions (in the user coordinate)

in picking works at the teaching position are
set to from P001 to P300.
11-76
156225-1CD 424/532
 Setting the size and speed of the conveyors

If needed, the location of the conveyors is changed.
For details of the Conveyor Setting dialog, refer to section Section "7.7.1 Adding a Conveyor"
about conveyor registration.
Procedure
1. On the [Contoller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Settings]
button, the [Conveyor Setting] dialog appears.
2. Select the conveyor number to change.

3. Set the [L(mm)], [D(mm)], [H(mm)] of Model info.
4. Set the [Speed (mm/s)] of Motion info, and click the [OK] button.
 Location of the works

Set the information (ex. size of work, work interval on the conveyor, ...) , and models are
created automatically.
Procedure
1. Select the "FS100" to the current controller.
2. On the [Contoller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Settings] but-
ton, the [Conveyor Setting] dialog appears.
3. Select the conveyor No.1, and click the [More] button to display [Model Creation for
High-Speed Picking] section.
4. Set the work size to the [Width(mm)] and [Height(mm)].
5. Set the works position on the conveyor in the [Pick Position] list.
6. Click the [Make] button, the work models are added on the CONVEYOR-NO1.
For example, to set the works on the conveyor as below, the following procedure is
operated.
• Works size : Width 100 mm × Height 100 mm
• The number of works : 5
11-77
156225-1CD 425/532
• Work interval : 200mm
200mm 200mm 200mm 200mm

100mm
Travel Direction
100mm
(1) Set the [Work] as below,

[Width(mm)] 100.000
[Height(mm)] 100.000
(2) Set the [Work Position Batch Input] as below,
[X(mm)] 200.000
[Y(mm)] 0.000
[R(deg)] 0.000
[Number] 5
Uncheck the [Alternation Y] checkbox and the [Alternation R] checkbox.
(3) Click the [Input Work Position] button, and click the [OK] button in the displayed con-
firmation dialog box. The work locations are set in the [Pick Position] list.
(4) Click the [Make] button.
For detail of the dialog, refer to " Location of the works " in the section "11.9.2 Advanced
Setting".
 Location of the pallets

Set the information (ex. size of pallet, work interval on the pallet, ...) , and models are created
automatically.
Procedure
1. Select the "FS100" to the current controller.
11-78
156225-1CD 426/532
2. On the [Contoller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Settings] but-
ton, the [Conveyor Setting] dialog appears.
3. Select the conveyor No.2, and click the [More] button to display [Model Creation for
High-Speed Picking] section.
4. Set the pallet size to the [W(mm)] and [L(mm)].
5. Set the works position on the conveyor in the [Pick Position] list.
6. Set the pallet interval on the conveyor and the number of interval to the [X(mm)] and
[Number].
7. Click the [Make] button, the pallet models are added on the CONVEYOR-NO2.
For example, to set the pallets on the conveyor as below, the following procedure is
operated.
• Pallet size : Width 110mm × Length 130mm
• The number of pallets : 5
• Pallet interval : 200mm
• 1 work per pallet
110mm
Y
X
Travel Direction
130mm
200mm
(1) Set the [Pallet] as below,

[W(mm)] 110.000
[L(mm)] 130.000
(2) Set the first line of [Place Position] list as below,
[X(mm)] -50.000
[Y(mm)] 0.000
[Z(mm)] 0.000
[R(deg)] 0.00
(3) Set the [Interval] in the [Pallet Position] section as below,
[X(mm)] 200.000
[Number] 5
(4) Click the [Make] button.
For detail of the dialog, refer to " Location of the pallets " in the section "11.9.2 Advanced
11-79
156225-1CD 427/532
Setting".
 Playback
1. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Reset] button.
2. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Start] button.
NOTE The [START] button of the virtual pendant can not use high-speed picking simulation
function. Please execute the job with the above procedure.
11-80
156225-1CD 428/532
11.10.2 Advanced Setting

This section describes other settings used by high-speed picking simulation function.
 Location of the works

1. In the [Conveyor setting] dialog, the width and height is set to [Work].
Width
Heght Width
2. In the [Conveyor setting] dialog, to edit the [Pick Position] list, various work locations
are enabled. The works are located on the conveyor, as many as of the number of lines
in the [Pick Position] list.
• When the value is set to the [Y(mm)] in the [Pick Position] list as below, the works are
located from side to side.
Travel Direction
50mm
-50mm
11-81
156225-1CD 429/532
• When the value is set to the [R(deg)] in the [Pick Position] list as below, the rotated
works are located.
Travel Direction
30°
-30°
3. The [Pick Position] list can be set automatically with [Work Position Batch Input].
• The upper limit of the number of works is 300.

NOTE • Once works increases, the playback might be slower.
• When the values are set to the [Y(mm)] and [R(deg)] of the [Interval] and the [Input
Work Position] button is clicked, that values are set to the [Y(mm)] and [R(deg)] of all
lines in the [Pick Position] list.
If the [Input Work Position] button is clicked with the above setting, the works are
located as below.
11-82
156225-1CD 430/532
• When the [Alternation Y] checkbox and the [Alternation R] checkbox are checked and
the [Input Work Position] button is clicked, the values are set to the [Y(mm)] and
[R(deg)] of all lines in the [Pick Position] list with alternating positive and negative val-
ues.
If the [Input Work Position] button is clicked with the above setting, the works are
located as below.
 Location of the pallets

1. In the [Conveyor setting] dialog, the length of W direction and L direction are set to
[Pallet].
W L
2. In the [Conveyor setting] dialog, the number of pallets and the intervals are set to [Pal-
let].
200mm 200mm 200mm
3. In the [Conveyor setting] dialog, the work locations on a pallet are set to the [Place
Position] list. This setting is applied to the all pallets. Set the locations of the center of
works from pallet origin position to the [Place Position] list.
11-83
156225-1CD 431/532
• When one work is placed on the pallet, set the value to the [Place Position] list as
below.
Set the value "width of work × (-0.5)" to the [X(mm)] of the first line.
-50mm X
• When two works are placed on the pallet back and forth, set the values to the [Place
Position] list as below.
Set the value "width of work × (-0.5)" to the [X(mm)] of the first line, and set the value
"width of work × (-1.5) - the width of clearance" to the [X(mm)] of the second line. In
the below setting, the width of clearance is 1mm.
-152mm -50mm X
• When two works are placed on the pallet right and left, set the values to the [Place
Position] list as below.
Set the value "width of work × 0.5 + the width of clearance" to the [Y(mm)] of the first
line, and set the value "width of work × (-0.5) - the width of clearance" to the [Y(mm)]
of the second line.
52mm
Y
-52mm
• When two works are placed on the pallet one above the other, set the values to the
[Place Position] list as below.
Set 0 to the [Z(mm)] of the first line, and set "height of work" to the [Z(mm)] of the sec-
ond line.
100mm
Z
0mm
X
11-84
156225-1CD 432/532
• When one work are rotated and placed on the pallet, set the values to the [R(deg)] in
the [Place Position] list as below.
45°Y
 Changing the timing of stream

If the [Start(mm)] in the [Conveyor Setting] dialog is changed, the timing of stream of works
(CONVEYOR-NO1) or pallets (CONVEYOR-NO2) can be changed.
To set the timing of pallets slower than that of works, shift the [Start(mm)] of the CONVEYOR-
NO2 to the minus direction. To set the timing of pallets faster than that of works, shift the
[Start(mm)] of the CONVEYOR-NO2 to the plus direction. Note that the [Start(mm)] of the
conveyors is set the negative value certainly. And, the same setting is enabled in setting the
[Start(mm)] of the CONVEYOR-NO1.
• When the [Start(mm)] of the CONVEYOR-NO2 is shifted to the minus direction, the timing
is as below.
• When the [Start(mm)] of the CONVEYOR-NO2 is shifted to the plus direction, the timing is
as below.
Procedure
1. On the [Contoller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Settings]
button, the [Conveyor Setting] dialog appears.
2. Set the [Start(mm)] of the [Motion info], and click the [OK] button.
11-85
156225-1CD 433/532
 Hand control signal setting

When the SYPICK/SYPLACE instructions are used, it needs that the general output signals
are allocated for hand #1 to #4, to turn the hand (ex. vacuum pads) ON/OFF. That allocation is
set in the [HAND CONTROL SIGNAL] display of the virtual pendant.
In the template "MPP3_PICKING", OT OUTPUT 1 is allocated for Hand #1.

If needed, set the values to the [ON TIME] and the [OFF TIME].
For details, please refer to "FS100 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS SUPPLEMENTARY FOR
CONVEYOR SYNCHRONIZED FUNCTION CONTINUOUS OPERATION CONVEYOR
SYNCHRONIZED FUNCTION".
11-86
156225-1CD 434/532
11.10.3 Specifications of template cell "MPP3_PICKING"

 Job for high-speed picking simulation
To simulate high-speed picking, the "SYPICK-SYPLACE" job is used.
0000 NOP
0001 DOUT OT#(1) OFF
0002 DOUT OT#(5) OFF
0003 TIMER T=0.010
0004 DOUT OT#(5) ON // initialize of work model location
0005 SET I000 1 // initialize of work counter
0006 SET I001 301 // initialize of pallet counter
0007 CVQUE CV#(1) // clear conveyor queue (pick)
0008 CVQUE CV#(2) // clear conveyor queue (place)
0009 SYEND CV#(1)
0010 SYEND CV#(2)
0011 MOVL V=1000.0 // move to the standby position
0012 *LOOP
0013 SYPICK P[I000] V=3350.0 CV#(1) SFTA:P000 STP=1000.000 OL=0.0
CTP=D000 HAND#1 T=0.100 FLAG:B000
0014 CVQUE CV#(1)
0015 SYPLACE P[I001] V=3350.0 CV#(2) SFTA:P000 STP=1000.000 OL=0.0
CTP=D001 HAND#1 T=0.100 FLAG:B000
0016 INC I000 // add 1 to work counter
0017 INC I001 // add 1 to pallet counter
0018 JUMP *LEND IF I000>I002 // determine if SYPICK continues
0019 JUMP *LOOP IF I001<=I003 // determine if SYPLACE continues
0020 CVQUE CV#(2)
0021 SET I001 301// initialize of pallet counter
0022 JUMP *LOOP IF I000<=I002 // determine if SYPICK continues
0023 *LEND
0024 MOVL V=1000.0 // move to the standby position
0025 END
11-87
156225-1CD 435/532
 Variable allocation list

In this template cell, the below variables are used.
Variable Default Description
I000 is used to the counter to access P001 to P300. It is

I000 1 initialized to 1 at the beginning of job, and be added 1 with
each execution of SYPICK.
I001 is used to the counter to access P301 to P600. It is

initialized to 301 at the beginning of job, and be added 1 with
I001 301 each execution of SYPLACE.
And, It is initialized to 301 when one pallet becomes filled
with the works.
I002 is compared with I000 for loop condition for the job.
I002 10
In creating the work models, it is set the number of works.
I003 is compared with I001 for loop condition for the job.
I003 302 In creating the pallet models, it is set "the number of works
placed per pallet + 300".
D000 is set the teaching position of SYPICK instruction (unit:

D000 1000000
micrometer). Edit it if needed.
D001 is set the teaching position of SYPLACE instruction

D001 1000000
(unit: micrometer). Edit it if needed.
X0, Y0, Z-150 P000 is set the value of [SHIFT(A)] of SYPICK/SYPLACE

P000
Rx0, Ry0, Rz0 instruction. Edit it if needed.
From P001 to P300 are used for [P-VAR ROBOT] of SYPICK

instruction.
P001 - P300 ―
In creating the work models, it is set the picking position
based on the user frame #1.
From P301 to P600 are used for [P-VAR ROBOT] of

SYPLACE instruction.
P301 - P600 ―
In creating the pallet models, it is set the picking position
based on the user frame #2.
 IO allocation list
In this template cell, the below IO signals are used.
Variable Default Description
OT1 is used to turn the hand ON/OFF with

SYPICK?SYPLACE instruction. It outputs ON with SYPICK
OT1 OFF instruction, and outputs OFF with SYPLACE instruction.
Then the model script [SYPICK] or [SYPLACE] is called by
IO event, the work model is replaced.
OT5 outputs ON at the beginning of the job. Then the model

OT5 OFF script [SYINIT] is called by IO event, the work models
locations are initialized.
11-88
156225-1CD 436/532
11.11 Converting a MotoSim EG cell to MotoSim EG-VRC
11.11Converting a MotoSim EG cell to MotoSim EG-VRC
MotoSim EG-VRC can convert and load files created by MotoSim EG but cannot playback the
job and the robot operations are limited. The MotoSim EG robot should be replace by the
VRC corresponding robot type. You can transfer the robot tooling and jobs to the new
controller.
Procedure
1. Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ), and select the [Open] - [Open] menu.
2. In the “File Type” field select “MotoSim EG cell (*.cel)”. And then select the MotoSim
EG cell to be converted. Press [Open].
3. When the convertion confirmation message below appears, select “Yes” to convert the
file to a “MotoSim EG-VRC (*.vcl)” file. The cell will display normally but the robot is
still a “MotoSim EG” robot and will have limited operation.
11-89
156225-1CD 437/532
4. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [New] button, the new controller
can be created. 
In the “Create Controller with...” dialog select “No CMOS.BIN file”. Proceed to add the
controller as per the procedure of section 7.1.2 “Create Controller without CMOS.BIN
file”.
In the initialization step at the “CONTROL GROUP” screen, select the robot type that
matches the “MotoSim EG” robot of the cell.
Complet the procedure.
Old MotoSimEG robot New VRC robot
5. Once the VRC controller and robot has been added, transfer all robot tooling model
from the MotoSim EG robot to the VRC robot using the models “Set Parent” function
from the CAD tree. (For details, refer to section Section "9.9.2 Moving the Parent
Model".)
11-90
156225-1CD 438/532
6. You can set the location of the VRC robot to overlap the MotoSim EG robot. (For
details, refer to section Section "9.5 Positioning a Model".)
Overlapping
robot
7. Delete the “MotoSim EG” robot from the cell. (For details, refer to section Section "7.3
Deleting a Controller".) Save the cell.
8. Using “Windows Explorer”, copy the job files (.JBI) and condition files (TOOL.CND,
UFRAME.CND...) from the MotoSim EG robot folder to the VRC controller “Storage
Card” folder.
9. Load the transfered files into the VRC controller. (For details, refer to section Section
"A.3.3 Load controller data to MotoSim EG-VRC")
Unlike Windows, the VRC controller is case sensitive for the file names. Condition file
NOTE names need to be entered with all capital letters or they will not be detected in the “Storage
Card” folder. If this is not the case, rename the file name with Windows Explorer so that
the names are written in capital letters.
11-91
156225-1CD 439/532
11.12 Spot High Speed Spec Function
11.12Spot High Speed Spec Function
Set the spot high speed spec function for the robot, and it explains the procedure for the
simulation of spot high speed spec function
• This simulation of the spot high speed spec function is a function that can be used only
with the following controller.
Controller Types : DX200/DX100
System Version : DX200 : Since DN1.01-00
DX100 : Since DS3.20-00
• This simulation of the spot high speed spec function is a function that can be used only
with the following robots
DX200 Only spot welding model.
DX100.
ES0165D-A0* ES0165D-A2* ES0165D-B0*
ES0165D-C0* ES0165D-E0* ES0165D-F0*
ES0165D-X0* ES0200D-A0* ES0200D-A2*
ES0200D-B0* ES0200D-C0* ES0200D-X0*
MS0080W-A0* MS0080W-A2* MS0080W-B0*
• The simulation of spot gun change system is not supported.

When the CMOS.BIN of the real controller is used to create the environment, delete the
guns other than S1 by the Maintenance Mode of the virtual pendant.
Ex.) When the gun change system has S1, S2, S3, and S4, S2, S3, and S4 have to
be deleted. To delete the guns other than S1, select the {SYSTEM} -
NOTE {SETTING} - {CONTROL GROUP} with the Maintenance Mode of the virtual
pendant.
About S2, S3, and S4, Select

{DETAIL} – {SELECT} – {NONE} to
delete the gun.
11-92
156225-1CD 440/532
Procedure
1. A new controller for the simulation of the spot welding is registered by the operational
procedure of Section "11.8 Setting of spot welding simulation". In this case, select the
controller and robot as the above NOTE.
2. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Maintenance mode] button, the
[Maintenance mode] dialog appears.
3. From the Virtual Pendant main menu select {SYSTEM} - {SETUP} - {OPTION FUNC-
TION}.
4. Select the "Spot High Speed Spec" and set its value to "Used". When the confirmation
message displays, select "Yes" to make the change
5. In the case of DX200, proceed the step 7 next.

In the case of DX100, Select the "Detail" of "Gun Arm Control".
11-93
156225-1CD 441/532
6. Select the "Func." and set its value to "Enable". When the confirmation message dis-
plays, select "Yes" to make the change.
7. Click the "End" button of the "VRC Maintenance Mode" dialog.
11-94
156225-1CD 442/532
11.13 Setting of Paint workpiece supplying system "MOTOFEEDER"
11.13Setting of Paint workpiece supplying system

"MOTOFEEDER"
The MOTOFEEDER is the turntable-typed workpiece supplying equipment with the external
2-axis structure.
The operation including the paint operation can be performed by setting the initial settings,
and creating paint programs.
This section describes the procedure from the initial settings to the playback.
• MOTOFEEDER can be used only with the bellow controller.

NOTE Controller : NX100
System Version : NS5.09-45
• Only one MOTOFEEDER can be registered per controller.
The procedure of MOTOFEEDER registration is as below.

System Construction
MOTOFEEDER model setting
Relocation of robot and MOTOFEEDER
Master job Registration
Teaching
Paint job creating and registering
Playback
Playback the paint job
11-95
156225-1CD 443/532
11.13.1 Controller Initialization

The large rotary axis S1 and small rotary axis S2 are set as station axes.
When the controller is initialized, the control group is set as one robot (R1) and two station
axes (S1, S2).
Procedure
1. Proceed to the step 1and 2 of Section "7.1.1 Create a New VRC Controller (no file)" to
create a new VRC controller".
Select "NS5.09-45" system version from "NX100". Operation is finished, the VRC
Controller starts in maintenance mode.
2. Follow the procedure of section Section "7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200,
DX100, NX100)".
When asked for the "Control Group", select the model to suit the actual robot system
as a guide for the following table.
11-96
156225-1CD 444/532
Model registration on the VRC controller

Actual robot system
R1 S1 S2
Arm Length: 1600mm, With Manipulator,

EPX1250
High-Speed Rotation Specification

EPX1250
Arm Length: 1400mm, Without Manipulator,

EPX1250 / EPX2050 MF218A-S2

EPX1250 / EPX2050

EPX1250 / EPX2050
MF418A-S1
EPX1250
Heavy Load Specification

EPX1250

EPX1250 / EPX2050 MF418A-S2

EPX1250 /EPX2050

EPX1250 / EPX2050
• Registration of R1
MOTOFEEDER is registered in combination with EPX1250 or EPX2050, so select
"EPX1250-A00*" or "EPX2050-A3**", "EPX2050-A5**", or "EPX2050-B5**". For With-
Manipulator Specification, EPX1250 is available only.
• Registration of S1
Select "MF418A-S1".
• Registration of S2
For High-Speed Rotation Specification, select "MF218A-S2". For Heavy Load
Specification, select "MF418A-S2".
3. Set the value in the Connect display as a guide for the following table.
11-97
156225-1CD 445/532
• EPX1250
SV CN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
R1 #1 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 - -
S1 #1 1 - - - - - - - -
S2 #1 - - - - - - 1 -
TU BRK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
#1 - 1 2 3 4 5 6 - - CV - 1 1 1 1 1 1 - -
#1 1 - - - - - - - - CV 1 - - - - - - - -
#1 1 - - - - - - - CV - - - - - - 1 -
• EPX2050
SV CN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
R1 #1 1 2 3 4 5 6 - - -
S1 #1 - - - - - - 1 - -
S2 #1 - - - - - - 1 -
TU BRK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
#1 1 2 3 4 5 6 - - - CV 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - -
#1 - - - - - - 1 - - CV - - - - - - 2 - -
#1 - - - - - - 1 - CV - - - - - - 3 -
4. Set "ROTATION DIRECTION" of S1 and S2 to "REVERSE" in the motor spec display.
5. Set "APPLICATION" to "PAINT" in the application display. Then, press the [ENTER]
button as default setting again, until controller initializing is finished.
11-98
156225-1CD 446/532
11.13.2 MOTOFEEDER model setting

After controller setting is finished, the Robot Settings dialog box is displayed. Set the
MOTOFEEDER model to "Robot Model File" of ST1.
Procedure
1. Robots\NX100\MF-Family" folder under the MotoSim EG-VRC install folder contains
Robot models of MOTOFEEDER. Select the model file (robotinf.dat) to "Robot Model
File" of ST1 as a guide for the following table.
Model registration on the VRC controller Model File Folder
Arm Length: 1600mm, With Manipulator, High-Speed Rotation

MF216A
Specification

MF216A_SPINDLE
Specification (with spindle unit)

MF218A
Specification

MF218A_SPINDLE
Specification(with Spindle unit)
Arm Length: 1400mm, Without Manipulator, High-Speed Rotation

MF214B
Specification

MF214B_SPINDLE
Specification(with spindle unit)

MF216B
Specification

MF216B_SPINDLE

MF218B
Specification

MF218B_SPINDLE
Arm Length: 1600mm, With Manipulator, Heavy Load Specification MF416A
11-99
156225-1CD 447/532
Arm Length: 1800mm, With Manipulator, Heavy Load Specification MF418A
Arm Length: 1400mm, Without Manipulator, Heavy Load Specification MF414B
2. After set "Robot Model File" of S1, press the [OK] button without setting "Robot Model
File" of S2.
3. Virtual pendant restarts. Then, the "The initialization file of a controller is loaded" dialog
box is displayed, press the [OK] button.
11.13.3 Relocation of robot and MOTOFEEDER

When the robot is displayed, relocate the robot model and MOTOFEEDER model in the
CADTREE dialog box.
The robot model and MOTOFEEDER model are registered as below.
When relocate them, relocate the dummy model of MOTOFEEDER as below.
 With Manipulator Specification
The dummy model "(Controller Name)-MF" is

created. Robot model and MOTOFEEDER model
are registered under the dummy model.
 Without Manipulator Specification
The dummy model "(Controller Name)-MF" is

created. MOTOFEEDER model is registered under
the dummy model. Robot model is registered under
the world model.
11.13.4 Master job Registration

The paint operation of MOTOFEEDER and robot is performed with the prepared control job
and the created paint job. The prepared job calls the created paint job. So, the prepared Job
needs to be registered as Master Job.
The prepared control job has already loaded, register it as below.
11-100
156225-1CD 448/532
Procedure
1. Select {JOB} - {CTRL MASTER} on the virtual pendant.
2. Press the [Space] key at MASTER of MASTER JOB, select "SETTING MASTER JOB"
and press the [Space] key.
3. Select "MASTER.JBI", and press the [Space] key.
11.13.5 Paint job creating and registering

Create the paint job as usage. (Refer to manual "MOTOFEEDER OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS" about the procedure of creating the paint job.)
To perform the operation including the MOTOFEEDER motion, register the created paint job
in the registration table.
Procedure
1. Select {JOB} - {JOB REGISTRATION} on the virtual pendant.
2. Press the [Space] key at "JOB NAME" and select the paint job from job list.
Set the paint job for the small rotary axis A: No. 0001, and set the paint job for the small
rotary axis B: No. 0002.
Select {TABLE NUMBER: 1}
Register the paint job for the

small rotate axis A
Register the paint job for the

small rotate axis B
 Without Spindle Unit Specification

The job "SAMPLE1" has already loaded. (Control Group: R1 + S2)
Set the "SAMPLE1" to No.001 and No.002, you can see the MOTOFEEDER motion of
"SAMPLE1".
11-101
156225-1CD 449/532
 With Spindle Unit Specification

The job "SAMPLE2" has already loaded. (Control Group: R1)
Set the "SAMPLE2" to No.001 and No.002, you can see the MOTOFEEDER motion of
"SAMPLE2".
11.13.6 Playback the paint job

To execute the paint job, use the MOTOFEEDER Operation BOX.
Select {Tool} - {I/O Monitor}, to display the Virtual I/O dialog box, and select the
MOTOFEEDER Operation BOX.
After starting playback, press the button of Operating BOX, and the paint job is executed.
Item Description
[START] button The large rotary axis rotates, and the paint job is executed.
[COMPLETE] button The large rotary axis rotates. But, the paint job is not executed.
[Close work injection door] Check this check box, the input of safeguarding is "ON". When
checkbox execute playback, this check box needs to be checked.
[Continuation of a button Check this check box, keep the START button or the COMPLETE
push] button button pressed.
11-102
156225-1CD 450/532
12.1 Motor Load Estimate
12 Options
NOTE The additional options sold separately are needed in order to use the following option
functions of MotoSim EG-VRC or MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack.
The estimate torque (the unit: The rated torque is displayed as 100%) and speed (the unit:
rpm) of each axis are displayed after the playback of the robot in a wavy graph.
And, an arbitrary DUTY calculation in the section and the step of the job can be retrieved from
the wavy graph.
On the [Option Function] tab, in the [Estimate] group, click the [Motor Load Estimate] button,
the [Motor Load Estimate] dialog appears.
• YASKAWA does not warrant the result of this function. It should be used only as a guide.
Because it is affected by Tool settings, Load condition of real robot, Lubricated condition
of grease, and Temperature. 
Configure the following items of Tool setting collectly, Weight, Position of the center of
gravity, and Inertia moment. Especially, when Weight item of Tool setting is set lower
than real tool weight, this function makes wrong results.
• A wavy graph is an estimated torque when the job is executed. Therefore, the torque in
NOTE
the interruption (ex. the emergency stop) is not included.
• This function can be used only with the robot axes (external axes are not included).
• This function cannot be used with two or more robot system other than a dual-arm robot.
• This function can be used only with the specified system version of controllers, and this
function can be used only with target robots of Motor Load Estimate with that system
version. Please refer to section "13.5 List of Function depending on the system version
of controller".
12-1
156225-1CD 451/532
Select the robot that displays Search the step

the torque estimate. of the job.
Select the axis that displays the Torque estimate

torque estimate. display area.
Motor Load Estimate
Item Description
[SpeedGraph] check box The speeds of each axis are displayed.
The display range (horizontal axis and spindle) in a wavy graph and
[GraphSetting] button
the re-drawing intervals and the torque threshold are set.
The torque data every drawing time set with HartBeat is saved in text
[Save] button
file (.TXT). Please refer to Section "7.5.4 Refresh Interval".
[Close] button The Torque Estimate display is closed.
The vertical scale of left-side is torque, and right-side is speed.
12-2
156225-1CD 452/532
Procedure
1. On the [Option Function] tab, in the [Estimate] group, click the [Motor Load Estimate]
button, the [Motor Load Estimate] dialog appears.
2. Select the robot that displays the torque estimate.
12-3
156225-1CD 453/532
3. The job is executed, and the torque estimate of the selected robot is displayed.
4. Select the axis that displays the torque estimate in the check box of the axis. (The axis
can be selected even before the job is executed.)
12-4
156225-1CD 454/532
5. Check the [SpeedGraph] box, the graphs of each axis speed are displayed with a dot-
ted line.
 Duty calculation
1. Check the [DUTY Calc] check box.
12-5
156225-1CD 455/532
2. Pick the measurement beginning point.
Pick the measurement

beginning point.
3. Pick the measurement end point.
Pick the measurement

end point.
12-6
156225-1CD 456/532
4. The measurement result is displayed.
 Step Search
1. Check the [STEP Search] box.
2. Pick the point where it wants to search the step.
Pick the point where it

wants to search the step.
12-7
156225-1CD 457/532
3. The step number is displayed, and robot moves to the searched position.
12-8
156225-1CD 458/532
 Torque Threshold Setting

To set the torque threshold, the threshold is displayed on the graph. It can be checked
whether the presumed torque of each axis is over the threshold value during the playback has
been exceeded.
1. Click the [GraphSetting] button, and enter the value of [Torque Threshold] in the dialog.
2. The Threshold value is displayed in the graph area with a dotted red line.
Torque Threshold
3. After the playback of a job, if the presumed torque exceeded the threshold value, the
dialog will be displayed as follows.
12-9
156225-1CD 459/532
 Graph Setting
The display range (horizontal axis and spindle) in the torque estimate display area (wavy
graph) and the re-drawing intervals are set.
Graph Setting
Item Description
Maximum value (ms) of a horizontal axis in a wavy graph and the

Side
number of scales are set.
Maximum value (%) of the spindle in a torque wavy graph and the
Length(Torque) number of scales are set. The number of scale is as common as
Length(Speed).
Maximum value (rpm) of the spindle in a speed wavy graph and the
Length(Speed) number of scales are set. As for the number of scales, a setup of
Length(Torque) is reflected.
Refresh interval (1-20) The interval of the re-drawing time of a wavy graph is set.
Torque Threshold(%) The threshold of torque is set.
A set value of each item is reflected. (The Graph Setting doesn't

[OK] button
close. )
[Close] button The Graph Setting is close.
 Target robots for Moter Load Estimate

DX100
Robot Type
Model Name Remarks
(Model File Name)
EP4000D EP4000D-J72 Added at Ver2.80
EP4000D EP4000D-K72 Added at Ver2.80
EP4000D EP4000D-L72 Added at Ver2.80
EPH130D EPH130D-A00 Added at Ver2.80
EPH130RLD PH13RLD-A00 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-JA0 Added at Ver2.80
12-10
156225-1CD 460/532
Robot Type
Model Name Remarks
(Model File Name)
EPH4000D EPH400D-KA0 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-LA0 Added at Ver2.80
ES165D ES0165D-A00 Added at Ver2.60
HP20D HP0020D-A00 Added at Ver2.81
MH5LS MH005LS-A00 Added at Ver2.80
MH5S MH0005S-A00 Added at Ver5.00
MH50 MH00050-A00 Added at Ver5.00
MH250 MH00250-B00 Added at Ver2.80
MPK2 MPK0002-B01 Added at Ver2.60
SDA5D SDA005D-A00 Added at Ver4.00
SDA10D SDA010D-B00 Added at Ver2.80
SIA5D SIA005D-A00 Added at Ver4.00
SIA20D SIA020D-Y00 Added at Ver2.81
FS100
Robot Type
Model Name Remarks
(Model File Name)
MHJ MH0000J-A00 Added at Ver2.80
MH3F MH0003F-A00 Added at Ver2.72
MH5LF MH005LF-A00 Added at Ver2.80
MPK2F MPK002F-A00 Added at Ver2.60
MPP3 MPP0003-A00 Added at Ver2.60
SDA5F SDA005F-A00 Added at Ver4.00
SIA5F SIA005F-A00 Added at Ver4.00
12-11
156225-1CD 461/532
12.2 Life Estimate
12.2 Life Estimate
Life estimate value of each reducer (Unit: Hour) is displayed when playback is executed.
• YASKAWA does not warrant the result of this function. It should be used only as a guide.
Because it is affected by Tool settings, Load condition of real robot, Lubricated condition
of grease, and Temperature. 
Configure the following items of Tool setting collectly, Weight, Position of the center of
gravity, and Inertia moment. Especially, when Weight item of Tool setting is set lower
than real tool weight, this function makes wrong results.
• This function estimates the life of reducers from the normal result of playback.
NOTE Therefore, the result of playback with interruption (ex. the emergency stop) is not
included.
• This function can be used only with the robot axes. (external axes are not included.)
• This function cannot be used with two or more robot system other than a dual-arm robot.
• This function can be used only with the specified system version of controllers, and this
function can be used only with target robots of Life Estimate with that system version.
Please refer to section "13.5 List of Function depending on the system version of
controller".
Select the robot that displays the

life estimate.
Life Estimate
Item Description
The result of Life Estimate, the used torque data, the used gravity
[Save CSV] button
moment, and the used speed data are saved in text file (.csv).
12-12
156225-1CD 462/532
12.2 Life Estimate
Life Estimate
Item Description
The result of Life Estimate, the used torque data, the used gravity
[Clipboard] button
moment, and the used speed data are copied to the clipboard.
[Close] button The Life Estimate display is closed.
Procedure
1. On the [Option Function] tab, in the [Estimate] group, click the [Life Estimate] button,
the [Life Estimate] dialog appears.
2. Select the robot estimated the reducer life.
3. The job is executed, and Average speed[rpm], Maximum speed[rpm], Average

torque[Nm], Maximum torque[Nm], and Speed Reducer Life[Hr] are displayed.
Reducer life time calculated by this function is that when the robot repeats this movement
with this cycletime. The displaying areas exist for 7 axes, but the displaying areas of the
NOTE Speed Reducer Life are displayed "0", when the axes are not working, the axes do not
exist, or the axes are not included in Life Estimate.
If the robot has overhaul time, the value of Speed Reducer Life is displayed as [xxx over]
(xxx is overhaul time), when it exceed overhaul time.
12-13
156225-1CD 463/532
12.2 Life Estimate
Axis is not working. Axes are not included Axes do not exist.
in Life Estimate.
 Target robots of Life Estimate

DX100
Robot Type
Model Name Remarks
(Model File Name)
EP4000D EP4000D-J72 Added at Ver2.80
EP4000D EP4000D-K72 Added at Ver2.80
EP4000D EP4000D-L72 Added at Ver2.80
EPH130D EPH130D-A00 Added at Ver2.80
EPH130RLD PH13RLD-A00 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-JA0 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-KA0 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-LA0 Added at Ver2.80
HP20D HP0020D-A00 Added at Ver2.81
MH5LS MH005LS-A00 Added at Ver2.80
MH5S MH0005S-A00 Added at Ver5.00
MH250 MH00250-B00 Added at Ver2.80
12-14
156225-1CD 464/532
12.2 Life Estimate
Robot Type
Model Name Remarks
(Model File Name)
SDA10D SDA010D-B00 Added at Ver2.80
SIA20D SIA020D-Y00 Added at Ver2.81
FS100
Robot Type
Model Name Remarks
(Model File Name)
MHJ MH0000J-A00 Added at Ver2.80
MH5LF MH005LF-A00 Added at Ver2.80
MPK2F MPK002F-A00 Added at Ver2.60
MPP3 MPP0003-A00 Added at Ver2.60
MPP3S MPP003S-A00 Added at Ver4.10
12-15
156225-1CD 465/532
A.1 Data Format
Appendix A
A.1 Data Format
This section describes the formats of model data files and cell data files.
 Model File (*.mdl)

There are eight parts available for MotoSim EG as described later in " Each Part Format " of
this section.
Data unit system is in millimeters (mm) and real numbers are available. Use decimal point as
required.
Model Color Settings

The color of each model can be set by using the basic color code function or using RGB.
The following describe each setting.
• RGB
RGB is created with the format RGB (0, 0, 0).
Each color proportion can be set by a number from 0 to 255.
RGB (0, 0, 0)
Sets the proportion of blue.
Sets the proportion of green.
Sets the proportion of red.
<E.g.> RGB(255,255,255) Color: White

RGB(255,0,0) Color: Red
RGB(0,255,0) Color: Green
RGB(0,0,255) Color: Blue
RGB(0,0,0) Color: Black
Basic Color Code (QB Color) Function
Setting a number from 0 to 15 displays its corresponding color.
For example, setting BOX (4, 2) creates a red BOX model.
Number Color Number Color

0 Black 8 Gray
1 Blue 9 Light blue
2 Green 10 Light green
3 Cyan 11 Light cyan
4 Red 12 Light red
5 Magenta 13 Light magenta
6 Yellow 14 Light yellow
7 White 15 Light white
A-1
156225-1CD 466/532
A.1 Data Format
Each Part Format

• BOX (color, num): Box form model
Described with data of width, length, height, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
BOX(RGB(255,0,0),2) Description
{
100.000,100.000,100.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 Width, length, height, 0, 0, 0
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
}
}
• BOX2 (color, num): Box form model

Described with data of width, length, height, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
BOX2(RGB(255,0,0),2) Description
{
100.000,100.000,100.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 Width, length, height, 0, 0, 0
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
}
}
• CYLINDER (color, num): Cylinder form model

Described with data of lower face diameter, upper face diameter, height, number of
divided faces, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
CYLINDER(RGB(255,0,0),2) Description
{
Lower face dia. height, No. of divided
200.000,100.000,16.000,100.000,0.000,0.000
faces, upper face dia., 0, 0
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
}
}
A-2
156225-1CD 467/532
A.1 Data Format
• CONE2 (color, num): Cone form model

Described with data of bottom diameter, height, number of divided faces, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry
and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
CONE2(RGB(255,0,0),2) Description
{
Bottom dia., height, No. of divided faces,
200.000,100.000,16.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
0, 0, 0
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
}
}
• SPHERE(color,num): Spherical model

Described with data of diameter, number of divided faces, X, Y and Z.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
SPHERE(RGB(255,0,0),2) Description
{
100.000,30.000,0,0,0,0 Diameter, No.of devided face, 0, 0, 0, 0
0.000,0.000,0.000,0,0,0 X, Y, Z, 0, 0, 0
}
}
• PIPE2 (color, num): Pipe form model

Described with data of lower face diameter, bottom plate thickness, upper face diameter,
upper plate thickness, height, number of divided faces, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
PIPE2(RGB(255,0,0),2) Description
{
Lower face dia., bottom plate thickness,
100.000,100.000,100.000,10.000,100.000,16.
upper face dia., upper plate thickness,
000
height, No. of divided faces
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
}
}
A-3
156225-1CD 468/532
A.1 Data Format
• AXIS6 (color, num): Model having information only of position and posture
Described with data of X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
“num” sets the number of target points.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
AXIS6(RGB(255,0,0),3) Description
{
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 Point1 (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz)
100.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 Point2 (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz)
200.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 Point3 (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz)
}
}
• LINE(color,num): Continuous line model

Described with data of X, Y and Z.
"num" sets the number of points.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
LINE(RGB(255,0,0),3) Description
{
0.000,0.000,0.000 Point1 (X, Y, Z)
100.000,200.000,300.000 Point2 (X, Y, Z)
500.000,235.000,111.000 Point3 (X, Y, Z)
}
}
• LINE2(color,num): Segmented line model

Described with data of X, Y and Z.
"num" sets the number of points.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
LINE2(RGB(255,0,0),4) Description
{
253.000,353.000,686.000 Segment 1 Start (X, Y, Z)
89.000,254.000,79.000 Segment 1 End (X, Y, Z)
413.000,3.000,99.000 Segment 2 Start (X, Y, Z)
917.000,524.000,-48.000 Segment 2 End (X, Y, Z)
}
}
A-4
156225-1CD 469/532
A.1 Data Format
• CUBE (color, num): Polygonal cube model

Data of polygonal cube are described with data of bottom and height.
A rectangular parallelepiped is composed of four points and one height, therefore, num is
5 in this case.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
CUBE(RGB(255,0,0),5) Description
{
0.000,0.000,0.000 Start point1 (X, Y, Z)(= End point 4)
100.000,0.000,0.000 End point1 (X, Y, Z)(= Start point 2)
0.000,0.000,100.000 Offset value (X, Y, Z)
}
}
• FLOOR (color, num): Floor form model

Describes a plane meshed data string.
Described with data of number of divided faces (vertical and horizontal) and frame data of
floor end point.

<Sample>
BLOCK
{
FLOOR(RGB(255,0,0),3) Description
{
No. of divided faces (X division No., Y
6.000,6.000,0.000
division No., 0)
-1500.000,-3000.000,0.000 Floor end point1 (X, Y, Z)
1500.000,3000.000,0.000 Floor end point2 (X, Y, Z)
}
}
A-5
156225-1CD 470/532
A.1 Data Format
• FACE (color, num): Face model

Describes a face with the frame data of X, Y, and Z of each point.
In this case the face model is composed of three points on the face and the data for X, Y,
Z, Rx, Ry and Rx, num is 4.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
FACE(RGB(255,128,0),4) Description
{
X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000 Face is created with the following three
points.
200.000,300.000,300.000,3,0,0 Point1 (X, Y, Z)
-200.000,300.000,300.000,0,0,0 Point2 (X, Y, Z)
-200.000,300.000,-300.000,0,0,0 Point3 (X, Y, Z)
}
}
A-6
156225-1CD 471/532
A.1 Data Format
 Cell File
When constructing a cell, a cell file is created. The following describe an example of a cell file
CELL_INIT
{
VERSION=1, 0, 0, 0
CONTROLLER(0)
{
PATH=%CELPATH%\NX100;
NAME=NX100;
RB1
{
NAME=HP6;
FILE=%CELPATH%\NX100\RB1\robotinf.dat;
}
TRACE
{
ROBOT=HP6;
}
}
MANIPULATOR
{
}
NSIMVIEW
{
CAMERAPOSITION=1.806423,3.445533,2.179023;
CAMERATARGET=0.594751,0.020004,0.705908;
CAMERAUPVECTOR=-0.161379,-0.341156,0.926049;
CAMERAFIELD=2.237789,1.568312;
USERVIEW
{
NO=0
NAME=
CAMERAPOSITION=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERATARGET=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERAUPVECTOR=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERAFIELD=0.000000,0.000000;
}
...
USERVIEW
{
NO=9
NAME=
CAMERAPOSITION=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERATARGET=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERAUPVECTOR=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERAFIELD=0.000000,0.000000;
}
}
NSIMLIGHT
{
LIGHT
{
NO=0
DEFINE=1;
ONOFF=1;
TYPE=0;
COLOR=RGB(255,255,255);
A-7
156225-1CD 472/532
A.1 Data Format
LIGHTPOSITION=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
LIGHTTARGET=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
SCALLING=100.000000;
}
...
LIGHT
{
NO=4
DEFINE=0;
ONOFF=0;
TYPE=0;
COLOR=RGB(255,255,255);
LIGHTPOSITION=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
LIGHTTARGET=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
SCALLING=100.000000;
}
}
}
MODEL_INIT
{
MODEL
{
NAME=FLOOR;
PARENT=world;
FILENAME=%CELPATH%\models\floor.mdl;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=0.50;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,0,0,0,0;
}
MODEL
{
NAME=Teacher;
PARENT=world;
FILENAME=dummy;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=256;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,0,0,0,0;
}
MODEL
{
NAME=HP6;
PARENT=world;
FILENAME=%CELPATH%\NX100\RB1\robotinf.dat;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,450,0,0,0;
}
MODEL
{
NAME=HP6_LK0;
PARENT=HP6_rm;
FILENAME=%CELPATH%\NX100\RB1\HP6_LK0.hsf;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,-450,90,0,90;
A-8
156225-1CD 473/532
A.1 Data Format
}
MODEL
{
NAME=HP6_LK1;
PARENT=HP6_link1;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,0,90,0,90;
}
...
MODEL
{
NAME=HP6_LK6;
PARENT=HP6_link6;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,0,0,0,0;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6_rm;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6_link1;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
...
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6_link6;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6_flange;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6_tcp;
HIDESEE=257;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
}
PAIR_INIT
{
}
A-9
156225-1CD 474/532
A.1 Data Format
1) VERSION Command
• VERSION=1, 0, 0, 0
Describes the MotoSim EG version.
2) CONTROLLER Command
The CONTROLLER command describes data concerning controllers.
• CONTROLLER(0)
Describes the Controller No. 0.
When more than one controller is used, the controllers are provided with numbers 
CONTROLLER(0), CONTROLLER(1), CONTROLLER(2) .
• PATH=%CELPATH%\NX100;
Describes the directory path to which the CONTROLLER refers.
This directory needs a “VRC.BIN” file.
• NAME=NX100;
Describes the name of the CONTROLLER.
• Control Group sub-commands (RB1, BS1,ST1)
The control group sub-commands describes data concerning control groups. There are
three type of control group RB for robot, BS for base station and ST for station. The type
is followed by an index number.
• NAME=HP6;
Describes the name of the control group.
• FILE=%CELPATH%\NX100\RB1\robotinf.dat;
Describes the directory path contraining the robot models and file containing infor-
mation on how the models are assemble together to make the robot.
• TRACE sub-command
Describes that trace points are displayed at playback.
• ROBOT=HP6;
Name of the robot (control group) being traced.
• MODEL=HP6_tcp;
Name of the model being traced. If not specified, the robot TCP model is traced.
• PARENT=world;
Describes the name of the parent model. If not specified, the parent is the “world”
model.
• POINTS=1000;
Description of the maximum number of trace points. If not specified, the value is
1000.
3) MANIPULATOR Command
The MANIPULATOR command describes functions to move models according to a robot axis
value. Mainly used to move secondary link model of a robot.
4) NSIMVIEW Command
The NSIMVIEW command describes data related to the camera viewpoint.
A-10
156225-1CD 475/532
A.1 Data Format
5) NSIMLIGHT Command
The NSIMLIGHT command describes data related to the light type and position.
6) MODEL_INIT Command
The MODEL_INIT command describes data concerning models.
• MODEL
Describes a MODEL.
• NAME=HP6-A00;
Describes the name of the MODEL.
• PARENT=world;
Describes the PARENT model of the MODEL.
• FILENAME=%CELPATH%\HP6-A00\HP6-A00-MDL.mdl;
Describes the directory path and MODEL file name to which the MODEL refers.
If no MODEL file exists, "dummy" is described.
• COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
Describes the color of the MODEL.
• HIDESEE=1;
Describes the display bit of the MODEL.
• OPACITY=1.00;
Describes the opacity of the MODEL.
• SCALE=1.000000;
Describes the scale factor of the MODEL.
• AXIS6=0,0,450,0,0,0;
Describes the relative coordinates to the MODEL PARENT.
• MODEL_RB
Describes a robot joint model. Robot joints model define the frame of a robot joint. Only
the NAME, HIDESEE and OPACITY values are defined (see above for description).
Default Models are:

• world
Starting point for all models. It does not appear.
• worldframe
Displays the world position with a frame.
• Teacher
Displays a frame to create a target coordinate on any point.
• FLOOR
Displays world XY plane.
7) PAIR_INIT Command
The PAIR_INIT command describes pairs of models that are checked for collision when the
collision detection function is active.
A-11
156225-1CD 476/532
A.2 Reading the CAD Data with MotoSim EG-VRC
A.2 Reading the CAD Data with MotoSim EG-VRC
The CAD data must be converted into a form readable for MotoSim EG-VRC before starting
the reading operation. The following flowchart shows the data conversion operations required
for MotoSim EG-VRC.
User system Intermediate Commercial Intermediate

CAD file CAD converter CAD file
MotoSim EG
CATIA V5,
SolidWorks, HSF
and other format
output-enabled
CAD data
Data formats
Other IGES, VRML, Commercial HSF
CAD data DXF, etc. CAD converter format
The CAD converters "PolyTrans" and "Inovate" are not included with MotoSim EG-VRC.
NOTE Prepare such application software before the operation.
PolyTrans: Okino Computer Graphics (http://www.okino.com)
Inovate: IRONCAD (http://www.ironcad.com)
A-12
156225-1CD 477/532
A.3 Storage Card
A.3 Storage Card
The FD/CF function of the Virtual Pendant is used to save or load MotoSim EG-VRC data
such as edited jobs, condition files, etc.
A.3.1 Folder Structure

The folder used to save or load data files is the “Storage Card” folder located under the
controller folder of the cell (for example in the figure below: \Cells\Test\NX100). Data saved or
loaded are put in this folder. Like with the real controller, it is possible to create sub-folder
under the “Storage Card” folder, and also load/save data from those folders.
When the button in the virtual pendant is clicked, the target folder can be opened.
MotoSimEG－VRC
CELLS
TEST
MODELS
NX100
RB1
Storage folder of file

saved/loaded with the
RB2 FC/CF Storage function
Storage Card
system
TEST.VCL
A-13
156225-1CD 478/532
A.3 Storage Card
A.3.2 Save controller data created with MotoSim EG-VRC

Procedure
1. Select {FD/CF} - {SAVE} from the Virtual Pendant main menu.
2. Select the type of data to be saved. For the figure below, {JOB} was selected. The list of
files (in this case, the list of jobs) will display.
3. Select the files to be saved by moving the cursor on the file name and, press the [Space-
bar] on the keyboard or click [Select] in the Virtual Pendant keypad. The selected files will
be marked by a star ★ mark on there left.
A-14
156225-1CD 479/532
A.3 Storage Card
4. Press [Enter]. Select [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box that will display. The selected
files will be saved in the “Storage Card”.
Files cannot be overwritten. If the files already exist, an error message will display. 
NOTE First delete the existing file or select a different folder, then proceed with the save 
operation.
A.3.3 Load controller data to MotoSim EG-VRC

Procedure
1. Select {FD/CF} - {LOAD} from the Virtual Pendant main menu.
2. Select the type of data to be saved. For the figure below, {JOB} was selected. The list of
files in the “Storage Card” folder (in this case, the list of jobs) will display.
Unlike Windows, the VRC controller is case sensitive for the file names. File names need
NOTE to be entered with all capital letters or they will not be detected in the “Storage Card” folder.
If this is not the case, rename the file name with Windows Explorer so that the names are
written in capital letters.
A-15
156225-1CD 480/532
A.3 Storage Card
3. Select the files to be loaded by moving the cursor on the file name and, press the [Space-
bar] on the keyboard or click [Select] on the Virtual Pendant keypad. The selected files will
be marked by a star ★ mark.
4. Press [Enter]. Select [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box that will display. The selected
files will be loaded to the MotoSim EG-VRC controller.
NOTE Job files cannot be loaded, if they already exist in the controller.
In such case, first rename or delete the existing job, then proceed with the load operation.
A-16
156225-1CD 481/532
A.4 Standard function about DX200
:Enable, :Display only, :Disable
Corresp
Main Menu Main Menu Item Menu Menu Item
ondence
JOB JOB JOB 
EDIT 
ARC INFORMATION
DISPLAY
(ARC)

UTILITY SETUP SPECIAL RUN 
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB 
MIRROR SHIFT 
PAM 
ARC SHIFT CANCEL
(ARC)

SELECT JOB JOB 
EDIT 
DISPLAY FOLDER 
CREATE NEW JOB 
MASTER JOB 
JOB CAPACITY 
CYCLE 
JOB EDIT(PLAY) JOB WRITING 
EDIT 
DISPLAY FOLDER 
PLAY EDIT JOB LIST JOB WRITING 
EDIT 
DISPLAY FOLDER 
VARIABLE 
IN/OUT EXTERNAL INPUT 
EXTERNAL OUTPUT 
UNIVERSAL INPUT 
UNIVERSAL OUTPUT 
SPECIFIC INPUT 
SPECIFIC OUTPUT 
RIN 
CPRIN 
REGISTER 
A-17
156225-1CD 482/532
Corresp
ondence
AUXILIARY RELAY 
CONTROL INPUT 
PSEUDO INPUT SIG 
NETWORK INPUT 
NETWORK OUTPUT 
ANALOG OUTPUT 
SV POWER STATUS 
LADDER PROGRAM 
I/O ALARM 
I/O MESSAGE 
REMOTE 
ANT. OUTPUT 
TERMINAL 
IO SIMULATION LIST 
SERVO ON FACTOR 
RB STOP FACTOR
MONITOR

ROBOT CURRENT POSITION 
COMMAND POSITION 
SERVO MONITOR 
WORK HOME POS 
SECOND HOME POS 
DROP AMOUNT 
POWER ON/OFF POS 
TOOL 
INTERFERENCE 
SHOCK SENS LEVEL 
USER COORDINATE 
HOME POSITION 
MANIPULATOR TYPE 
ANALOG MONITOR 
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR 
LIMIT RELEASE 
ARM CONTROL 
SHIFT VALUE 
SOFTLIMIT SETTING 
SHOCK SENS LV.
(CURRENT)

A-18
156225-1CD 483/532
Corresp
ondence
SYSTEM INFO VERSION 
MONITORING TIME 
CONTROLLER
INFORMATION

ALARM HISTORY 
I/O MSG HISTORY 
LOGDATA 
USER DEFINITION
MENU

SECURITY 
EX. MEMORY LOAD 
SAVE 
VERIFY 
DELETE 
FOLDER 
PARAMETER 
SETUP TEACHING COND. LANGUAGE LEVEL 
INSTRUCTION INPUT
LEARNING

MOVE INSTRUCTION
SET POSITION

BUZZER WHEN
POSITION TEACHING

STEP ONLY CHANGING 
RECT/CYLINDRICAL 
TOOL NO. SWITCH 
TOOL NO. INTERLOCK
FOR STEP ENTRY

CHECK AT P-VAR TOOL
NO. CHANGE

POS. TEACH ONLY JOG
CONTROL GROUP

JOB UNDELETE
FUNCTION

DATA RESET INSTRUCTION 
SPEED DATA INPUT
OPERATE COND.
FORM

CYCLE SWITCH IN
TEACH MODE

CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY
MODE

CYCLE SWITCH IN
LOCAL MODE

A-19
156225-1CD 484/532
Corresp
ondence
CYCLE SWITCH IN
REMOTE MODE

SET CYCLE ON POWER
ON

SECURITY MODE
WHEN POWER ON

JOB STEP WHEN
POWER ON

GENERAL OUT KEEP
WHEN POWER ON

OPERATE ENABLE EXTERNAL START 
PP START 
EXTERNAL MODE
SWITCH

EXTERNAL CYCLE
SWITCH

PP CYCLE SWITCH 
EXTERNAL SERVO ON 
PP SERVO ON 
DSW SERVO ON 
FUNCTION ENABLE MASTER JOB CHANGE 
RESERVED START 
RESERVED START JOB
CHANGE

JOB SELECT WHEN
PLAY MODE

JOB SELECT WHEN
REMOTE OR PLAY

I/O-VARIABLE
CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION

GENERAL I/O NAME
DISP. ON JOB

ANTICIPATION
FUNCTION

ALL AXES ANGLE DISP
FUNCTION

CURSOR MOVE BY
TOUCH(JOB)

JOG COND. 
PLAYBACK COND. CHECK/MACHINE LOCK 
MASTER CALLING UP 
INITIAL MOVE SPEED
OF ROBOT

A-20
156225-1CD 485/532
Corresp
ondence
START METHOD AFTER
ABSO OVER

SIGNAL NO. WHEN
DROP VALUE OVER

FUNCTION COND. 
DISPLAY COLOR COND. 
LOGDATA COND. 
DATE/TIME 
RESERVE JOB NAME 
USER ID 
SET SPEED 
KEY ALLOCATION 
JOG KEY ALLOC. 
WRONG DATA LOG 
ENERGY SAVING
FUNCTION

ENCODER
MAINTENANCE

M-SAFETY SIGNAL
SAFETY FUNC.
ALLOC

TIMER DELAY SET 
SAFETY LOGIC CIRCUIT 
DISPLAY
SETUP

ARC WELDING
(ARC, JIGLESS ARC START COND.  *1
ARC)
ARC END COND.  *1
ARC AUX COND. 
POWER SOURCE
COND.

ARC WELD DIAG. 
WEAVING 
ARC MONITOR 
ARC MONITOR (SAMPL) 
APPLI COND.(ARC) 
APPLI COND.(JIGLESS
ARC)
*2
HANDLING HANDLING DIAG. 
SPOT
WELDING WELD DIAGNOSIS DATA CLEAR CURRENT POS 
(SPOT)
A-21
156225-1CD 486/532
Corresp
ondence
I/O ALLOCATION 
GUN CONDITION 
SPOT POWER SOURCE
COND.

APPLI COND. 
SPOT
WELDING SPOT SUPERVISION 
(MOTOR GUN)
CLEARANCE SETTING 
PRESSURE 
GUN PRESSURE 
TIP DRESS CONDITION 
GENERAL WEAVING 
GENERAL DIAG. 
Maintenance mode
System INITIALIZE 
SETUP LANGUAGE 
CONTROL GROUP 
APPLICATION 
OPTION BOARD 
IO MODULE 
CMOS MEMORY 
DATE/TIME 
OPTION FUNCTION  *3
VERSION 
SECURITY 
FILE INITIALIZE 
EX.
MEMORY
LOAD 
TOOL LANGUAGE BUILD 
DISPLAY
SETUP

*1 Graphical setting display is not supported.

*2 WELDING SPEED PRIORITY can be used only.
*3 Please refer to section Section 1.2.1 "Optional Functionof controller" for the list of each
optional function.
A-22
156225-1CD 487/532
:Enable, :Display only, :Disable
Corresp
ondence
JOB JOB JOB 
EDIT 
DISPLAY 
UTILITY SETUP SPECIAL RUN 
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB 
MIRROR SHIFT 
PAM 
SPEED OVERRIDE 
COND ADJUSTMENT 
SELECT JOB 
CREATE NEW JOB 
MASTER JOB 
JOB CAPACITY 
CYCLE 
VARIABLE 
IN/OUT EXTERNAL INPUT 
EXTERNAL OUTPUT 
UNIVERSAL INPUT 
UNIVERSAL OUTPUT 
SPECIFIC INPUT 
SPECIFIC OUTPUT 
RIN 
CPRIN 
REGISTER 
AUXILIARY RELAY 
CONTROL INPUT 
PSEUDO INPUT SIG 
NETWORK INPUT 
NETWORK OUTPUT 
ANALOG OUTPUT 
SV POWER STATUS 
LADDER PROGRAM 
A-23
156225-1CD 488/532
Corresp
ondence
I/O ALARM 
I/O MESSAGE 
REMOTE 
TERMINAL 
IO SIMULATION LIST 
ROBOT CURRENT POSITION 
COMMAND POSITION 
SERVO MONITOR 
WORK HOME POS 
SECOND HOME POS 
DROP AMOUNT 
POWER ON/OFF POS 
TOOL 
INTERFERENCE 
SHOCK SENS LEVEL 
USER COORDINATE 
HOME POSITION 
MANIPULATOR TYPE 
ANALOG MONITOR 
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR 
LIMIT RELEASE 
ARM CONTROL 
LINK SERVOFLOAT 
SHIFT VALUE 
SYSTEM INFO VERSION 
MONITORING TIME 
ALARM HISTORY 
I/O MSG HISTORY 
SECURITY 
EX. MEMORY LOAD 
SAVE 
VERIFY 
DELETE 
FOLDER 
PARAMETER 
SETUP TEACHING COND. DATA RESET INSTRUCTION 
LANGUAGE LEVEL 
A-24
156225-1CD 489/532
Corresp
ondence
INSTRUCTION INPUT
LEARNING

MOVE INSTRUCTION
SET POSITION

BUZZER WHEN
POSITION TEACHING

STEP ONLY CHANGING 
RECT/CYLINDRICAL 
TOOL NO. SWITCH 
TOOL NO. INTERLOCK
FOR STEP ENTRY

POS. TEACH ONLY JOG
CONTROL GROUP

JOB UNDELETE
FUNCTION

SPEED DATA INPUT
OPERATE COND.
FORM

CYCLE SWITCH IN
TEACH MODE

CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY
MODE

CYCLE SWITCH IN
LOCAL MODE

CYCLE SWITCH IN
REMOTE MODE

SET CYCLE ON POWER
ON

SECURITY MODE
WHEN POWER ON

JOB STEP WHEN
POWER ON

GENERAL OUT KEEP
WHEN POWER ON

OPERATE ENABLE EXTERNAL START 
PP START 
EXTERNAL MODE
SWITCH

EXTERNAL CYCLE
SWITCH

PP CYCLE SWITCH 
EXTERNAL SERVO ON 
PP SERVO ON 
DSW SERVO ON 
FUNCTION ENABLE MASTER JOB CHANGE 
A-25
156225-1CD 490/532
Corresp
ondence
RESERVED START 
RESERVED START JOB
CHANGE

JOB SELECT WHEN
REMOTE OR PLAY

I/O-VARIABLE
CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION

GENERAL I/O NAME
DISP. ON JOB

ANTICIPATION
FUNCTION

ALL AXES ANGLE DISP
FUNCTION

JOG COND. 
PLAYBACK COND. CHECK/MACHINE LOCK 
MASTER CALLING UP 
INITIAL MOVE SPEED
OF ROBOT

START METHOD AFTER
ABSO OVER

SIGNAL NO. WHEN
DROP VALUE OVER

FUNCTION COND. 
DISPLAY COLOR COND. 
DATE/TIME 
RESERVE JOB NAME 
USER ID 
SET SPEED 
KEY ALLOCATION 
JOG KEY ALLOC. 
WRONG DATA LOG 
ENERGY SAVING
FUNCTION

ENCODER
MAINTENANCE

DISPLAY
SETUP

ARC WELDING ARC START COND.  *1
ARC AUX COND. 
POWER SOURCE
COND.

ARC WELD DIAG. 
A-26
156225-1CD 491/532
Corresp
ondence
WEAVING 
ARC MONITOR 
ARC MONITOR (SAMPL) 
APPLI COND.  *2
HANDLING HANDLING DIAG. 
ARC WELDING
(JIGLESS ARC)
ARC START COND.  *1
ARC AUX COND. 
POWER SOURCE
COND.

ARC WELD DIAG. 
WEAVING 
ARC MONITOR 
ARC MONITOR (SAMPL) 
SPOT
WELDING
WELD DIAGNOSIS 
GENERAL WEAVING 
GENERAL DIAG. 
SPOT
WELDING
WELD DIAGNOSIS 
GUN PRESSURE 
PRESSURE 
CLEARANCE SETTING 
TIP INSTALLATION 
Maintenance mode
System INITIALIZE 
SETUP LANGUAGE 
CONTROL GROUP 
OPTION BOARD 
IO MODULE 
DATE/TIME 
OPTION FUNCTION  *3
VERSION 
SECURITY 
FILE INITIALIZE 
EX.
MEMORY
LOAD 
SYSTEM RESTORE 
A-27
156225-1CD 492/532
Corresp
ondence
TOOL LANGUAGE BUILD 
DISPLAY
SETUP

*1 Graphical setting display is not supported.

*2 WELDING SPEED PRIORITY can be used only.
*3 Please refer to section Section 1.2.1 "Optional Functionof controller" for the list of each
optional function.
A-28
156225-1CD 493/532
A.6 List of Function depending on the system version of controller
A.6 List of Function depending on the system version

of controller
 DX200
Version
Function
DN1.01-00
Motor load estimate 
Life estimate 
Reset Job 
Cycle time display 
Step end points display in the
trace points

Collision step movement 
Conveyor synchronization 
Open the storage card folder 
Job Browser 
Lap Time Panel 
 DX100
Version
Function
DS3.20-00
Motor load estimate 
Life estimate 
Reset Job 
Cycle time display 
trace points

Collision step movement 
Conveyor synchronization 
Open the storage card folder 
Job Browser 
Lap Time Panel 
A-29
156225-1CD 494/532
A.6 List of Function depending on the system version of controller
 FS100
Version
Function
FS3.03A-00 FS3.03B-00 FS2.00-00
Motor load estimate   
Life estimate   
Reset Job   
Cycle time display   
trace points
  
Collision step movement   
Conveyor synchronization   
Open the storage card folder   
Job Browser   
Lap Time Panel   
 NX100
Version
Function
NS4.75-00 NS5.09-45 NS4.69-A5
Motor load estimate   
Life estimate   
Reset Job   
Cycle time display   
trace points
  
Collision step movement   
Conveyor synchronization   
Open the storage card folder   
Job Browser   
Lap Time Panel   
A-30
156225-1CD 495/532
A.7 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG-VRC
A.7 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values 

Supported by MotoSim EG-VRC
 DX200
Robot Type
Model Name Offset Value (mm) Remarks
(Model File Name)
MA1440 MA01440-A00 450 Added at Ver4.00
MH12 MH00012-A00 450 Added at Ver4.00
MS165 MS00165-A00 650 Added at Ver4.01
A-31
156225-1CD 496/532
 DX100
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
DX1350D DX1350D-A00 480 Added at Ver2.60
EP4000D EP4000D-J72 740 Added at Ver2.72
EP4000D EP4000D-K72 740 Added at Ver2.72
EP4000D EP4000D-L72 740 Added at Ver2.72
EPH130D EPH130D-A00 730 Added at Ver2.45
EPH130RLD PH13RLD-A00 600 Added at Ver2.72
EPH4000D EPH400D-JA0 758 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-JB0 758 Added at Ver2.72
EPH4000D EPH400D-KA0 758 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-KB0 758 Added at Ver2.72
EPH4000D EPH400D-LA0 758 Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000D EPH400D-LB0 758 Added at Ver2.72
ES165D ES0165D-A00 650 Added at Ver2.00
ES165D-100 ES0165D-A10 650 Added at Ver2.81
ES165RD ES165RD-A00 450 Added at Ver2.20
ES200D ES0200D-A00 650 Added at Ver2.00
ES280D-230 ES0280D-A10 650 Added at Ver2.21
HP20D HP0020D-A00 505 Added at Ver2.00
HP20D-6 HP0020D-A10 505 Added at Ver2.40
HP20RD HP020RD-A00 305 Added at Ver2.21
IS300D IS0300D-A00 0 Added at Ver2.21
MC2000 MC02000-A00 680 Added at Ver2.40
MFL2200D-2650 MFL050D-C20 827 Added at Ver2.45
MFS2500D-4000 MFS060D-A00 0 Added at Ver4.00
MH5 MH00005-C00 330 Added at Ver2.21
MH5 MH00005-E00 330 Added at Ver2.24
MH5 MH00005-E10 330 Added at Ver2.24
MH5L MH0005L-C00 330 Added at Ver2.21
MH5LS MH005LS-A00 330 Added at Ver2.60
MH5S MH0005S-A00 330 Added at Ver2.60
MH6 MH00006-C00 450 Added at Ver4.00
MH6-10 MH00006-A30 450 Added at Ver2.21
MH6S MH0006S-A00 450 Added at Ver2.10
A-32
156225-1CD 497/532
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
MH165 MH00165-B00 650 Added at Ver2.25
MH250 MH00250-B00 650 Added at Ver2.40
MH400 MH00400-A0E 900 Added at Ver2.81
MPK2 MPK0002-A00 500 Added at Ver2.24
MPK2 MPK0002-B01 420 Added at Ver2.24
MPL80 MPL0080-A00 540 Added at Ver2.21
MS80W MS0080W-A00 540 Added at Ver2.40
MS80W MS0080W-B00 540 Added at Ver2.40
VD20S RVD800S6A1 508.5 Added at Ver2.27
VD35D-G4A RVD1230D6A1 556.5 Added at Ver2.27
VD35S-G4A RVD1230S6A1 556.5 Added at Ver2.27
VD40D RVD2200D6A1 624 Added at Ver2.72
VD40S RVD2200S6A1 624 Added at Ver2.72
VD95D RVD1450D6D1 679 Added at Ver2.27
SDA5D SDA005D-A00 900 Added at Ver2.22
SDA10D SDA010D-B00 550 Added at Ver2.10
SIA5D SIA005D-A00 309.5 Added at Ver2.45
SIA10D SIA010D-A00 360 Added at Ver2.10
SIA20D SIA020D-Y00 0 Added at Ver2.21
UP120ED-165 UP120ED-A10 525 Added at Ver2.21
UP350D UP0350D-A00 900 Added at Ver2.10
UP350D-600 UP0350D-B30 900 Added at Ver2.24
UP400RD UP400RD-A00 1000 Added at Ver2.81
VA1400 VA01400-A00 450 Added at Ver2.00
A-33
156225-1CD 498/532
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
VS50 VS00050-A00 540 Added at Ver2.00
 FS100
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
BMDA3 BMDA003-A01 460 Added at Ver4.10
HP20F HP0020F-A00 505 Added at Ver2.81
MHJ MH0000J-A00 240 Added at Ver2.40
MH3BM MH003BM-A00 350 Added at Ver2.80
MH3F MH0003F-A00 290 Added at Ver2.40
MH5LF MH005LF-A00 330 Added at Ver2.60
MPK2F MPK002F-A00 420 Added at Ver2.60
MPK2F-5 MPK002F-A20 420 Added at Ver2.70
MPP3 MPP0003-A00 0 Added at Ver2.40
MPP3S MPP003S-A00 0 Added at Ver4.10
SDA5F SDA005F-A00 900 Added at Ver2.45
SDA10F SDA010F-A00 1200 Added at Ver2.40
SIA5F SIA005F-A00 309.5 Added at Ver2.70
SIA10F SIA010F-A00 360 Added at Ver2.44
SIA20F SIA020F-A00 410 Added at Ver2.44
A-34
156225-1CD 499/532
 NX100
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
DA20 DA20-A00 559
DIA10 DIA10-A00 1037
DIA20 DIA20-A00 1050 Added at Ver2.10
DX1350N DX1350N-A00 480
EA1400N EA1400N-A00 450
EA1400N
EA1400N-A10 450
Ceiling Mounted Type
EA1800N EA1800N-A00 555
EA1900N EA1900N-A00 505
EA1900N
EA1900N-A10 505
ECD2500D-3700 ECD80D-A00 0 Added at Ver2.20
ECR200 ECR200-A00 735
ECR3J ECR3J-A00 290 Added at Ver2.20
ECR400R-200 ECR400R-A10 1005 Added at Ver2.20
ECR400R-400 ECR400R-B00 1005 Added at Ver2.20
ECS600N ECS600N-A01 730 Added at Ver2.21
EH80 EH80-A00 540
EH130 EH130-A00 650
EH130 EH130-A20 650
EH200 EH200-A00 730
EH200-150 EH200-A10 730
EP4000N EP4000N-J00 740
EP4000N EP4000N-J10 740
EP4000N EP4000N-J30 740
EP4000N EP4000N-J40 740
EP4000N EP4000N-J50 740
EP4000N EP4000N-J60 740
EP4000N EP4000N-K00 740
EP4000N EP4000N-K10 740
EP4000N EP4000N-K30 740
EP4000N EP4000N-K40 740
EP4000N EP4000N-K50 740
EP4000N EP4000N-K60 740
EP4000N EP4000N-L00 740
EP4000N EP4000N-L10 740
EP4000N EP4000N-L30 740
EP4000N EP4000N-L40 740
EP4000N EP4000N-L50 740
EP4000N EP4000N-L60 740
A-35
156225-1CD 500/532
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
EPH130 EPH130-A00 730
EPH130 EPH130-C24 730
EPH130R EPH130R-A00 600
EPH130RL EPH130RL-A00 600
EPH130RL EPH130RL-A54 600
EPH130RL-85 EPH130RL-A34 600
EPH130RL-85 EPH130RL-A60 600 Added at Ver1.42
EPH4000 EPH4000-J01 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-J11 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-J31 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-J41 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-J51 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-J60 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-J71 758 Added at Ver1.42
EPH4000 EPH4000-J81 758 Added at Ver1.20
EPH4000 EPH4000-JA0 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-K01 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-K11 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-K31 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-K41 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-K51 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-K60 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-KA0 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-L01 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-L11 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-L31 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-L41 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-L51 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-L60 758
EPH4000 EPH4000-LA0 758
EPL80 EPL80-A00 540
EPL160 EPL160-A00 880
EPL160 EPL160-A10 880
EPL300 EPL300-A00 880
EPL300 EPL300-A10 880
EPL500 EPL500-A00 880
EPL500 EPL500-A10 880
EPX1250 EPX1250-A000 310 Added at Ver2.80
A-36
156225-1CD 501/532
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
EPX2800 EPX2800-A000 795.5 Added at Ver2.80
EPX2800R EPX2800R-A000 817.5 Added at Ver2.80
ES120N ES120N-A00 650 Added at Ver2.00
ES120N ES120N-A20 680 Added at Ver2.00
ES165N ES165N-A00 650
ES165N-100 ES165N-A10 650
ES165RN ES165RN-A00 450
ES200N ES200N-A00 650
ES200RN ES200RN-A00 450
ES200TN ES200TN-A00 650
ES200RN-120 ES200RN-A10 450
ES280N ES280N-A00 650
HP3 HP3-A00 300
HP3J HP3J-J00 290
HP3L HP3L-A00 300
HP3XF HP3XF-A00 300
HP3XF HP3XF-B00 300
HP5 HP5-A00 300
HP6 HP6-A00 450
HP6R HP6-R00 240
HP6R HP6-R10 240
HP6S HP6-A10 450
HP20 HP20-A00 505
HP20-6 HP20-A10 505
HP20 IP65 HP20-A20 505
HP20R HP20R-B2C 305 Added at Ver2.00
HP165 HP165-A00 650
IA20 IA20-A00 450
SDA10 SDA10-A00 1200
SDA10 SDA10-B00 550 Added at Ver2.10
SDA20 SDA20-A00 550 Added at Ver1.42
SIA10 SIA10-A00 360 Added at Ver1.20
SIA20 SIA20-A00 410 Added at Ver1.20
SP800N SP800N-A00 540
SSA2000 SSA3-A00 450
SSA2000
SSA3-A10 450
SSF2000 SSF6-A00 450
SSF2000R SSF6R-A20 240 Added at Ver2.00
UP20MN UP20MN-A00 540
A-37
156225-1CD 502/532
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
UP50N UP50N-A00 540
UP50N UP50N-A51 540
UP50N UP50N-AA1 540 Added at Ver1.20
UP50N-80 UP50N-A10 540
UP50SN UP50N-A20 540
UP50SN UP50N-A71 540
UP50N-35 UP50N-A30 540
UP50RN-35 UP50RN-A10 450
UP120EN-165 UP120EN-A10 525
UP130RN UP130RN-B00 600 Added at Ver1.20
UP130RLN UP130RN-A2A 600
UP130RLN UP130RN-A2B 600
UP130RLN-85 UP130RN-A4A 600
UP350N UP350N-A00 900
UP350N-200 UP350N-A10 900
UP350N-500 UP350N-A20 900
UP350N-600 UP350N-A30 900
UP400RN UP400RN-A00 1000
 MOTOPOS
Model Name Robot Type Model File Name Remarks

D200B-C00 MPD200B-C00 D200B-C00 Added at Ver2.45
D250B(A00) MPD250B-A00 D250B-A00
D500B(A00) MPD500B-A00 D500B-A00
D500B(A12) MPD500B-A12 D500B-A12
D700B(A00) MPD700B-A00 D700B-A00 Added at Ver2.20
S250B(A00) MPS250B-A00 S250B-A00
S500B(A00) MPS500B-A00 S500B-A00
T5000B MPT5000B-A00 T5000B-A00
A-38
156225-1CD 503/532
 MOTOFEEDER
Model registration on the VRC controller Model Name Remarks

MF216A Added at Ver2.80
MF216A_SPINDLE Added at Ver2.80
High-Speed Rotation Specification(with spindle unit)
MF218A_SPINDLE Added at Ver2.80
High-Speed Rotation Specification(with Spindle unit)
MF214B Added at Ver2.80
MF214B_SPINDLE Added at Ver2.80
A-39
156225-1CD 504/532
1.8 Frequently-Asked Questions
 When the driver has been installed with USB type key connected to
a personal computer
1. With the USB type key attached to a personal computer, delete the item registered as
"USB Token" in Device Manager.
2. Uninstall the driver (Sentinel System Driver 5.41.1(32-bit)) with "Add/Remove 
Programs".
3. Install the driver with key detached from personal computer.
 When a older version key driver has been installed over a newer key
driver version.
In such case, the key driver may not operate properly.
Uninstall the Sentinel System Driver with Windows "Add / Remove Programs" function. Then
reinstall the Sentinel key driver. For details, please refer to Section "1.4 Hardware Key" of the
manual.
 Cell file containing HSF files don't display properly

When cell file containing HSF model files, if the HSF format version is higher than the one
currently supported by MotoSim EG-VRC, the HSF file may not display properly. In the case
that a newer MotoSim EG-VRC version displays the cell properly, the newer MotoSim EG-
VRC can save the cell file in a previous MotoSim EG-VRC format. This will also save the HSF
file into the corresponding format version (Refer to Section "4.3.2 Save As" for details.) If the
HSF file was generated by a 3rd party software, look in the that software HSF export options
to export the file in an HSF format version corresponding to you current version of MotoSim
EG-VRC.
 MotoSim EG Cell file compatibility

MotoSim EG-VRC can convert and load files created by MotoSim EG but cannot playback the
job and the robot operations are limited. The MotoSim EG robot should be replace by the
VRC corresponding robot type. Please refer to Section "11.7 External Axes Setting (Motor
Gun)".
Cell file created with MotoSim EG-VRC cannot be used by MotoSim EG or MotoSim EG.
 MotoSim EG-VRC - CadPack Cell file compatibility

Cell file created with MotoSim EG-VRC can be used by MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack. Cell file
created with MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack can also be used by MotoSim EG-VRC even if CAD
data (IGES,SAT) was imported into the cell. When saving the cell, the MotoSim EG-VRC-
CadPack converts imported CAD data into HSF files. Once that conversion is done, the
regular MotoSim EG-VRC can open the file without problems.
A-40
156225-1CD 505/532
 Graphic Driver Concerns

With MotoSim EG-VRC, some old version display adapters (graphic drivers) may not properly
generate memos and dimension lines. In those cases, it is necessary to upgrade the version
of the display driver. For Intel type adapter, verify that the version number is 6.14.10.4020 or
later, otherwise please upgrade the display driver.
Version Verification Procedure

The following example is for a IntelR Graphics Controller on a Windows 2000 operating
systems.
1. With the mouse right click on the desktop and select "Properties" from the popup menu
to display the Desktop Properties dialog.
2. Select the "Display" tab.
A-41
156225-1CD 506/532
3. Click on the "Advanced" button to display the graphic driver property dialog.
4. Select the "IntelR Graphics Technology”ntab.
5. Verify the version. (The version is 6.13.01.3084. An upgrade is necessary.)
A-42
156225-1CD 507/532
Version Upgrade Procedure

Download the necessary file (i.e. Win2K_XP1410.exe) from the download site and execute it.
(In this example, the http://support.intel.com/support/go/downloads site was used.)
 Backup VRC.BIN file

If computer power shortage or an application error occurs when MotoSim EG-VRC is
accessing the VRC.BIN file, the file may become corrupted and prevent the controller and
Virtual Pendant to load properly. As a safeguard, when the cell is saved, the previous copy of
the VRC.BIN is kept as a backup.
To restore the backup copy of the VRC.BIN file:

1. Open the controller folder under the cell directory and rename the VRC.BIN.bak file to
VRC.BIN.
2. Start MotoSim EG-VRC but don’t open the cell yet. If MotoSim EG-VRC is already
running, close all the cells.
3. Start the controller in maintencae mode with the restored CMOS.BIN file On the
[Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Maintenance mode] button, and then
selecting the newly renamed VRC.BIN. (For details, refer to Section "7.10 VRC
Maintenance Mode".)
4. Load the VRC.BIN on the Virtual Pendant, select {Compact Flash} - {LOAD CMOS}.
(This may take a few moments and warning message, indicating not to turn off the
controller, appears at the bottom of the Virtual Pendant. Wait until the message
disappears before proceeding to another operation that may cause the controller to
reboot or close. )
5. Once the VRC.BIN load is done, close the controller by pressing the “End” button of
the “VRC Maintenance Mode” dialog.
6. Open the cell.
 Recovery method when an alarm occurs during the creation of a

new controller.
When a new controller is created with the "VRC Controller (using CMOS.BIN file)" of an actual
controller, alarms may display on the Virtual Pendant. 
In such case, use the following procedure:
1. Save the cell and then close it.

2. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Maintenance mode] button, the
[Maintenance mode] dialog appears.
A-43
156225-1CD 508/532
3. The VRC Maintenance Mode dialog will display. Use the browsing button to select the
VRC.BIN file located in the controller folder under the cell folder. Once the VRC.BIN
file is selected, press the [Start] button. The controller will start in maintenance mode
and display the Virtual Pendant (it may take a few moments).
The procedures below corresponds to various alarm.
Alarm 0320 Verify error (I/O Module)

(1) Select {System} - {Setup}.
(2) Select [I/O Module].
(3) Press the [Enter] key twice. When the confirmation message displays, select [Yes].
(4) Press the [End] button of the [VRC Maintenance Mode] dialog to close the
controller.
(5) When all the step above are completed. Reopen the cell.
A-44
156225-1CD 509/532
Alarm 0020 Communication Error(CPU)

(2) Select [Options].
(3) Press the [Enter] key. When the confirmation message displays, select [Yes].
controller.
(5) When all the step above are completed. Reopen the cell. 
Alarm 0060 Communication Error (IO Module) [16]

(2) Select [Options].
(3) Press the [Enter] key. When the confirmation message displays, select [Yes].
(4) Select [IO Module].
(5) When the [IO Module] displays, press the [Enter] key twice.
(6) When the confirmation message displays, select [Yes].
controller.
(8) When all the step above are completed. Reopen the cell. 
A-45
156225-1CD 510/532
Error 3100 Total checksum error
The CMOS cannot be loaded because the “VRC.BIN” version is from a controller version
incompatible with the selected VRC version.
In such case, retrieve the individual data files from the actual controller and load them in the
VRC controller.
1. On the pendant of the actual controller, select [FD/CF] - [SAVE] and save:
• All the files from the JOB, FILE /GENERAL DATA, I/O DATA, SYSTEM DATA
section.
• The "BATCH PARAMETER (ALL.PRM)" file under the PARAMETER section.
2. In MotoSim EG-VRC, select [Controller] - [New Controller] and add a new controller
with "No CMOS.BIN file".
Please refer to Section "7.1 Adding a New Controller" for more details.
When initializing this new controller, make sure to select the same settings as the actual
NOTE controller (the control group and application must match to be able to load the individual
files).
3. Copy the individual files retrieved from the actual controller in the "Storage Card" folder
under the controller folder of the cell.
4. On the Virtual Pendant, select [FD/CF] - [LOAD]
When loading the individual files, please proceed in the following order:
(1) PARAMETER file
NOTE (2) I/O DATA files
(3) Other files
Please refer to section Section "A.3 Storage Card" for details.
A-46
156225-1CD 511/532
 Trouble shooting when virtual pendant doesn't accept operation

after newly making controller (Nothing is displayed on the screen).
When a virtual pendant starts in the ordinary mode after completing CMOS loading operation
in the maintenance mode when newly making it by setting "VRC Controller (using CMOS.BIN
file)" when the controller newly makes it, a virtual pendant might not accept the operation at all
(Even if the menu is selected, nothing is displayed on the screen).
When this phenomenon is generated, it restores it according to the following procedures.
1. After the cell is preserved, the cell is closed.

2. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Boot] group, click the [Maintenance mode] button.
3. [VRC Maintenance Mode] appears.

Select "VRC.BIN" that exists in the controller folder below the folder where the cell
exists, Push [Start] , and the maintenance mode is started.
4. Select [SYSTEM]-[SETUP].
5. Select [OPTION BOARD].
6. Because the confirming message displays to push [enter], select [yes].
A-47
156225-1CD 512/532
7. The “IO MODULE” screen displays it continuously. Select [SYSTEM]-[SETUP]-[IO

MODULE] When it is not displayed.
8. Because the confirming message displays to push [enter] twice, select [yes].
9. The [End] is selected by the [VRC Maintenance Mode], and the maintenance mode is
ended.
10. The restoration operation is completed above. Please open the cell again.
 Caution on setting up two or more 4-axis robots (ex. MPL300) to the

one controller
On creating a new controller without a New VRC Controller (no file), If two or more 4-axis
robots are set up to the one controller, use the following procedure certainly.
Basically, the following procedure is equal to that of Section "7.1.1 Create a New VRC
Controller (no file)", but Setting on the [CONNECT] display of "Initialize the controller in the
step 3" is used the following procedure.
The procedure is explained with setting up the two 4-axis robots to the one controller.
A-48
156225-1CD 513/532
Procedure
1. Proceed to 1 to 3 of Section "7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200, DX100, NX100)".
2. On setting [CONNECT] in step 4 of Section "7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200,
DX100, NX100)", change [SV] from "#1" to "#2".
3. Proceed to the step 5 to 10 of Section "7.1.3 Initializing the Controller (DX200, DX100,
NX100)".
 Way to make the display speed faster

When the large CAD data is used, the Collision Detection function is used, or the performance
of using PC is low, the display process can not executed smoothly, so the simulation speed
may be lower.
If the above symptoms occurred, do the following operation, and the display performance may
be made better.
• Raise the number of Refresh Interval

The number of redrawing is reduced, so the load of redrawing is reduced.
→ For details, please refer to the Section "7.5.4 Refresh Interval".
• Reduce the number of trace or Delete the trace
The number of drawing trace is reduced, so the load of drawing trace is reduced.
→ For details, please refer to the Section "7.9 Trace".
• Enable "Back Plane Culling" of models
The back plane of the CAD data is hidden, so the CAD data is displayed faster.
→ For details, please refer to the Section "9.4 Editing a Model".
A-49
156225-1CD 514/532
• Raise the Culling Threshold of Framerate Optimization

Model data which displayed size is smaller than the selected pixel on the display are not
displayed, so the model is displayed faster.
→ For details, please refer to the Section "10.5 Performance Settings".
• Hide the shadow
The shadow is hidden, so the load of drawing shadow is reduced.
→ For details, please refer to the Section "10.1.4 Shadow".
• Disable "Smooth Transition"
The viewpoint changes without "Smooth Transition", it changes immediately.
→ For details, please refer to the Section "10.1.2 Smooth Transition".
• Drawing performance is measurable.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Tools] group, click the [Measure Performance] button, the
screen of MotoSimEG-VRC begins rotation and displays the number of drawing frames
per second. If it measures before and after setting change and the following red frame
numerical value becomes large, it is shown that drawing performance is going up.
A-50
156225-1CD 515/532
 Solution in case characters is missing from the screen of 

MotoSimEG-VRC in Windows7
When a character is missing from the screen of MotoSimEG-VRC in Windows7, please
change character size by the following procedure.
1. Open the {Display} of Control Panel.
To open {Display}, Click the [Start] button, and [Control Panel].
(a) In the case of "View by" is "Category":
Click the [Appearance and Personalization] and [Display].
(b) In the case of "View by" is "Large icons" or "Small icons":

Click the [Display].
2. In [Make it easier to read what's on your screen], Select the [Smaller - 100%] button,
and click the [Apply] button.
A-51
156225-1CD 516/532
 Docking Window
Some windows are dockable with any of the four directions of the main screen.
In MotoSim EG-VRC, the following windows are dockable.
• Position Panel
• OLP
• CadTree
• Variable Monitor
• Pulse Recorder
• Lap Time Panel
• Collision Detection
Docking Operation
When the window is dragged to another position, the guide diamond is displayed in order to
re-dock the window.
Guide Diamond
When the dragged window reaches the location where want to dock it , move the pointer over
the corresponding portion of the guide diamond. The designated area is shaded. To dock the
window in the position indicated, release the mouse button.
A-52
156225-1CD 517/532
Floating Operation
Drag the window, and release the mouse button at places other than the guide diamond.
Drag
Docking Operation with Two or More Windows

When two or more dockable windows show, it can dock not only with the main window but with
another window.
Drag to the another window
Release the mouse button
The window is docked
Floating Operation with Two or More Windows

Drag the window, and release the mouse button at places other than the guide diamond.
Please refer to the "Floating Operation" for details.
A-53
156225-1CD 518/532
Docking Operation as Tab with Two or More Windows

When two or more dockable windows show, Windows are dockable also as a tab.
Drag the window and move the pointer over the center of the guide diamond ( ) or drag to
the title bar of another dockable window and release the mouse button.
Drag to the another window
Release the mouse

button
The window is docked
Floating Operation as Tab with Two or More Windows

To float the window shown as the tab, drag it, and release the mouse button at places other
than the guide diamond.
Drag
A-54
156225-1CD 519/532
 Quick Access Toolbar

"Quick Access Toolbar" is convenient to execute a command quickly, without not changing a
ribbon tab or displaying a menu from the MotoSim EG-VRC button ( ).
If prepopulate the quick access toolbar with the frequently used commands, the button of the
commands can always be displayed.
Quick Access Toobar
1. To customize the quick access toolbar, click the the following button. ( )
Customize the quick

access toolbar
2. When add the "Open" command to the quick access toolbar, click the "Open" menu.
When add the other commands, click the "More commands..." menu. The "Customize"
dialog appears.
A-55
156225-1CD 520/532
3. Select the tab name by "Choose commands from" list box, and the commands is
displayed. Select the command, and click the [Add] button.
4. The added command is diplayed in the right side list. Click the [OK] button.
Then the command is added to the quick access toolbar.
To delete the command button from the quick access toolbar, right-click the target button,
NOTE and click the "Remove from Quick Access Toolbar on the shortcut menu" menu.
When add or remove the two or more buttons, it can be operated efficiently in the
"Customize" dialog.
A-56
156225-1CD 521/532
 Comparison Table with the New Menu from the Old Menu and the
Old Tool Bar
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar New Menu
File
New - -
Open - -
Close
Save -
Save As -
Open Sample Cell - -
Template - -
Export File -
Relative Path -
Exit -
Edit
Undo [Home] - [Edit] -
Redo [Home] - [Edit] -
Copy [Home] - [Tools] -
Screen
Camera Scope
Zoom To Extents [Home] - [View] -
Direction
View [Home] - [View] -
A-57
156225-1CD 522/532
Side [Home] - [View] -
Top [Home] - [View] -
Front [Home] - [View] -
View Manager [Home] - [View] -
Select Model
[Home] - [Model] -
Pick Mode
Free [Home] - [Pick] -
Vetex
Center
Edge
Pick Object
Models [Home] - [Pick] -
Frames
Lines
Points
Floor
Line Size [Home] - [Screen] -

Small
Medium
Large
Frame Display
[Home] - [Screen] -
Rendering Mode
[Home] - [Screen] -
FlatShading
GourandShading
Wireframe
SmoothTransition
A-58
156225-1CD 523/532
Light Manager [Home] - [Screen] -
Shadow [Home] - [Screen] -
[Home] - [Screen] -
Memo
[Home] - [Screen] -
Dimension Line
Markup
Freehand [Home] - [Screen] -
Circle
Rectangle
Notes
Cutting Planes
X-Cutting Planes [Home] - [Screen] -
Y-Cutting Planes
Z-Cutting Planes
Measure
Distance [Home] - [Mesurement] -
Angle [Home] - [Mesurement] -
Controller
New Controller [Controller] - [Setup] -
Copy Controller [Controller] - [Setup] -
Delete Controller [Controller] - [Setup] -
Select Controller/Robot
Controller Setting
A-59
156225-1CD 524/532
Tool Data
[Controller] - [File Settings] -
User Frame Data

Open a folder external

storage [Controller] - [VPP] -
Reboot Controller [Controller] - [Boot] -
Boot
MaintenanceMode [Controller] - [Boot] -
Refrash Interval [Home] - [Settings] -
Servo Emulation [Simulation] - [Playback] -
Welding Condition [Controller] - [File Settings] -
Cube Area Update &

Display
Delete Cube Area
Model
Safety Function
Safety Function
File [Controller] - [File Settings] -
Tool
Interference
Model
Robot
Approximate
Model
Robot Setting
Property [Controller] - [Robot] -
ReachView [Controller] - [Robot] -
Calibration [Controller] - [File Settings] -
A-60
156225-1CD 525/532
Device
Add Conveyor [Controller] - [External Device] -
Ade Press
Add Gantry
SoftLimit Setting [Controller] - [External Device] -
Job Panel [Controller] - [External Device] -
Conveyor Operation [Controller] - [External Device] -

Panel
Conveyor Setting [Controller] - [External Device] -
Conveyor [Controller] - [External Device] -

Synchoronization
Playback
Cycle Time [Simulation] - [Playback] -
Start
[Simulation] - [Playback] -
Hold [Simulation] - [Playback] -
Step Next
Step Back
Reset Job [Simulation] - [Playback] -
Trace [Simulation] - [Monitor] -
Model
New Model
Edit Model
Hide/See
Model
Frame
A-61
156225-1CD 526/532
Name
Wiring View
Model Attribute
Set Parent
Move Parent
Set File Path
Rename
Set Position
Property
Edit
Cut
Copy
Patsh
Delete
Fine
Model Tree View
Refresh View
Expand Tree
Models List
Save Model Group
Load Model Group
Model Script Editor

[Simulation] - [Model Simulation] -
Tool
CAD Tree [Home] - [Model] -
Positon Panel
[Home] - [Teaching] -
OLP [Home] - [Teaching] -
Job Shift
A-62
156225-1CD 527/532
I/O Monitor
[Simulation] - [Monitor] -
I/O Events
[Simulation] - [I/O Settings] -
I/O Connections
[Simulation] - [I/O Settings] -
Variable Monitor
Lap Time Panel

StafeMaster [Simulation] - [Playback] -
Collision Detection
[Simulation] - [Collision] -
Sensing Definition
[Simulation] - [Settings] -
Pulse Record
Paing Setting
[Simulation] - [Settings] -
Show Speed Graph

Execute Soft [Home] - [Tools] -
Execute JobBraowser
-
Option
[Home] - [Settings] -
CAM
Create Job Form CAM

Load Robot Settings
Option Tool
A-63
156225-1CD 528/532
Motor Load Estimate

[Option Function] - [Estimate] -
Life Estimate
[Option Function] - [Estimate] -
View
Toolbar
File Bar
Edit Bar
Playback Bar
CAD Bar
View Bar
Controller Bar
Memo Bar
Cutting Bar
Mesure Bar
Status Bar
Japanese
Windwos
Cascade
Tile Horizontally
Tile Vertically
Split
Help
Help -
CAM Help -
Version
Performance [Home] - [Tools] -
Toolbar Only
[Controller] - [VPP] -
A-64
156225-1CD 529/532
[Home] - [Operation Handle] -
A-65
156225-1CD 530/532
Revision History
Date CEN / Revision Reason For Revision Initials
ECN No.
6/16/2014 14-0699M 4 The manual changed throughout due to: JFC
1. The appearance of MotoSim EG-VRC Ver5.00 differs.
2. Operation method of the main screen.
3. Runs two or more MotoSim EG-VRC. However, the
number of the cells which can be used by MotoSim EG-VRC
is one.
- " Docking Window "
- " Quick Access Toolbar "
- " Comparison Table with the New Menu from the Old
Menu and the Old Tool Bar "
B-1
156225-1CD 531/532
MotoSim EG-VRC
OPERATION MANUAL
FOR WINDOWS
Specifications are subject to change without notice

for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
MANUAL NO.
156225-1CD 0 532/532

MotoSim VRC 5.0 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MotoSim VRC 5.0 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MotoSim VRC 5.0 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MotoSim EG-VRC Ver 5.

Part Number: 156225-1CD

This instruction manual is applicable to both FS100 (a controller for small-sized

Notes for Safe Operation

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Always be sure to follow explicitly the items listed under this

PROHIBITED Must never be performed.

Notation for Menus and Buttons

Item Manual Designation

Menu The menus displayed on screen are denoted with { }.

Button The buttons, check boxes, radio buttons displayed on

Description of the Operation Procedure

2 MotoSim EG-VRC Quick Tour

4 Creating and Editing a Cell

7 Controller and Robot Settings

1.1 Overview of MotoSim EG-VRC

1.1.1 Difference of Operation from Ver 4.10

1.2 Notice and Restriction about MotoSim EG-VRC

1.2.1 Optional Functionof controller

Function Name DX200 DX100 FS100 NX100

Tool No. Switching    

Display IO Name in Job   *1 ―

Functional safety *2 ― ― ―

*1 Standard function for FS100.

Please refer to section

1.2.2 Using data saved from a real controller with 

1.2.3 Using MotoSim EG-VRC data on a real controller

• The "CMOS.BIN" file cannot be saved from MotoSim EG-VRC.

1.2.4 Function depending on the system version of 

1.2.5 Restriction of Function of Controller

• MotoSim EG-VRC is supported the standard controller version only.

1.2.7 Hardware Requirements

1.2.8 Supported robot model

1.3 Environment Required for MotoSim EG-VRC

Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack3 (32bit)

CPU Intel® Core™ 2 Duo or more multi-core processor.

Hardware Disk 1 GB or more

Used under single user environment.

Other Graphic Board for 3D.

*1 MS-Windows XP, MS-Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation,

1.4 Hardware Key

1.5 Installing MotoSim EG-VRC

2. When the install CD is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, the 

1.6 Definition of Terms

A file in which MotoSim EG-VRC simulation environmental data

A file in which geometric data of robots, workpieces or tools are

Each model requires a coordinate that refers to something in the

1.7 Folder Configuration

CELLS Simulation environment used for the cell

Stores the robot data: robot

Stores the controller files

TEST.VCL Cell file

EXAMPLE Stores sample cell files

TEMPLATE Stores template cell files created by the

MOTOMAN Stores the VRC (Virtual Robot Controller)

CONTROLLER Stores the files about devices.

DEVICE Stores the help files.

DOC Stores standard models such as controller,

Files required to run MotoSimEG-VRC such as